You are on page 1of 372

Welcome!

New Technical Information Products and Services


And a New Name
The new 2002 Technical Information Products and Services catalogue contains new information
products and services, which are part of Motorolas Lifecycle Services portfolio, that are designed to
enhance the effectiveness of the professionals who work on your Motorola wireless network. You
will find an expanded range of these products and services to complement the high quality and
value of our traditional classroom and laboratory training courses. To better describe our enhanced
offerings, weve changed our name to Technical Information Products and Services.
One of our exciting, new offerings, Technical Training Direct, brings a broad selection of e-Learning
solutions and delivers them directly to your desk via the Internet. Also new for 2002 are a variety of
service offerings that are designed to improve the effectiveness of your training activities including
Training Needs Analysis, Skills Assessment Services, Certification, and Customized Curriculum
Development. In addition, our expanding library of CD-ROM information products now features
interactive support tools that help you navigate complex technical information via an intuitive, taskbased interface so you can quickly and efficiently locate the operation information you need to
support your Motorola wireless network. After listening to your information needs requests, we are
pleased to also provide a comprehensive set of Technical Information Products and Services for
2002.
To learn more about these exciting new products and services, visit our Web site at
http://services.Motorola.com.
The 2002 catalogue is a guide to training courses available through Technical Information Products
and Services. It lists the recommended learning paths to properly operate and maintain Motorolas
cellular Infrastructure equipment. Also, the catalogue provides a brief description of each course,
the course objectives, expected attendees, course prerequisites, and a listing of key lesson
objectives associated with each course.
In a constantly evolving cellular industry, engineering experience and expertise provides Cellular
Operators with a significant competitive edge. Motorolas comprehensive training portfolio offers
Cellular Operators the opportunity to develop a novice into an expert in the shortest possible lead
time.

Knowledge
Motorola is committed to a philosophy of knowledge transfer, enabling Cellular Operators to get the
most out of Motorolas leading edge technology and advanced software applications.
It is essential that a Cellular Operator ensures engineers are trained to the optimum level, in the
correct disciplines, to facilitate a right-first-time approach, minimizing human error and reducing cost
of network ownership. This is achieved by providing a comprehensive training curriculum supported
by an extensive training schedule and complete Customer support documentation.

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

Welcome!
Catalogue
This catalogue comprises a description of the training curriculum for each jobset stream with respect
to CDMA, GSM, GPRS and 3G networks, followed by an outline of each course in the curriculum.
General information is also available which will help you to make arrangements for your course.
The catalogue is divided into the following sections:
Regional Training Centers provides a complete list of Motorola technical training facilities worldwide.
Student Information and Services provides information needed to register and enroll in classes at the
various training facilities worldwide. This portion of the catalogue features a list of local hotel
accommodations, driving directions and maps to our facilities.
Motorola Technical Training Direct provides information needed about Motorolas Learning
Management System (LMS), which allows students the opportunity to participate in technical
courses anywhere, anytime. The LMS enables students and training administrators to enroll in
eLearning as well as our traditional instructor-led courses, allowing them to track their progress
and to manage a larger number of students.
Curriculum Paths and Jobset Functions and Training Advice provide a graphic representation of curriculum
paths and prerequisites. The Motorola Training Curriculum is designed around a number of
jobset descriptions researched through Cellular Operators. These jobset functions are
essentially generic and cannot be guaranteed to exactly match the individual organization of
each Cellular Operator. With this in mind, a certain amount of interpretation may be necessary to
adapt the jobset streams for specific operational requirements.
Course Descriptions: provides a complete list of all courses offered by Motorola. Motorola offers
traditional instructor-led courses as well as web- and cd-rom-based e-learning courses. Courses
in this catalog are listed alphabetically within their applicable technology area (General Courses,
CDMA Courses, GSM Courses, GPRS Courses, UMTS Courses, TDMA Courses, and Analog Courses).

Course prerequisites
Prerequisites have been identified for most courses presented by Technical Information Products
and Services. Satisfying course prerequisites ensures that students receive the maximum benefit
from training. Please verify prospective students have met entry requirements.
If a student does not meet the prerequisites or have prerequisite knowledge at the time of
enrollment, Technical Information Products and Services will be happy to enroll the student
in a pre-requisite class which would be more beneficial to their learning progress. Technical
Information Products and Services retains the right to remove a student from the class
without refund should that student impede the progress of the course as a whole.

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

Welcome!
Lifecycle Services Online
The Technical Information Products and Services course catalogue, schedule, bulletins and other
helpful information are available online. All customers and Motorolans can view this information by
accessing the following web site: https://services.motorola.com
Motorola secures entry for the protection of our customers through the use of a password. Obtain a
Lifecycle Services online account by selecting the Apply for your Motorola Customer Account link
and completing the Online Account Application. After receiving your login name and password, you
will be able to use all of our site resources.
a. When you have your login name and password, access Technical Information Products and
Services online at: https://services.motorola.com
b. Select the Login link.
c. Choose the appropriate Technical Training and Documentation link from the left side of the
screen.
d. Select the course schedule, interactive catalogue or other features by clicking with your mouse.

Changes/additions to courses
The courses described in this catalogue are subject to change based on options and modifications
to Motorola products. Courses and classes are added and updated throughout the year, as needed.
Additional information will be made available on the Lifecycle Services web page. Also, you may call
Motorola Training at any time to inquire about additions.

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

Table of Contents
Welcome! ............................................................................................................................................................ 1
Table of Contents............................................................................................................................................ 5
Regional Training Centers ........................................................................................................................ 13
Student Information and Services......................................................................................................... 15
All Motorola Training Facilities .............................................................................................................................. 16
Mundelein, Illinois ................................................................................................................................................. 18
Jaguarina, Brazil ................................................................................................................................................. 23
Swindon, UK ......................................................................................................................................................... 25
Hyderabad, India ................................................................................................................................................... 28
Beijing, China ........................................................................................................................................................ 29
Johannesburg, South Africa .................................................................................................................................. 31
Product Modular Buyout Training ......................................................................................................................... 33
Motorola Technical Training Direct....................................................................................................... 35
Cisco and Networking Courses ............................................................................................................................. 38
Curriculum Paths and Jobset Functions............................................................................................ 39
GSM ...................................................................................................................................................................... 40
GPRS .................................................................................................................................................................... 42
Cell Site BTS ......................................................................................................................................................... 46
Switch ................................................................................................................................................................... 48
SwitchMATE ....................................................................................................................................................... 52
Intelligent Network Operations .............................................................................................................................. 53
Unix / Circuit CBSC / IWU ..................................................................................................................................... 55
CDMA Optimization .............................................................................................................................................. 57
Universal Network Operations .............................................................................................................................. 58
SMAP .................................................................................................................................................................... 59
NetPlan ................................................................................................................................................................. 60
1X Operations ....................................................................................................................................................... 61
Training Advice .............................................................................................................................................. 63
GSM..................................................................................................................................................................... 65
GSM Network Operator / Advanced Network Operator ........................................................................................ 66
GSM Network Administrator ................................................................................................................................. 67
GSM Network Planner .......................................................................................................................................... 68
GSM Database Engineer ...................................................................................................................................... 69
BSS Optimization Engineer .................................................................................................................................. 70
BSS Commissioning and Maintenance Engineer ................................................................................................. 71
BSS Diagnostics Engineer .................................................................................................................................... 72
OMC-R System Administrator ............................................................................................................................... 73

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

Table of Contents
GPRS................................................................................................................................................................... 75
BSS (GPRS) Network Operator / Advanced Network Operator ............................................................................ 76
BSS (GPRS) Network Administrator ..................................................................................................................... 77
BSS (GPRS) Network Planner .............................................................................................................................. 78
BSS (GPRS) Database Engineer .......................................................................................................................... 79
BSS (GPRS) Optimization Engineer ..................................................................................................................... 80
BSS (GPRS) Commissioning and Maintenance Engineer .................................................................................... 81
GSN Network Operator ......................................................................................................................................... 82
GSN Network Administrator .................................................................................................................................. 83
GSN Network Planner ........................................................................................................................................... 84
GSN Optimization Engineer .................................................................................................................................. 85
GSN Commissioning and Maintenance Engineer ................................................................................................. 86
ISS System Administrator ..................................................................................................................................... 87
OMC-G System Administrator ............................................................................................................................... 88
Cell Site BTS.................................................................................................................................................... 89
Analog Technicians ............................................................................................................................................... 90
Digital (CDMA, PCS) Technicians ......................................................................................................................... 91
Digital SC4812T (CDMA) (Trunked) BTS Operation for Technicians ................................................................ 92
Digital SC4812ET (CDMA) (Trunked) BTS Operation for Technicians ............................................................. 93
Digital SC4812ET Lite (CDMA) (Trunked) BTS Operation for Technicians ...................................................... 94
Digital SC614 (CDMA) BTS Operation for Technicians LAC Only ................................................................. 95
Digital SC614T (CDMA) BTS Operation for Technicians .................................................................................. 96
Analog SC 9600 (SAS) BTS Operation for Technicians .................................................................................... 97
Digital SC9600 (CDMA) BTS Operation for Technicians .................................................................................. 98
Switch ................................................................................................................................................................. 99
EMX2500 Overview .......................................................................................................................................... 100
EMX5000 Overview .......................................................................................................................................... 101
EMX Operation and Maintenance for Analog Technicians ............................................................................... 102
EMX Operation and Maintenance for Digital Technicians ................................................................................ 104
(Analog) SS7/C7 Common Channeling Signal ................................................................................................... 106
(CDMA) SS7/C7 Common Channeling Signal .................................................................................................... 107
(Analog) CCS/SS7 Implementation ..................................................................................................................... 108
(CDMA) CCS/SS7 Common Channeling Signal ................................................................................................. 109
(Analog) CCS/C7 Implementation ....................................................................................................................... 110
(CDMA) CCS/C7 Implementation ....................................................................................................................... 111
(Analog) EMX-V Installation, Operation and Maintenance ............................................................................... 112
(CDMA) EMX-V Installation, Operation and Maintenance ................................................................................ 113
(Analog) EMX-V Translations ........................................................................................................................... 114
(CDMA) EMX-V Translations ............................................................................................................................ 115
EMX International Translations ........................................................................................................................ 116
(Analog) CALEA Wiretap Network Implementation ............................................................................................. 117
(CDMA) CALEA Wiretap Network Implementation ............................................................................................. 118
(Analog) CALEA Wiretap Network Operations and Maintenance ....................................................................... 119
(CDMA) CALEA Wiretap Network Operations and Maintenance ........................................................................ 120
6

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

Table of Contents
(Analog) EMX Operation and Maintenance for Traffic Engineers and Performance Engineers .......................121
(CDMA) EMX Operation and Maintenance for Traffic Engineers and Performance Engineers ........................122
SwitchMATE................................................................................................................................................123
(Analog) SwitchMATE Operation and Administration .......................................................................................124
(CDMA) SwitchMATE Operation and Administration ........................................................................................126
Intelligent Network Operations ..............................................................................................................129
(Analog) Intelligent Network K-Series Fundamentals ..........................................................................................130
(CDMA) Intelligent Network K-Series Fundamentals ...........................................................................................131
(Analog) Intelligent Network (K-Series) IS-41 Operation and Maintenance ........................................................132
(CDMA) Intelligent Network (K-Series) IS-41 Operation and Maintenance .........................................................133
(Analog) Intelligent Network (K-Series) Message Register Operation and Maintenance ....................................134
(CDMA) Intelligent Network (K-Series) Message Register Operation and Maintenance .....................................135
(Analog) Intelligent Network (K-Series) HLR-DMX Operation and Maintenance .................................................136
(CDMA) Intelligent Network (K-Series) HLR-DMX Operation and Maintenance .................................................137
(Analog) Compaq HLR41/AC ..............................................................................................................................138
(CDMA) Compaq HLR 41 / AC ............................................................................................................................139
Unix/Circuit CBSC/IWU..............................................................................................................................141
High Speed Packet Data (IWU) ...........................................................................................................................142
High-Density Interworking Unit (HD-IWU) Operations and Maintenance for Technicians ...................................143
UNIX SVR4 System Administration .....................................................................................................................144
Advanced Scenario Workshop ............................................................................................................................145
CBSC Operation for Circuit CBSC Operators ......................................................................................................146
CBSC Operation for Circuit CBSC for BTS Technicians .....................................................................................147
CBSC Database Administration ...........................................................................................................................148
CDMA RF System Design ...................................................................................................................................149
CDMA Optimization.....................................................................................................................................151
CBSC / RFDS Operations ...................................................................................................................................152
CDMA System Optimization ................................................................................................................................153
Cellular System Performance ..............................................................................................................................154
Universal Network Operations ...............................................................................................................155
Universal Network Operations (UNO) ..................................................................................................................156
SMAP .................................................................................................................................................................157
SMAP Operation for System Engineers ..............................................................................................................158
NetPlan .............................................................................................................................................................159
NetPlan Operation for CDMA-Only Systems .......................................................................................................160
NetPlan CDMA Static Simulator ..........................................................................................................................161
NetPlan for Analog and GSM ..............................................................................................................................162

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

Table of Contents
1X Operations ............................................................................................................................................... 163
Packet or Circuit CBSC Operators ...................................................................................................................... 164
Packet CBSC Operations .................................................................................................................................... 165
Circuit CBSC Operations .................................................................................................................................... 166
Customer Support Documentation ..................................................................................................... 167
CDMA/Analog Documentation ............................................................................................................................ 168
GSM/GPRS Documentation ................................................................................................................................ 171
Motorola Technical Training 4 Layer Model................................................................................. 177
Tiering ................................................................................................................................................................. 178
General Courses .......................................................................................................................................... 185
GEN-CP03 : Introduction to SS7 Signaling ......................................................................................................... 186
GEN-CP04 : UNIX for OMC Users ...................................................................................................................... 187
GEN-CP05 : LAN/WAN Principles ...................................................................................................................... 188
GEN-CP06 : Asynchronous Transfer Mode ........................................................................................................ 189
GEN-CP08 : Frame Relay ................................................................................................................................... 190
GEN-CP09 : TCP/IP ............................................................................................................................................ 191
GEN-CP10 : Voice Over IP ................................................................................................................................. 192
GEN-CP11 : WAP Overview ............................................................................................................................... 193
GEN-ENG745 : Understanding ATM ................................................................................................................... 194
GEN-ENG746 : Understanding Advanced ATM .................................................................................................. 195
GEN-ENG934 : Understanding the Basics of Communications Networks .......................................................... 196
GEN-ENG936 : Understanding SS7 for IN, Wireless, and VoIP ......................................................................... 197
GEN-ENG937 : Understanding Wireless Internet Access .................................................................................. 198
GEN-ENG939 : Understanding Emerging Technologies in 2001 ........................................................................ 199
GEN-ENG942 : Understanding 3G Wireless Mobile Communications ............................................................... 200
GEN-ENG943 : Understanding Emerging Wireless Technologies ...................................................................... 201
GEN-ENG945 : Understanding TCP/IP .............................................................................................................. 202
GEN-ENG947 : Understanding Voice over IP ..................................................................................................... 203
GEN-ENG948 : Understanding Frame Relay ..................................................................................................... 204
GEN-GNL010 : UNIX Commands Applied to Motorola's Network ...................................................................... 205
GEN-GNL175 : Wireless Rating and Billing Fundamentals ................................................................................ 206
GEN-GNL177 : Telecommunications Customer Care ......................................................................................... 207
GEN-GNL178 : Telecommunications Revenue Assurance ................................................................................. 208
GEN-GNL181 : ATM Over Satellite Module 1 .................................................................................................. 209
GEN-GNL182 : ATM Over Satellite Module 2 .................................................................................................. 210
GEN-GNL183 : IPv6 Fundamentals .....................................................................................................................211
GEN-GNL184 : IPv6 Advanced ........................................................................................................................... 212
GEN-GNL185 : Setting Tariffs for IP ................................................................................................................... 213
GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals .............................................................................................. 214
GEN-NET110 : UNIX Part 2: Advanced Topics for Users ................................................................................... 215
GEN-NET200 : Sun Solaris Part 1: Basic Administration ................................................................................... 216
GEN-NET210 : Sun Solaris Part 2: Network Administration ............................................................................... 217
GEN-OMC-G103 : Windows NT4.0 Core Technologies ...................................................................................... 218
8

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

Table of Contents
GEN-TEL1212 : ATM Fundamentals (Module 1) .................................................................................................219
GEN-TEL1217 : ATM Fundamentals (Module 2) .................................................................................................220
GEN-TEL1218 : Understanding the Principles of LANs and WANs ....................................................................221
GEN-WAP101 : WAP Overview ...........................................................................................................................222
GEN-WAP201 : Writing Static WML Pages .........................................................................................................223
CDMA Courses..............................................................................................................................................225
CDMA-AGN100NE : AGNODE Network Element Overview for Release 16.x ....................................................227
CDMA-AGN100OM : Operations and Maintenance: AGNODE ...........................................................................228
CDMA-BTS120 : SC 9600 Base Transceiver Station (CDMA) ........................................................................229
CDMA-BTS330 : SC 2400 Base Transceiver Station with ELPA (CDMA/SAS) ...............................................230
CDMA-BTS440 : SC 614 Base Transceiver Station (CDMA) ..........................................................................231
CDMA-BTS610 : SC 4812ET Base Transceiver Station (CDMA) (Trunked) ...................................................232
CDMA-BTS710 : SC 4812T Base Transceiver Station (CDMA) (Trunked) ......................................................233
CDMA-BTS810 : SC 4812ET LITE Base Transceiver Station (CDMA) (Trunked) ...........................................234
CDMA-BTS840 : SC 614T Base Transceiver Station (CDMA) ........................................................................235
CDMA-ENG935 : Understanding CDMA .............................................................................................................236
CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM ............................................................................................237
CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA) .................................................................................238
CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling ......................................................................................239
CDMA-GNL130 : 1X Overview ............................................................................................................................240
CDMA-GNL131 : e1X Overview (Web-based) ....................................................................................................241
CDMA-GNL174 : CDMA Technology ...................................................................................................................242
CDMA-GNL800 : IS-95 CDMA Technology .........................................................................................................243
CDMA-GNL810 : CDMA 2000 / 1XRTT ...............................................................................................................244
CDMA-GNL820 : IS-95 & CDMA 2000 / 1XRTT ..................................................................................................245
CDMA-MLS100NE : MLS Network Element Overview for Release 16.x .............................................................246
CDMA-MLS100OM : Operations and Maintenance: MLS ...................................................................................247
CDMA-MM100NE : Mobility Manager Network Element Overview for G16.x Release .......................................248
CDMA-MM100OM : Operations and Maintenance: MM ......................................................................................249
CDMA-OMCP100NE : OMC-IP Network Element Overview for G16.x Release .................................................250
CDMA-OMCR100A : 1X Cellular Database Administration .................................................................................251
CDMA-OMCR100NE : OMC-R Network Element Overview for Release 16.x ....................................................252
CDMA-OMCR100OM : Operations and Maintenance: OMCR ............................................................................253
CDMA-OMCR101 : SUN OMC-R (CDMA) .......................................................................................................254
CDMA-PER130 : NetPlan CDMA ........................................................................................................................255
CDMA-PER140 : SwitchMATE and SwitchMATE II Operations .....................................................................256
CDMA-PER200 : K-Series Fundamentals ...........................................................................................................257
CDMA-PER210 : IS-41 Operation .......................................................................................................................258
CDMA-PER220 : Message Register (MR) ...........................................................................................................259
CDMA-PER230 : DMX Home Location Register (DMX HLR) .............................................................................260
CDMA-PER250 : System Monitoring Application Processor (SMAP) .................................................................261
CDMA-PER270 : Compaq HLR41/AC .................................................................................................................262
CDMA-PER280 : CALEA Wiretap Network Implementation ................................................................................263
CDMA-PER290 : CALEA Wiretap Network Operations and Maintenance ..........................................................264
CDMA-PER300 : NetPlan ....................................................................................................................................265
January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

Table of Contents
CDMA-PER330: High Density IWU ..................................................................................................................... 266
CDMA-PER350 : NetPlan Fundamentals Plus CDMA ........................................................................................ 267
CDMA-PER360 : NetPlan CDMA RF System Design ......................................................................................... 268
CDMA-PER380 : High Speed Packet Data (IWU) .............................................................................................. 269
CDMA-PER400 : LMF for Windows Operations (CDMA) ................................................................................ 270
CDMA-PER440 : NetPlan 5.0 System Availability Workshop ............................................................................. 271
CDMA-PER450 : UNO Element Manager ........................................................................................................... 272
CDMA-PER460 : UNO Market Manager ............................................................................................................. 273
CDMA-PER550 : WAP Server Overview and Operations ................................................................................... 274
CDMA-PER640 : S-Series Fundamentals .......................................................................................................... 275
CDMA-S2K320 : 3G CDMA 2000 Implementation and Operational Issues ........................................................ 276
CDMA-S2K400 : WCDMA for UMTS: Guided Tour of the Physical Layer .......................................................... 277
CDMA-SAO100 : Advanced Scenario Workshop ............................................................................................... 278
CDMA-SAO110 : IOS .......................................................................................................................................... 279
CDMA-SAO190 : Performance Management ..................................................................................................... 280
CDMA-SAO210 : CBSC Operations for BTS Technicians .................................................................................. 281
CDMA-SAWR150B : R15 System Availability Workshop Tools ....................................................................... 282
CDMA-SAWR150C : R15 System Availability Workshop BTS/CBSC ............................................................. 283
CDMA-SAWS150 : S15 System Availability Workshop ...................................................................................... 284
CDMA-SWT110 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance (Week 1) .......................................................... 285
CDMA-SWT120 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance (Week 2) .......................................................... 286
CDMA-SWT130 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance (Week 3) .......................................................... 287
CDMA-SWT150 : EMX Advanced .................................................................................................................... 288
CDMA-SWT160 : DMX ....................................................................................................................................... 289
CDMA-SWT180 : Managing Switch Performance and Growth ........................................................................... 290
CDMA-SWT240 : EMX Translations (International) ......................................................................................... 291
CDMA-SWT260 : CCS/SS7 Implementation ...................................................................................................... 292
CDMA-SWT270 : CCS/C7 Implementation ......................................................................................................... 293
CDMA-SWT280 : Split Mode Operation and Maintenance ................................................................................. 294
CDMA-SWT281 : SLIC II Operations .................................................................................................................. 295
CDMA-SWT340 : EMX 5000 Overview ............................................................................................................ 296
CDMA-SWT370 : EMX-V Implementation/Migration ........................................................................................ 297
CDMA-SWT440 : EMX-V Translations ............................................................................................................. 298
CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance ........................................................................................ 299
CDMA-SYS100OM : 1X Operations and Maintenance: Overview ...................................................................... 300
CDMA-SYS200 : CBSC/RFDS Operations ......................................................................................................... 301
CDMA-SYS300 : CDMA System Optimization of the RF Link ............................................................................ 303
CDMA-XC100NE : XC Network Element Overview for Release 16.x ................................................................. 304
CDMA-XC100OM : Operations and Maintenance: XC ....................................................................................... 305
GSM Courses ................................................................................................................................................ 307
GSM-BSS05 : BTS Theory and Equipment Operation ....................................................................................... 308
GSM-BSS07 : Advanced BSS Field Support ...................................................................................................... 309
GSM-BSS11 : BSS Operational Theory .............................................................................................................. 310
GSM-BSS11A : BSS Overview (Non-Technical) ..................................................................................................311
GSM-BSS12 : BSS Operations and Maintenance .............................................................................................. 312
10

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

Table of Contents
GSM-BSS14 : BSS Technical Overview ..............................................................................................................313
GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular ..........................................................................................................314
GSM-CP02A : GSM Cellular Overview (Non-Technical) .....................................................................................315
GSM-ENG941 : Understanding GSM ..................................................................................................................316
GSM-GNL171 : GSM Air Interface ......................................................................................................................317
GSM-GNL172 : GSM Signaling and Protocols Architecture ................................................................................318
GSM-GNL173 : GSM Signaling and Protocols Procedures .................................................................................319
GSM-NET01 : OMC-R Network Operations ........................................................................................................320
GSM-NET02 : OMC-R Advanced Network Operations .......................................................................................321
GSM-NET03 : Network Performance ..................................................................................................................322
GSM-NET05 : Network Health Analyst ................................................................................................................323
GSM-NET06 : Datagen Operations .....................................................................................................................324
GSM-OMC01 : OMC-R Overview ........................................................................................................................325
GSM-OMC01A : OMC-R Overview (Non-Technical) ...........................................................................................326
GSM-OMC03 : OMC-R System Administration (E3x00 Platform) .......................................................................327
GSM-SYS01 : GSM Interfaces and Protocols .....................................................................................................328
GSM-SYS02 : Introduction to BSS Database ......................................................................................................329
GSM-SYS03 : Advanced BSS Database .............................................................................................................330
GSM-SYS04 : Introduction to BSS Planning and Dimensioning .........................................................................331
GSM-SYS12 : Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multi-layered Systems .......................................................332
GPRS Courses...............................................................................................................................................333
GPRS-BSS101 : PCU Operational Theory ..........................................................................................................334
GPRS-CP07 : Introduction to GPRS ...................................................................................................................335
GPRS-CP07A : GPRS Overview (Non -Technical) ..............................................................................................336
GPRS-GPRS100NE : GPRS eLearning Workshop .............................................................................................337
GPRS-GSN101 : GPRS CommHub ....................................................................................................................338
GPRS-GSN102 : GSN Complex Installation .......................................................................................................339
GPRS-GSN103 : Gateway GPRS Support Node ................................................................................................340
GPRS-GSN104 : Sun Enterprise Cluster ............................................................................................................341
GPRS-GSN105 : ISS Applications ......................................................................................................................342
GPRS-NET101 : OMC-G Network Operations ....................................................................................................343
GPRS-NET103 : BSS (GPRS) Network Performance .........................................................................................344
GPRS-NET106 : IP Security ................................................................................................................................345
GPRS-OMC-G105 : OMC-G System Administration ...........................................................................................346
GPRS-SYS101 : GPRS Interfaces and Protocols ...............................................................................................347
GPRS-SYS102 : BSS (GPRS) Database ............................................................................................................348
GPRS-SYS104 : BSS (GPRS) Planning .............................................................................................................349
GPRS-SYS115 : GSN Planning ...........................................................................................................................350
GPRS-SYS116 : SF Database ............................................................................................................................351
GPRS-TEL1213 : GPRS Fundamentals ..............................................................................................................352
GPRS-TEL1214 : GPRS Engineering .................................................................................................................353
UMTS Courses...............................................................................................................................................355
UMTS-CP13 : Introduction to UMTS ...................................................................................................................356
UMTS-CP13A : UMTS Overview (Non-Technical) ...............................................................................................357
January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

11

Table of Contents
UMTS-TEL1215 : UMTS Air Interface ................................................................................................................. 358
UMTS-TEL1216 : UMTS Fundamentals ............................................................................................................. 359
UMTS-TEL1226 : Understanding UMTS ............................................................................................................. 360
TDMA Courses.............................................................................................................................................. 361
TDMA-ENG932 : Understanding TDMA ............................................................................................................. 362
Analog Courses............................................................................................................................................ 363
ANA-BTS110 : SC 9600 Base Transceiver Station for Stand-Alone Analog Systems .................................... 364
ANA-GNL030 : Analog Cellular Systems Overview ............................................................................................ 365
ANA-GNL020 : Analog Cellular Overview Companion CD-ROM ........................................................................ 366
ANA-SWT040 : EMX 2500 Overview ............................................................................................................... 367
Registration Forms..................................................................................................................................... 369

12

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

Regional Training Centers


Motorola maintains training centers throughout the world to better serve our customers.

January 2002

Brazil
Location:
Telephone number:
Email:
Technology:
Language(s):

Jaguarina, Brazil
+55 19 3847 7161 or +55 19 3847 7090
technicaltraining.LAC@motorola.com
CDMA, Switching, Networking, Analog, GSM
Portuguese, Spanish, English

China
Location:
Telephone number:
Technology:
Language(s):

Beijing, China
+86 10 684 37222 Extension 2120
CDMA, Switching, Networking, GSM, GPRS, UMTS
Mandarin, English

France
Location:
Telephone number:
Technology:
Language(s):

Paris, France
+33 1 4969 8542
GSM, GPRS
French

Germany
Location:
Telephone number:
Technology:
Language(s):

Wiesbaden, Germany
+49 611 3611 148
GSM, GPRS
German, English

India
Location:
Telephone number:
Email:
Technology:
Language(s):

Hyderabad, India
+91 80 558 8652 or +91 80 5591953 ext. 5052
training.in@motorola.com
GSM, GPRS, CDMA
English

Japan
Location:
Telephone number:
Technology:
Language(s):

Osaka, Japan and Tokyo, Japan


+816 6586 3065
JCDMA
Japanese

Spain
Location:
Telephone number:
Technology:
Language(s):

Madrid, Spain
+34 913025460
GSM, GPRS
Spanish, English

South Africa
Location:
Telephone number:
Technology:
Language(s):

Midrand
+27 11 254 5460
GSM, GPRS, UMTS
English

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

13

Regional Training Centers


United Kingdom
Location:
Telephone number:
Email:
Technology:
Language(s):

Swindon, UK
+44 0 1793 566099
technicaltraining.UK@motorola.com
GSM, GPRS, UMTS
English

United States of America


Location:
Mundelein, IL
Telephone number:
+1 847 435 5796
Email:
technicaltraining.US@motorola.com
Technology:
CDMA, Switching, Intelligent Network Devices,
Analog (on demand only), GSM
Language(s):
English
Location:
Telephone number:
Technology:
Language(s):

14

Schaumburg, IL
+1 847 576 2008
iDEN
English, Spanish

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

Student Information and Services


All Motorola Training Facilities............................................................................................................................... 16
Mundelein, Illinois .................................................................................................................................................. 18
Jaguarina, Brazil .................................................................................................................................................. 23
Swindon, UK .......................................................................................................................................................... 25
Hyderabad, India.................................................................................................................................................... 28
Beijing, China......................................................................................................................................................... 29
Johannesburg, South Africa................................................................................................................................... 31
Product Modular Buyout Training .......................................................................................................................... 33

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

15

All Motorola Training Facilities


Course Prerequisite Policy
To gain the most benefit from Motorolas technical courses, students should have the prerequisite
knowledge and experience noted in the course descriptions. By meeting the course prerequisites,
the student plays an important role in ensuring a successful educational experience for both
themselves and their colleagues. All course bookings are made on the understanding that the
prerequisite courses have been completed. Motorola suggests that the students supervisor or
Training Coordinator review the course prerequisites with the student before registering for the
course. Note that it is not the policy of Motorola to cover prerequisite material during the course.
If a student does not meet the prerequisites or have prerequisite knowledge, Motorola has the
option to remove the student from the class without refund should that student impede the progress
of the course as a whole.

Buyout Scheduling
Although we try to schedule our courses at times and locations that will meet customer
requirements, we realize that there may be occasions when customers will require courses to meet
specific time schedules. Additional courses to the published schedule can be arranged on request.
These courses can be conducted in a Motorola recognized training facility or other premises by
arrangement.
A number of our courses have practical content and therefore require specific hardware and
software. If the course is to be conducted at premises other than a Motorola recognized training
facility then the customer must provide the necessary equipment.
See the Product Modular Buyout Training section, or contact your regional Motorola Training Centre.

Cancellation of Course Buyouts


No charge for Customer cancellations made 31 or more working days prior to commencement of
course. 100% of course fee will be charged for Customer cancellations 30 working days or less prior
to commencement of course.

Classes Scheduled Upon Request


The courses in this catalog that are designated Classes Scheduled Upon Request are not regularly
scheduled classes. Please send a student registration form for the desired course. students will be
placed on a Waiting List until a sufficient number of enrollments have been received. students will be
notified of an offered class by the Training Specialist and will be given the opportunity to attend on
the scheduled date.

Audio/visual equipment
Cameras are not allowed inside Motorola premises. Additionally, audio/visual recording of courses
is not permitted.

Fire and General Safety


With student's safety in mind, information regarding action to be taken in the event of a fire will be
advised on the first morning of every course.

16

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

All Motorola Training Facilities


Smoking
Motorola is a non-smoking environment. A smoking area is provided for students.

Class Dress
Students are expected to maintain professional conduct and dress at all times. Class dress is casual
but smart. For safety and security reasons, we cannot permit shorts, thong-sandals, or tank-tops in
the building.

Documentation
All course material and documentation supplied at Motorola training courses is copyrighted and may
not be reproduced without prior permission. Carriage or shipping of course documentation is the
responsibility of each student.

Stationery
Students will be supplied with all necessary stationery for their course. Calculators are not provided,
except on appropriate planning courses.

Local Information
Information regarding local places of interest, restaurants and leisure facilities can be supplied to
students attending any Motorola Training course.

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

17

Mundelein, Illinois
Course Enrollment
You may complete the student registration form at the back of this catalog or enroll on line at the
Lifecycle Services Web Site (https://services.motorola.com). See Motorola Technical Training Direct on
page 35.
You may send your hard copy registration either by FAX or by mail to:
FAX it to the Motorola Training Specialist at +(847) 435-5703
Mail your registration to the Motorola Training Specialist:
Motorola
Technical Information Products and Services
One Nelson C. White Parkway
Mundelein, IL 60060
Email: technicaltraining.US@motorola.com
Payment, or equivalent authorization, should accompany enrollment. Refer to Payment section
below.
All travel and accommodation costs are the students responsibility.

Confirmation
Confirmation of enrollment is subject to payment or credit verification. Once confirmed, an enrolled
student will receive a letter of confirmation. For information on regarding hotels, directions, or maps
please refer to the Lifecycle Services web site. If you do not receive this confirmation, please call
Technical Information Products and Services at: +1-800-872-8225 (North America only) or +1-847435-5700.

Payment
Payment, in U.S. currency, must be received in the form of either a purchase order or wire transfer.
Payment or credit verification must be confirmed 10 business days prior to the first day of class, or
enrollment will be cancelled.
If enrollment takes place within two weeks of the class, payment must be received within 24 hours.
When enrolling in classes, please be sure you are authorized to take on financial responsibility for
your organization.

Rescheduling and Cancellations


Course fees for regularly scheduled classes are fully refundable if Technical Information Products
and Services Training Specialist is notified at least 10 working days prior to the course scheduled
start date. However, if notification is NOT received at least 10 working days prior to the course start
date, you will be billed for the entire cost of the course.
If Motorola must cancel or reschedule a class, any payment made for that class will be refunded or
applied to a rescheduled class, whichever the student chooses. Motorola assumes no liability
beyond the refund of tuition and fees previously paid.

18

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

Mundelein, Illinois
Student Substitutions
Student substitutions are accepted up to the first day of the class; however, the substitute must meet
the course prerequisites. Please notify the Technical Information Products and Services Training
Specialist immediately of any substitutions.

Course Hours
The hours for courses at the Mundelein, Illinois facilities are as follows:
First Shift 8:00 a.m. 4:00 p.m.
Second Shift 4:00 p.m. 12:00 a.m.
Third Shift 12:00 a.m. 8:00 a.m.
The third-shift classes will begin at midnight on the previously scheduled day and run through 8:00
a.m. (i.e., If the class is scheduled for a Monday, it will begin at midnight Sunday). Class hours are
subject to change.

Attendance Policy
Your training session will begin at the time noted in your confirmation letter (see also Course Hours
above). Please plan to arrive 30 minutes before the beginning of each class day.
When making travel arrangements to attend our training sessions, we suggest that you plan to:
arrive on the evening before the scheduled class
schedule homebound transportation for a time following the end time of the final day of class
(see also Course Hours above).
If, for any reason, you are going to be late to, or absent from a class, please call as indicated below
to get a message to your instructor: +1-800-872-8225 or +1-847-435-5700
Please note that the course completion certificate may be withheld if a student is absent for more
than 25% of the scheduled class period.

Courses for Non-English-speaking Customers


Arrangements can be made for a native language instructor or interpreter and for the use of
available translated documents. Please contact your Program Manager or the Technical Information
Products and Services Centre if you desire to have a course conducted in a language other than
English.

Restrictions
All students registering for courses listed in this catalog must be Motorola employees or Motorola
customers who have a signed contract or who have an active nondisclosure agreement with
Motorola.

Messages
You can receive messages at the educational facilities by calling Technical Information Products and
Services at: +1-800-872-8225 or +1-847-435-5700

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

19

Mundelein, Illinois
Mail
If you wish to receive mail while attending a course, it should be addressed to:
Motorola Technical Information Products and Services
(Your Name), student
One Nelson C. White Parkway
Mundelein, IL 60060

Educational Facilities
Bordered by an 18-hole golf course and overlooking a pond, our 80,000-square foot Technical
Information Products and Services Centre in Mundelein, Illinois, is equipped with 16 classrooms,
one auditorium, and three expansive laboratory areas. Classrooms and instructional equipment in
the Technical Information Products and Services centre are state-of-the-art.

20

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

Mundelein, Illinois
Driving Directions
OHare Airport to Technical Information Products and Services Centre in Mundelein, Illinois.
NOTE: The distance from OHare Airport is approximately 25 miles; driving time is approximately 45
minutes, depending on the time of day. It may take longer to get to the Technical Information
Products and Services Centre between 7:00 a.m. and 9:00 a.m. and between 4:00 p.m. and 6:00
p.m., which are considered rush hours.
Step

Action

Exit OHare on I-190, East to Chicago.

Continue on I-190 East to I-294 (Tri-state Tollway) North.

Get on I-294 (Tri-state Tollway) North. Stay in the right lane while merging.
IMPORTANT
Almost immediately after merging on the tollway, the road will split in two directions. Stay to the left,
Tri-state Tollway, I-294 North.

Stay on I-294 (portions toll) for approximately 12 miles to I-94.

Go Northwest on I-94 (portions toll) for 4.5 miles to Townline Road (Rt. 60).

Go West on Townline Road (Rt. 60) for approximately 3.5 miles to Rt. 83.

Go Northwest on Rt. 83/60 to Nelson C.White Parkway (directly across from Mundelein Water Tower.

Turn left onto Nelson C. White Parkway to the Technical Information Products and Services Centre.
Parking is avail able in front of the building.
Motorola Arlington Heights to Technical Information Products and Services Centre in
Mundelein, Illinois. Refer to the following map

Step

Action

Take Route 53 North to Lake Cook Road or take Dundee Road to Arlington Heights Road.

Go North on Arlington Heights Road 1.4 miles to Rt. 83.

Turn left onto Rt. 83 North (Mundelein Road), and go approximately 4.5 miles.

At intersection of Rt. 45, turn left (Rt. 83/60 West).

Continue on Rt. 83/60 for approximately 3.7 miles to Nelson C.White Parkway (directly across from
Mundelein Water Tower).

Turn left onto Nelson C. White Parkway (immediately after the bank) to the Technical Information Products and Services Centre. Parking is available in front of the building.

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

21

Mundelein, Illinois
Hotel Accommodations
Please note that students are responsible for their own travel and hotel arrangements. When
making reservations, inform the hotel that you are attending a Motorola Cellular class, since some of
the hotels offer special packages and rates for students.
A list of hotels convenient to Technical Information Products and Services Centre in Mundelein, IL
follows. The hotels are depicted on the map on the previous page.
Map Key

Hotel

Address

Telephone

Code

Homestead

675 Woodlands Parkway


Vernon Hills, Illinois 60061

+(847) 955-1111

E, H, I, K, M,
N, O

Ramada Inn

517 East Route 83


Mundelein, Illinois 60060

+(847) 566-5400

A, C, E, G, H,
I, L, M, N

Hawthorne Suites

975 Lakeview Parkway


Vernon Hills, Illinois 60061

+(847) 367-8031
+(800) 527-1133

A, C, D, E, G,
I, M, N, O

Candlewood Suites

1100 North U. S. Route 45,


Libertyville, Illinois 60048

+(847) 247-9900

I, K, M, N, O

Crowne Plaza
Chicago North >
Shore

510 East Route 83


Mundelein, Illinois 60060

+(847) 949-5100

A, B, C, D, E,
F, G, H, I, J

AmeriSuites

450 North Milwaukee Ave.,


Vernon Hills, Illinois 60061

+(847) 918-1400

C, E, G, I, L,
M, N

*Rates are subject to change. Some rates may vary due to availability and length of stay. Please
present registration letter or proof of employment to receive Motorola rate.

22

Code

Description

Code

Description

Complimentary shuttle from the hotel to


Motorola

Exercise room or access to local health


club

Shuttle from airport to hotel (charge of


approx. $15.00)

Room service

Complimentary shuttle within a 5 mile


radius

Fully-equipped kitchen facilities

Complimentary complete hot breakfast

Business centre

Complimentary continental breakfast

Laundry facilities

Restaurant

Refrigerator/microwave

Pool

Retail store

Lounge/Gathering Room

Video rentals

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

Jaguarina, Brazil
Course Enrollment
You may complete the student registration form at the back of this catalog or enroll on line at the
Technical Information Products and Services Web Site (https://services.motorola.com). See Motorola
Technical Training Direct on page 35.
You may send your hard copy registration by FAX to +55-19-3847-7161.
Payment, or equivalent authorization, should accompany enrollment. Refer to Payment section
below.
All travel and accommodation costs are the students responsibility.

Confirmation
Confirmation of enrollment is subject to payment or credit verification. Once confirmed, an enrolled
student will receive a letter of confirmation. For information on regarding hotels, directions, or maps
please refer to the Motorola Lifecycle Services web site. If you do not receive this confirmation,
please call Motorola at: +55-19-3847-7161.

Payment
Payment, in U.S. currency, must be received in the form of a purchase order. Payment or credit
verification must be confirmed 10 business days prior to the first day of class, or enrollment will be
cancelled.
If enrollment takes place within two weeks of the class, payment must be received within 24 hours.
When enrolling in classes, please be sure you are authorized to take on financial responsibility for
your organization.

Rescheduling and Cancellations


Course fees for regularly scheduled classes are fully refundable if Motorola Training Specialist is
notified at least 10 working days prior to the course scheduled start date. However, if notification is
NOT received at least 10 working days prior to the course start date, you will be billed for the entire
cost of the course.
If Motorola must cancel or reschedule a class, any payment made for that class will be refunded or
applied to a rescheduled class, whichever the student chooses. Motorola assumes no liability
beyond the refund of tuition and fees previously paid.

Student substitutions
Student substitutions are accepted up to the first day of the class; however, the substitute must meet
the course prerequisites. Please notify the Motorola Training Specialist immediately of any
substitutions.

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

23

Jaguarina, Brazil
Course Hours
The hours for courses at the Jaguarina, Brazil facilities are as follows:
First Shift 8:30 a.m. 4:30 p.m.
Second Shift 4:30 p.m. 00:30 a.m.
Third Shift 00:30 a.m. 8:30 a.m.
The third-shift classes will begin at midnight on the previously scheduled day and run through 8:00
a.m. (i.e., If the class is scheduled for a Monday, it will begin at midnight Sunday). Class hours are
subject to change.

Attendance Policy
Your training session will begin at the time noted in your confirmation letter (see also Course Hours
above). Please plan to arrive 30 minutes before the beginning of each class day.
When making travel arrangements to attend our training sessions, we suggest that you plan to:
arrive on the evening before the scheduled class
schedule homebound transportation for a time following the end time of the final day of class
(see also Course Hours above).
If, for any reason, you are going to be late to, or absent from a class, please call as indicated below
to get a message to your instructor: +55-19-3847-7161
Please note that the course completion certificate may be withheld if a student is absent for more
than 25% of the scheduled class period.

Courses for Non-Portuguese and Non-Spanish Speaking


Customers
Arrangements can be made for a native language instructor or interpreter and for the use of
available translated documents. Please contact your Program Manager or the Technical Information
Products and Services Centre if you desire to have a course conducted in a language other than
English.

Restrictions
All students registering for courses listed in this catalog must be Motorola employees or Motorola
customers who have a signed contract or who have an active nondisclosure agreement with
Motorola.

Messages
You can receive messages at the educational facilities by calling Motorola at:
+55-19-3847-7161

24

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

Swindon, UK
Course Enrollment
You may complete the student registration form at the back of this catalog or enroll on line at the
Lifecycle Services Web Site (https://services.motorola.com). See Motorola Technical Training Direct on
page 35.
You may contact the Training Administrator at:
Telephone: +44 (0) 1793 566099
Fax: +44 (0) 1793 566040
Email: technicaltraining.UK@motorola.com

Confirmation
Confirmation of enrollment is subject to receipt of Purchase Order or equivalent authorization. Once
confirmed, an enrolled student will received an email of confirmation. For information regarding
hotels, directions, or maps, please refer to the Lifecycle Services website.
(https://services.motorola.com)

Payment
Payment, or equivalent authorization should accompany enrollment, and must be confirmed 10
business days prior to the first day of class, or enrollment will be cancelled.
When enrolling in classes, please be sure you are authorized to take on financial responsibility for
your organization.
All travel and accommodation costs are the students responsibility.

Rescheduling and Cancellations


No charge is made for cancellations made 11 or more working days prior to commencement of
course. 100% of the course fee will be charged for cancellations 10 working days or less prior to
commencement of course.
If a registered student fails to attend the course or fails to complete the course, full course fees will
be charged.
If Motorola must cancel or reschedule a class, any payment made for that class will be refunded or
applied to a rescheduled class, whichever the student chooses. Motorola assumes no liability
beyond the refund of tuition and fees previously paid.

Student Substitutions
Student substitutions are accepted up to the first day of the class; however, the substitute must meet
the course prerequisites. Please notify the training administrator immediately of any substitutions.

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

25

Swindon, UK
Motorola Location
Most courses are held in Swindon, UK, however there may be exceptions and you should refer to
your joining instructions.
Motorola is located on the outskirts of Swindon, conveniently close to the M4 and within easy reach
of both the town centre and the rural villages and market towns in the surrounding Wiltshire
countryside. Road and rail links to London are excellent.
As you would expect from one of the fastest growing areas in Europe, Swindon has much to offer. A
modern town with a wide range of shopping centres and excellent leisure facilities, which are
reasonably near to the Motorola site.
Students are advised that they are responsible for settling their own accounts before leaving the
hotel.

Course Hours
Courses will commence at 09:00 and finish at 16:30. students should arrive between 09:00 and
09:15 on the first day only for a 09:30 start. This will enable course registration to be completed.
There will be breaks in the morning and afternoon at the instructor's discretion and a lunch break of
one hour.

On Arrival
Visitor car parking spaces are available in the Motorola car park. Parking on the road at the front and
side of the building is not allowed as this is frequently used by large delivery vehicles.
On arrival at the training department, students must report to Security at the Reception where they
will be issued with a temporary pass which is to be worn at all times.

Refreshments
Lunch and refreshments are provided inclusive of the course fee.

Laptop Users
Four analogue lines are available for use during break times.

Telephone
Telephones are available for delegates to use during break times. Incoming messages will be
posted on a bulletin board. Our policy discourages class interruptions for incoming calls except in
emergencies.

26

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

Swindon, UK
Hotel Accommodations
Please see table below for hotel details. You or your local BTI office should make bookings.
Map Key

Hotel

Address

Telephone

Code

Blundson House Hotel

Blundson House Hotel


Swindon SN26 7AF

+44 (0)1793 721701

C,D,E,F,G,
H,I,J,L

De Vere

De Vere
Swindon SN5 7DW

+44 (0)1793 878785

C,D,E,F,G,
H,I,J,K,L

Forte Posthouse

Forte Post House


Marlborough Road
Swindon SN3 6AQ

+44 (0)870 4009079

C,D,E,F,G,
H,I,J,K,L

Hilton

Hilton
Great Western Way
Swindon SN5 8UZ

+44 (0)1793 881777

A,C,D,E,F,
G,H,I,J,K,L

Marriott

Swindon Marriott
Pipers Way
Swindon SN3 1SH

+44 (0)1793 512121

C,D,E,F,G,
H,I,J,L

Express by Holiday Inn

Express by Holiday Inn


Frankland Road
Swindon SN5 8UD

+44 (0)1793 818800

C,E,H,I,L

Travel Inn

Swindon Travel Inn


Lydiard Beefeater
Great Western Way
Swindon SN5 8UY

+44 (0)1793 881490

C,E,H

Code

Description

Code

Description

Complimentary shuttle bus from hotel to


Motorola

Room service

Complimentary breakfast

Laptop points available

Restaurant

Laundry facilities

Pool

Refrigerator

Lounge

Shop

Exercise room/Health Club

Video rental/in-house movies

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

27

Hyderabad, India
Course Enrollment
All course bookings and enquiries should be made through the Training Administrator:
Telephone: +91 80 559 1953 / 555 0428
Fax: +91 80 555 0412
Email: training.in@motorola.com
Motorola School of Communication
IIIT Campus, Gachi Bowli
Hyderabad, India
To guarantee your place in a course, please return the completed purchase order within 10 working
days of provisional booking acceptance. If the purchase order is not received within this time, your
place may be allocated to another customer. All travel and accommodation costs are the students
responsibility.
The cancellation and prerequisite policies are the same as those outlined for the Swindon
Training Centre.

Motorola Location
Indian Institute for information Technology, abbreviated IIIT, is located at the outskirts of the city of
Hyderabad, amongst a very natural backdrop. IIIT has about 700 students, going through
graduation and under-graduation programs, related to the field of Information Technology, or it's
applications. Housed within the same campus are learning schools of other big names such as IBM,
Satyam, Metamor, and Oracle. who are our neighbours. The various institutions are also
responsible for enriching the curriculum of the IIIT students and providing support in their projects.

Hotel Accommodation
Motorola has negotiated special rates for students at local hotels in Hyderabad. Block bookings can
be arranged through the Training Administrator. Students are advised that they are responsible for
settling their own accounts before leaving the hotel.

Course Hours
Courses will commence at 09:00 and finish at 16:30. students should arrive between 09:00 and
09:15 on the first day only for a 09:30 start. This will enable course registration to be completed.
There will be breaks in the morning and afternoon at the instructor's discretion and a lunch break of
one hour.

On Arrival
Visitors car parking spaces are available in the Motorola car park. Parking on the road is not
allowed. On arrival at Motorola Training Centre, students must report to Security at the Reception
where they will be issued with a student pass.

Refreshments
Lunch and refreshments are provided inclusive of the course fee.

28

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

Beijing, China
Course Enrollment
All course bookings and enquiries should be made through the Training Administrator.
Telephone: +86 10 68437222 ext. 2120
Fax: +86 10 68438232
Email: a13147@email.mot.com
To guarantee your place on a course, please return the completed purchase order within 10 working
days of provisional booking acceptance.
If the purchase order is not received within this time, your place may be allocated to another
customer.
All travel and accommodation costs are the students responsibility.
The cancellation and prerequisite policies are the same as those outlined for the Swindon
Training Centre.

Motorola Location
Motorola TCSG China Training Centre is located at No. 39A Zi Zhu Yuan Road in Beijing. Access
is via air, rail or road. The international/domestic airport is a fifty minute drive from the training
centre.

BTA Training Centre Location


Beijing Telecom Education & Training Centre Motorola GSM Training School is located at No.2
Linxiao Nanli Road in Beijing. The international/domestic airport is one and a half hours drive from
the training centre. To go to the BTA Training Centre, you can take a shuttle bus from Motorola
Training Centre.

Hotel Accommodation
Some hotels offer special rates for Motorola in Beijing. The Training Administrator can provide
details.

Course Hours
Courses will commence at 09:00 and finish at 16:30. students should arrive between 09:00 and
09:15 on the first day for a 09:30 start. This will enable course registration to be completed.
There will be breaks in the morning and afternoon at the instructor's discretion and a lunch break of
one hour.

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

29

Beijing, China
On Arrival
Visitors' car parking spaces are available in the Motorola car park. Parking on the road is not
allowed.
On arrival at the Motorola Training Centre, students must report to security at the reception where
they will be issued with a student pass.

Refreshments
Lunch and refreshments are provided inclusive of the course fee.

Telephone
Incoming messages will be posted on a bulletin board. Our policy discourages class interruptions for
incoming calls except in emergencies.

30

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

Johannesburg, South Africa


Course Enrollment
All course bookings and enquiries should be made through the Training Administrator.
Building Number 7
Thornhill Office Park
94 Bekker Street
Midrand
1685
Republic of South Africa
Telephone: +27 11 254 5460
Fax: +27 11 254 5472
E-mail: saz001@africa1.mot.com
To guarantee your place on a course, please return the completed purchase order within 10 working
days of provisional booking acceptance.
If the purchase order is not received within this time, your place may be allocated to another
customer.
All travel and accommodation costs are the students responsibility.
The cancellation and prerequisite policies are the same as those outlined for the Swindon
Training Centre.

Motorola Location
The Motorola Cellular Training Institute is located on the outskirts of Johannesburg, in the Midrand
Region. Midrand is one of the fastest growing commercial and residential areas in the Republic. It is
within easy reach of the main shopping centres and tourist sites in Johannesburg and Pretoria. The
International Airport is a 45 minute drive from the Training institute

Hotel Accommodation
The Training Administrator can be contacted regarding information on local hotel accommodation as
well as arrange the necessary bookings. Motorola has negotiated special rates for students at local
hotels.

Course Hours
Courses will commence at 09:00 and finish at 16:30. students should arrive between 09:00 and
09:15 on the first day only for a 09:30 start. This will enable course registration to be completed.
There will be breaks in the morning and afternoon at the instructor's discretion and a lunch break of
one hour.

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

31

Johannesburg, South Africa


On Arrival
Visitors car parking spaces are available in the Motorola car park. Parking on the road is not
allowed.
On arrival at Motorola Cellular Training Institute, students must report to Reception on the second
floor where registration will take place.

Refreshments
Lunch and refreshments are provided inclusive of the course fee.

Telephone
Incoming messages will be posted on a bulletin board. Our policy discourages class interruptions for
incoming calls except in emergencies.

32

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

Product Modular Buyout Training


To optimize customer training schedules, modular training can be requested on a product type basis
using Motorola Training Service's modular buyout scheme. A buyout is a requested closed
enrollment course delivered to a specific customer, usually at their own facility. As delegates being
trained are from just one customer or department, it allows a degree of flexibility in the delivered
material. The instructor delivering the buyout will only deliver training on the modules requested; this
will make for fast, targeted training with a minimum of engineer downtime. Prior to the course,
Training Services will request a list of products for which the customer requires training.
Local offices should request all modular buyout training through:
Swindon, UK
technicaltraining.UK@motorola.com
Tel: +44 (0)1793 566099
Fax: +44 (0)1793 566040
Jaguarina, Brazil
technicaltraining.LAC@motorola.com
Tel: +55 19 3847 7367
Fax: +55 19 3847 7090
Mundelein, Illinois, U.S.
technicaltraining.US@motorola.com
Tel: +1 800 872 8225 (North America only) or +1 847 435 5700
Fax: +1 847 4355703
Both theory and practical training modules are available as modular buyout options. Please contact
the training administrator for further details.
If practical training is to be delivered at the customer facility, then the customer must ensure that
relevant equipment is made available. Training at the customer site will not be performed on live
equipment.
The training administrator or specialist will issue equipment lists and prerequisite course information
at the time of booking.
If significant content customization is required by the customer, there may be a charge for the
development effort

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

33

34

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

Motorola Technical Training Direct


Learning Management System (LMS)
The convenience and flexibility of online courses and student management is available to Motorola
customers. Electronic learning, also called eLearning, affords students the opportunity to participate
in technical courses anywhere, anytime. Our new Learning Management System (LMS) enables
students and training administrators to enroll in eLearning as well as our traditional instructor-led
courses, allowing them to track their progress and to manage a larger number of students.
Our eLearning courses are available by on the web through the LMS. Course offerings currently
include basic wireless technologies, IP technologies, WAP, CDMA 1X technologies, GSM/GPRS,
and UMTS.
Our Learning Management System enables students to self-enroll in both web-based eLearning and
instructor-led courses. A students course and curriculum progress can easily be tracked, and
training coordinators can directly enroll students and monitor enrollment costs in real-time. Please
contact us to take full advantage of this capability.
In order for you to begin taking advantage of these innovative eLearning opportunities, you must
register as a user on the LMS, using this four-step process.

Four-Step Sign-Up Process:


If you are an existing customer and already have a Motorola User ID, please go to Step 3.
If you are a Motorola employee, please go to Step 4.

Step 1: Create a Motorola User ID


a. Visit https://membership.motorola.com.
b. From the left menu bar, click the Register link.
c. Enter the following information:
Last name
First name
E-mail address
Telephone number
Company/organization
State (required if U.S. resident)
Zip/Postal Code (required if U.S. resident)
Country.
d. Click Submit.
e. Scroll down to the Password fields.
f. Create a user ID in the Motorola ID field.
g. Create a password in the Password field.
h. Verify the password is correct in the Confirm Password field.
i. Click Next.
Within four hours, you will be notified of account activation at the e-mail address you
entered. The estimated time to receive confirmation is between 15 minutes and four hours.

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

35

Motorola Technical Training Direct


Step 2: Activate your Motorola User ID
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.

Access your e-mail account.


Open the e-mail with the subject heading Motorola Account Activation from the inbox.
Select the Click Here link provided in the e-mail message.
Enter your Motorola ID.
Enter your activation code (activation code provided in the e-mail).
Enter your password.
Click Next.

Your Motorola membership account has been activated.

Step 3: Request access to Motorola Technical Training Direct


a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.

g.
h.
i.

j.
k.

Visit https://services.motorola.com/.
Enter your User name (refers to your Motorola User ID).
Enter your password.
Click login.
Click Apply for a Services Account.
Enter the following information:
Name
Company
Title
E-mail address
Your Motorola Program Manager (if known)
Primary/Secondary Market (if known).
Select the Technical Training and Documentation for CDMA Technologies checkbox.
Select the Technical Training Direct checkbox.
Enter information in the following three fields if applicable:
Motorola Site Mnemonic
Customer Name
Customer Account Number.
Select your area(s) of interest.
Click Submit

Following this step, access for various service requests may take up to five working days (CST) due
to the security checks necessary to protect our customers privacy.

Step 4: Access LMS


a. Click the Training Direct link from the Services menu.
The LMS home page (http://www.motorola.com/techtrain) appears.
b. Enter your Motorola User ID.
c. Enter your password.
d. Click Enter Here.
New Users Only:
e. Verify the accuracy of your account information and click the Initialize Registration button.
Your account will be activated within 24 business hours

36

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

Motorola Technical Training Direct


LMS Guidelines
It is important that you familiarize yourself with the business rules that apply to the LMS. Please
contact your Training Coordinator if you have any questions regarding the training policies that
apply to the LMS.
When registering for training, you should continue to adhere to the training policies and budgets
your organization has established. It is also important that you contact your manager prior to
registering for a course to ensure that you have the necessary approval to purchase the training and
that you are granted time away from your job to complete it.

LMS Support Information


Customers with questions regarding use of the LMS should first check the reference links provided
on the left menu bar of the website.
The LMS provides the following features:
Search: Enables you to search the system for specific courses
Reports: Gives you an opportunity to review class schedules and personal account transactions
Frequently Asked Questions: Presents frequently asked questions about the LMS
Contact Us: Allows you to send a question to technical support

If you still need further assistance, please direct your questions in this order to the following:
Your personal Training Coordinator
LMS Support phone numbers:
Mundelein, Illinois, United States
Phone: 1-800-872-8225 (USA) or 847-435-5796 (ROW)
Fax:
Email: technicaltraining.US@motorola.com

January 2002

Swindon, United Kingdom


Phone: +44 (0) 1793 566099
Fax: +44 (0) 1793 566040
Email technicaltraining.UK@motorola.com

Jaguarina, Brazil
Phone: +55-19-3847-7161 or +55-19-3847-7090
Fax: +55-19-3847-7039
Email: technicaltraining.LAC@motorola.com

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

37

Cisco and Networking Courses


Motorola Training Services also offers a wide range of Cisco and Networking training courses
through Global Knowledge. These include the following:
Networking and Internetworking
WAN and Telecomms
Web Development/design
Cisco:
Routing/Switching

AVVID

WAN Switching

NetGun Program

For further details on Global Knowledge's suite of courses visit: http://www.globalknowledge.co.uk.


By booking through Technical Information Products and Services for Global Knowledge training
requirements will result in greater savings overall for Motorola and should be the supplier of your
choice.
For all discount enquires and to book on any of Global Knowledge's courses please email Technical
Information Products and Services at technicaltraining.UK@motorola.com or telephone +44 1793 566090

38

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

Curriculum Paths and Jobset Functions


Motorola training has compiled jobset functions based on typical network operator needs, which
may be used to identify the course flow required for each engineering role. Alternatively students
may enroll on any course deemed necessary provided all prerequisite courses have been attended.

GSM....................................................................................................................................................................... 40
GPRS..................................................................................................................................................................... 42
Switch .................................................................................................................................................................... 48
SwitchMATE........................................................................................................................................................ 52
Intelligent Network Operations............................................................................................................................... 53
Unix / Circuit CBSC / IWU...................................................................................................................................... 55
CDMA Optimization ............................................................................................................................................... 57
Universal Network Operations ............................................................................................................................... 58
SMAP..................................................................................................................................................................... 59
NetPlan .................................................................................................................................................................. 60
1X Operations........................................................................................................................................................ 61

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

39

GSM
GSM Non-Technical Overview
1. GSM-CP02A : GSM Cellular Overview (Non-Technical)
2. GSM-BSS11A : BSS Overview (Non-Technical)
3. GSM-OMC01A : OMC-R Overview (Non-Technical)

GSM Technical Overview


1. GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular
2. GSM-BSS14 : BSS Technical Overview
3. GSM-OMC01 : OMC-R Overview

GSM Network Operator / Advanced Network Operator


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular


GSM-BSS11 : BSS Operational Theory
GSM-NET01 : OMC-R Network Operations
GSM-SYS02 : Introduction to BSS Database
GSM-NET02 : OMC-R Advanced Network Operations
GSM-NET05 : Network Health Analyst (optional)
GSM-NET06 : Datagen Operations (optional)

GSM Network Administrator


1. GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular
2. GSM-BSS11 : BSS Operational Theory
3. GSM-NET01 : OMC-R Network Operations
4. GSM-SYS02 : Introduction to BSS Database
5. GSM-NET02 : OMC-R Advanced Network Operations
6. GSM-NET03 : Network Performance
7. GSM-SYS03 : Advanced BSS Database
8. GSM-SYS04 : Introduction to BSS Planning and Dimensioning
9. GSM-SYS01 : GSM Interfaces and Protocols (optional)
10.GSM-NET05 : Network Health Analyst (optional)
11. GSM-NET06 : Datagen Operations (optional)

GSM Network Planner


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

40

GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular


GSM-BSS11 : BSS Operational Theory
GSM-SYS02 : Introduction to BSS Database
GSM-SYS04 : Introduction to BSS Planning and Dimensioning
GSM-NET03 : Network Performance (optional)
GSM-SYS03 : Advanced BSS Database (optional)
GSM-SYS12 : Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multi-layered Systems (optional)

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

GSM
GSM Database Engineer
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular


GSM-BSS11 : BSS Operational Theory
GSM-SYS02 : Introduction to BSS Database
GSM-SYS03 : Advanced BSS Database
GSM-NET03 : Network Performance
GSM-SYS01 : GSM Interfaces and Protocols (optional)
GSM-SYS04 : Introduction to BSS Planning and Dimensioning (optional)
GSM-BSS12 : BSS Operations and Maintenance (optional)

BSS Optimization Engineer


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular


GSM-BSS11 : BSS Operational Theory
GSM-SYS02 : Introduction to BSS Database
GSM-SYS03 : Advanced BSS Database
GSM-SYS01 : GSM Interfaces and Protocols
GSM-NET03 : Network Performance
GSM-SYS12 : Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multi-layered Systems
GSM-BSS07 : Advanced BSS Field Support (optional)

BSS Commissioning and Maintenance Engineer


1. GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular
2. GSM-BSS11 : BSS Operational Theory
3. GSM-BSS12 : BSS Operations and Maintenance

BSS Diagnostics Engineer


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular


GSM-BSS11 : BSS Operational Theory
GSM-BSS12 : BSS Operations and Maintenance
GSM-SYS02 : Introduction to BSS Database
GSM-SYS03 : Advanced BSS Database
GSM-SYS01 : GSM Interfaces and Protocols
GSM-BSS07 : Advanced BSS Field Support

OMC-R System Administrator


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

January 2002

GEN-CP04 : UNIX for OMC Users


GSM-OMC03 : OMC-R System Administration (E3x00 Platform)
GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular (optional)
GSM-BSS11 : BSS Operational Theory (optional)
GSM-BSS12 : BSS Operations and Maintenance (optional)
GSM-NET01 : OMC-R Network Operations (optional)

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

41

GPRS
BSS (GPRS) Network Operator / Advanced Network Operator
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular


GPRS-CP07 : Introduction to GPRS
GSM-BSS11 : BSS Operational Theory
GSM-NET01 : OMC-R Network Operations
GPRS-BSS101 : PCU Operational Theory
GSM-SYS02 : Introduction to BSS Database
GSM-NET02 : OMC-R Advanced Network Operations
GPRS-SYS102 : BSS (GPRS) Database

BSS (GPRS) Network Administrator


1. GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular
2. GPRS-CP07 : Introduction to GPRS
3. GSM-BSS11 : BSS Operational Theory
4. GPRS-BSS101 : PCU Operational Theory
5. GSM-NET01 : OMC-R Network Operations
6. GSM-SYS02 : Introduction to BSS Database
7. GSM-NET02 : OMC-R Advanced Network Operations
8. GPRS-BSS101 : PCU Operational Theory
9. GPRS-SYS102 : BSS (GPRS) Database
10.GSM-SYS04 : Introduction to BSS Planning and Dimensioning
11. GPRS-SYS104 : BSS (GPRS) Planning
12.GSM-NET03 : Network Performance
13.GPRS-NET103 : BSS (GPRS) Network Performance
14.GSM-SYS01 : GSM Interfaces and Protocols
15.GPRS-SYS101 : GPRS Interfaces and Protocols

BSS (GPRS) Network Planner


1. GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular
2. GPRS-CP07 : Introduction to GPRS
3. GSM-BSS11 : BSS Operational Theory
4. GPRS-BSS101 : PCU Operational Theory
5. GSM-SYS02 : Introduction to BSS Database
6. GPRS-SYS102 : BSS (GPRS) Database
7. GSM-SYS04 : Introduction to BSS Planning and Dimensioning
8. GPRS-SYS104 : BSS (GPRS) Planning
9. GSM-NET03 : Network Performance (optional)
10.GPRS-NET103 : BSS (GPRS) Network Performance (optional)

42

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

GPRS
BSS (GPRS) Database Engineer
1. GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular
2. GPRS-CP07 : Introduction to GPRS
3. GSM-BSS11 : BSS Operational Theory
4. GPRS-BSS101 : PCU Operational Theory
5. GSM-SYS02 : Introduction to BSS Database
6. GPRS-SYS102 : BSS (GPRS) Database
7. GSM-SYS04 : Introduction to BSS Planning and Dimensioning
8. GPRS-SYS104 : BSS (GPRS) Planning
9. GSM-NET03 : Network Performance
10.GPRS-NET103 : BSS (GPRS) Network Performance
11.GSM-SYS01 : GSM Interfaces and Protocols
12.GPRS-SYS101 : GPRS Interfaces and Protocols

BSS (GPRS) Optimization Engineer


1. GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular
2. GPRS-CP07 : Introduction to GPRS
3. GSM-BSS11 : BSS Operational Theory
4. GPRS-BSS101 : PCU Operational Theory
5. GSM-SYS02 : Introduction to BSS Database
6. GPRS-SYS102 : BSS (GPRS) Database
7. GSM-NET03 : Network Performance
8. GPRS-NET103 : BSS (GPRS) Network Performance
9. GSM-SYS01 : GSM Interfaces and Protocols
10.GPRS-SYS101 : GPRS Interfaces and Protocols

BSS (GPRS) Commissioning and Maintenance Engineer


1.
2.
3.
4.

GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular


GPRS-CP07 : Introduction to GPRS
GSM-BSS11 : BSS Operational Theory
GPRS-BSS101 : PCU Operational Theory

GSN Network Operator


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

January 2002

GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular


GPRS-CP07 : Introduction to GPRS
GPRS-GSN101 : GPRS CommHub
GPRS-GSN102 : GSN Complex Installation
GPRS-GSN103 : Gateway GPRS Support Node
GPRS-NET101 : OMC-G Network Operations

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

43

GPRS
GSN Network Administrator
1. GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular
2. GPRS-CP07 : Introduction to GPRS
3. GPRS-GSN101 : GPRS CommHub
4. GPRS-GSN102 : GSN Complex Installation
5. GPRS-GSN103 : Gateway GPRS Support Node
6. GPRS-SYS115 : GSN Planning
7. GPRS-NET101 : OMC-G Network Operations
8. GEN-CP03 : Introduction to SS7 Signaling
9. GPRS-SYS116 : SF Database
10.GPRS-NET106 : IP Security (optional)

GSN Network Planner


1. GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular
2. GPRS-CP07 : Introduction to GPRS
3. GPRS-GSN101 : GPRS CommHub
4. GPRS-GSN102 : GSN Complex Installation
5. GPRS-GSN103 : Gateway GPRS Support Node
6. GPRS-SYS115 : GSN Planning
7. GPRS-NET101 : OMC-G Network Operations (optional)
8. GEN-CP03 : Introduction to SS7 Signaling (optional)
9. GPRS-SYS116 : SF Database (optional)
10.GPRS-NET106 : IP Security (optional)

GSN Optimization Engineer


1. GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular
2. GPRS-CP07 : Introduction to GPRS
3. GPRS-GSN101 : GPRS CommHub
4. GPRS-GSN102 : GSN Complex Installation
5. GPRS-GSN103 : Gateway GPRS Support Node
6. GPRS-NET101 : OMC-G Network Operations
7. GPRS-NET106 : IP Security
8. GEN-CP03 : Introduction to SS7 Signaling
9. GPRS-SYS116 : SF Database
10.GSM-SYS01 : GSM Interfaces and Protocols
11. GPRS-SYS101 : GPRS Interfaces and Protocols

GSN Commissioning and Maintenance Engineer


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

44

GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular


GPRS-CP07 : Introduction to GPRS
GPRS-GSN101 : GPRS CommHub
GPRS-GSN102 : GSN Complex Installation
GPRS-GSN103 : Gateway GPRS Support Node
GPRS-NET101 : OMC-G Network Operations
GEN-CP03 : Introduction to SS7 Signaling
GPRS-SYS116 : SF Database

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

GPRS
ISS System Administrator
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular


GPRS-CP07 : Introduction to GPRS
GPRS-GSN101 : GPRS CommHub
Sun Solaris System Admin, Pts. 1 & 2.
GPRS-GSN104 : Sun Enterprise Cluster
GPRS-GSN105 : ISS Applications

OMC-G System Administrator


1.
2.
3.
4.

January 2002

GEN-CP04 : UNIX for OMC Users


GSM-OMC03 : OMC-R System Administration (E3x00 Platform)
GEN-OMC-G103 : Windows NT4.0 Core Technologies
GPRS-OMC-G105 : OMC-G System Administration

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

45

Cell Site BTS


Analog Technicians
1. ANA-GNL020 : Analog Cellular Overview Companion CD-ROM
2. ANA-GNL030 : Analog Cellular Systems Overview

Digital (CDMA, PCS) Technicians


1. CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM
2. CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)

Digital SC4812T (CDMA) (Trunked) BTS Operation for Technicians


1.
2.
3.
4.

CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM


CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
CDMA-BTS710 : SC 4812T Base Transceiver Station (CDMA) (Trunked)
CDMA-PER400 : LMF for Windows Operations (CDMA)

Digital SC4812ET (CDMA) (Trunked) BTS Operation for Technicians


1.
2.
3.
4.

CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM


CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
CDMA-BTS610 : SC 4812ET Base Transceiver Station (CDMA) (Trunked)
CDMA-PER400 : LMF for Windows Operations (CDMA)

Digital SC4812ET Lite (CDMA) (Trunked) BTS Operation for Technicians


1.
2.
3.
4.

CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM


CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
CDMA-BTS810 : SC 4812ET LITE Base Transceiver Station (CDMA) (Trunked)
CDMA-PER400 : LMF for Windows Operations (CDMA)

Digital SC614 (CDMA) BTS Operation for Technicians LAC Only


1. CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM
2. CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
3. GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals (or GEN-GNL010 : UNIX Commands Applied to Motorola's
Network LAC only)
4. CDMA-BTS440 : SC 614 Base Transceiver Station (CDMA) LAC only
5. CDMA-PER400 : LMF for Windows Operations (CDMA)

Digital SC614T (CDMA) BTS Operation for Technicians


1.
2.
3.
4.

46

CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM


CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
CDMA-BTS840 : SC 614T Base Transceiver Station (CDMA)
CDMA-PER400 : LMF for Windows Operations (CDMA)

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

Cell Site BTS


Analog SC 9600 (SAS) BTS Operation for Technicians
1. ANA-GNL020 : Analog Cellular Overview Companion CD-ROM
2. ANA-GNL030 : Analog Cellular Systems Overview
3. GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals (or GEN-GNL010 : UNIX Commands Applied to Motorola's
Network LAC only)
4. ANA-BTS110 : SC 9600 Base Transceiver Station for Stand-Alone Analog Systems
5. CDMA-PER400 : LMF for Windows Operations (CDMA)

Digital SC9600 (CDMA) BTS Operation for Technicians


1.
2.
3.
4.

January 2002

CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM


CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
CDMA-BTS120 : SC 9600 Base Transceiver Station (CDMA)
CDMA-PER400 : LMF for Windows Operations (CDMA)

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

47

Switch
EMX2500 Overview
1. ANA-GNL020 : Analog Cellular Overview Companion CD-ROM
2. ANA-GNL030 : Analog Cellular Systems Overview
3. ANA-SWT040 : EMX 2500 Overview

EMX5000 Overview
1. CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM
2. CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
3. CDMA-SWT340 : EMX 5000 Overview

EMX Operation and Maintenance for Analog Technicians


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

ANA-GNL020 : Analog Cellular Overview Companion CD-ROM


ANA-GNL030 : Analog Cellular Systems Overview
CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling
CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance
CDMA-SWT150 : EMX Advanced or CDMA-SWT160 : DMX

EMX Operation and Maintenance for Digital Technicians


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM


CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling
CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance
CDMA-SWT150 : EMX Advanced or CDMA-SWT160 : DMX

(Analog) SS7/C7 Common Channeling Signal


1. ANA-GNL020 : Analog Cellular Overview Companion CD-ROM
2. ANA-GNL030 : Analog Cellular Systems Overview
3. CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling

(CDMA) SS7/C7 Common Channeling Signal


1. CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM
2. CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
3. CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling

(Analog) CCS/SS7 Implementation


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

48

ANA-GNL020 : Analog Cellular Overview Companion CD-ROM


ANA-GNL030 : Analog Cellular Systems Overview
CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling
CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance
CDMA-SWT260 : CCS/SS7 Implementation

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

Switch
(CDMA) CCS/SS7 Common Channeling Signal
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM


CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling
CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance
CDMA-SWT260 : CCS/SS7 Implementation

(Analog) CCS/C7 Implementation


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

ANA-GNL020 : Analog Cellular Overview Companion CD-ROM


ANA-GNL030 : Analog Cellular Systems Overview
CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling
CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance
CDMA-SWT270 : CCS/C7 Implementation (LAC only)

(CDMA) CCS/C7 Implementation


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM


CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling
CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance
CDMA-SWT270 : CCS/C7 Implementation (LAC only)

(Analog) EMX-V Installation, Operation and Maintenance


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

ANA-GNL020 : Analog Cellular Overview Companion CD-ROM


ANA-GNL030 : Analog Cellular Systems Overview
CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling
CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance
CDMA-SWT370 : EMX-V Implementation/Migration

(CDMA) EMX-V Installation, Operation and Maintenance


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM


CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling
CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance
CDMA-SWT370 : EMX-V Implementation/Migration

(Analog) EMX-V Translations


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

January 2002

ANA-GNL020 : Analog Cellular Overview Companion CD-ROM


ANA-GNL030 : Analog Cellular Systems Overview
CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling
CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance
CDMA-SWT440 : EMX-V Translations

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

49

Switch
(CDMA) EMX-V Translations
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM


CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling
CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance
CDMA-SWT440 : EMX-V Translations

EMX International Translations


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

ANA-GNL020 : Analog Cellular Overview Companion CD-ROM


ANA-GNL030 : Analog Cellular Systems Overview
CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling and ANA-SWT040 : EMX 2500 Overview
CDMA-SWT110 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance (Week 1)
CDMA-SWT240 : EMX Translations (International)

(Analog) CALEA Wiretap Network Implementation


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

ANA-GNL020 : Analog Cellular Overview Companion CD-ROM


ANA-GNL030 : Analog Cellular Systems Overview
CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling
CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance
GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals
GEN-NET200 : Sun Solaris Part 1: Basic Administration
CDMA-SWT260 : CCS/SS7 Implementation
CDMA-SWT370 : EMX-V Implementation/Migration
CDMA-PER280 : CALEA Wiretap Network Implementation

(CDMA) CALEA Wiretap Network Implementation


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM


CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling
CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance
GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals
GEN-NET200 : Sun Solaris Part 1: Basic Administration
CDMA-SWT260 : CCS/SS7 Implementation
CDMA-SWT370 : EMX-V Implementation/Migration
CDMA-PER280 : CALEA Wiretap Network Implementation

(Analog) CALEA Wiretap Network Operations and Maintenance


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

50

ANA-GNL020 : Analog Cellular Overview Companion CD-ROM


ANA-GNL030 : Analog Cellular Systems Overview
CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling
CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance
GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals
GEN-NET200 : Sun Solaris Part 1: Basic Administration
CDMA-SWT260 : CCS/SS7 Implementation
CDMA-SWT370 : EMX-V Implementation/Migration
CDMA-PER290 : CALEA Wiretap Network Operations and Maintenance

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

Switch
(CDMA) CALEA Wiretap Network Operations and Maintenance
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM


CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling
CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance
GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals
GEN-NET200 : Sun Solaris Part 1: Basic Administration
CDMA-SWT260 : CCS/SS7 Implementation
CDMA-SWT370 : EMX-V Implementation/Migration
CDMA-PER290 : CALEA Wiretap Network Operations and Maintenance

(Analog) EMX Operation and Maintenance for Traffic Engineers and


Performance Engineers
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

ANA-GNL020 : Analog Cellular Overview Companion CD-ROM


ANA-GNL030 : Analog Cellular Systems Overview
CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling
CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance
CDMA-SWT180 : Managing Switch Performance and Growth

(CDMA) EMX Operation and Maintenance for Traffic Engineers and


Performance Engineers
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

January 2002

CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM


CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling
CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance
CDMA-SWT180 : Managing Switch Performance and Growth

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

51

SwitchMATE
(Analog) SwitchMATE Operation and Administration
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

ANA-GNL020 : Analog Cellular Overview Companion CD-ROM


ANA-GNL030 : Analog Cellular Systems Overview
CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling
CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance
GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals
GEN-NET200 : Sun Solaris Part 1: Basic Administration
CDMA-PER140 : SwitchMATE and SwitchMATE II Operations

(CDMA) SwitchMATE Operation and Administration


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

52

CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM


CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling
CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance
GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals
GEN-NET200 : Sun Solaris Part 1: Basic Administration
CDMA-PER140 : SwitchMATE and SwitchMATE II Operations

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

Intelligent Network Operations


(Analog) Intelligent Network K-Series Fundamentals
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

ANA-GNL020 : Analog Cellular Overview Companion CD-ROM


ANA-GNL030 : Analog Cellular Systems Overview
CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling
CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance
CDMA-PER200 : K-Series Fundamentals

(CDMA) Intelligent Network K-Series Fundamentals


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM


CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling
CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance
CDMA-PER200 : K-Series Fundamentals

(Analog) Intelligent Network (K-Series) IS-41 Operation and Maintenance


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

ANA-GNL020 : Analog Cellular Overview Companion CD-ROM


ANA-GNL030 : Analog Cellular Systems Overview
CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling
CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance
CDMA-PER200 : K-Series Fundamentals
CDMA-PER210 : IS-41 Operation

(CDMA) Intelligent Network (K-Series) IS-41 Operation and Maintenance


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM


CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling
CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance
CDMA-PER200 : K-Series Fundamentals
CDMA-PER210 : IS-41 Operation

(Analog) Intelligent Network (K-Series) Message Register Operation and


Maintenance
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

January 2002

ANA-GNL020 : Analog Cellular Overview Companion CD-ROM


ANA-GNL030 : Analog Cellular Systems Overview
CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling
CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance
CDMA-PER200 : K-Series Fundamentals
CDMA-PER220 : Message Register (MR)

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

53

Intelligent Network Operations


(CDMA) Intelligent Network (K-Series) Message Register Operation and
Maintenance
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM


CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling
CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance
CDMA-PER200 : K-Series Fundamentals
CDMA-PER220 : Message Register (MR)

(Analog) Intelligent Network (K-Series) HLR-DMX Operation and Maintenance


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

ANA-GNL020 : Analog Cellular Overview Companion CD-ROM


ANA-GNL030 : Analog Cellular Systems Overview
CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling
CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance
CDMA-PER200 : K-Series Fundamentals
CDMA-PER230 : DMX Home Location Register (DMX HLR)

(CDMA) Intelligent Network (K-Series) HLR-DMX Operation and Maintenance


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM


CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling
CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance
CDMA-PER200 : K-Series Fundamentals
CDMA-PER230 : DMX Home Location Register (DMX HLR)

(Analog) Compaq HLR41/AC


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

ANA-GNL020 : Analog Cellular Overview Companion CD-ROM


ANA-GNL030 : Analog Cellular Systems Overview
CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling
CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance
CDMA-PER640 : S-Series Fundamentals
CDMA-PER270 : Compaq HLR41/AC

(CDMA) Compaq HLR 41 / AC


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

54

CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM


CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling
CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance
CDMA-PER640 : S-Series Fundamentals
CDMA-PER270 : Compaq HLR41/AC

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

Unix / Circuit CBSC / IWU


High Speed Packet Data (IWU)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM


CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals
CDMA-OMCR100NE : OMC-R Network Element Overview for Release 16.x
CDMA-MM100NE : Mobility Manager Network Element Overview for G16.x Release
CDMA-XC100NE : XC Network Element Overview for Release 16.x
CDMA-SYS100OM : 1X Operations and Maintenance: Overview
CDMA-PER380 : High Speed Packet Data (IWU)

High-Density Interworking Unit (HD-IWU) Operations and Maintenance for


Technicians
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM


CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals
CDMA-OMCR100NE : OMC-R Network Element Overview for Release 16.x
CDMA-MM100NE : Mobility Manager Network Element Overview for G16.x Release
CDMA-XC100NE : XC Network Element Overview for Release 16.x
CDMA-SYS100OM : 1X Operations and Maintenance: Overview
CDMA-PER330: High Density IWU

UNIX SVR4 System Administration


1. GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals (or GEN-GNL010 : UNIX Commands Applied to Motorola's
Network LAC only)
2. GEN-NET200 : Sun Solaris Part 1: Basic Administration

Advanced Scenario Workshop


1. CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM
2. CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
3. GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals
4. GEN-NET200 : Sun Solaris Part 1: Basic Administration
5. CDMA-OMCR100NE : OMC-R Network Element Overview for Release 16.x
6. CDMA-MM100NE : Mobility Manager Network Element Overview for G16.x Release
7. CDMA-XC100NE : XC Network Element Overview for Release 16.x
8. CDMA-SYS100OM : 1X Operations and Maintenance: Overview
9. CDMA-OMCR100OM : Operations and Maintenance: OMCR
10.CDMA-MM100OM : Operations and Maintenance: MM
11.CDMA-XC100OM : Operations and Maintenance: XC
12.CDMA-SAO100 : Advanced Scenario Workshop

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

55

Unix / Circuit CBSC / IWU


CBSC Operation for Circuit CBSC Operators
1. CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM
2. CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
3. GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals
4. GEN-NET200 : Sun Solaris Part 1: Basic Administration
5. CDMA-OMCR100NE : OMC-R Network Element Overview for Release 16.x
6. CDMA-MM100NE : Mobility Manager Network Element Overview for G16.x Release
7. CDMA-XC100NE : XC Network Element Overview for Release 16.x
8. CDMA-SYS100OM : 1X Operations and Maintenance: Overview
9. CDMA-OMCR100OM : Operations and Maintenance: OMCR
10.CDMA-MM100OM : Operations and Maintenance: MM
11. CDMA-XC100OM : Operations and Maintenance: XC

CBSC Operation for Circuit CBSC for BTS Technicians


1.
2.
3.
4.

CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM


CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
Any BTS Course of Choice
CDMA-SAO210 : CBSC Operations for BTS Technicians

CBSC Database Administration


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM


CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals
GEN-NET110 : UNIX Part 2: Advanced Topics for Users
CDMA-OMCR100NE : OMC-R Network Element Overview for Release 16.x
CDMA-MM100NE : Mobility Manager Network Element Overview for G16.x Release
CDMA-XC100NE : XC Network Element Overview for Release 16.x

CDMA RF System Design


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

56

GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals


CDMA-PER300 : NetPlan
CDMA-PER130 : NetPlan CDMA
CDMA-PER350 : NetPlan Fundamentals Plus CDMA
CDMA-PER360 : NetPlan CDMA RF System Design

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

CDMA Optimization
CBSC / RFDS Operations
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM


CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals
Any BTS Course of Choice
CDMA-SYS200 : CBSC/RFDS Operations

CDMA System Optimization


1. CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM
2. CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
3. CDMA-SYS300 : CDMA System Optimization of the RF Link

Cellular System Performance


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

January 2002

CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM


CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals
GEN-NET110 : UNIX Part 2: Advanced Topics for Users
CDMA-SAO190 : Performance Management

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

57

Universal Network Operations


Universal Network Operations (UNO)
1. CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM
2. CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
3. GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals
4. GEN-NET110 : UNIX Part 2: Advanced Topics for Users
5. Any BTS Course of Choice
6. CDMA-OMCR100NE : OMC-R Network Element Overview for Release 16.x
7. CDMA-MM100NE : Mobility Manager Network Element Overview for G16.x Release
8. CDMA-XC100NE : XC Network Element Overview for Release 16.x
9. CDMA-PER450 : UNO Element Manager
10.CDMA-PER460 : UNO Market Manager

58

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

SMAP
SMAP Operation for System Engineers
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

January 2002

CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM


CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals
GEN-NET200 : Sun Solaris Part 1: Basic Administration
CDMA-OMCR100NE : OMC-R Network Element Overview for Release 16.x
CDMA-PER250 : System Monitoring Application Processor (SMAP)

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

59

NetPlan
NetPlan Operation for CDMA-Only Systems
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM


CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals
GEN-NET200 : Sun Solaris Part 1: Basic Administration
CDMA-PER350 : NetPlan Fundamentals Plus CDMA

NetPlan CDMA Static Simulator


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM


CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals
GEN-NET200 : Sun Solaris Part 1: Basic Administration
CDMA-PER300 : NetPlan
CDMA-PER130 : NetPlan CDMA

NetPlan for Analog and GSM


1. GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals
2. CDMA-PER300 : NetPlan

60

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

1X Operations
Packet or Circuit CBSC Operators
1. CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
2. CDMA-GNL130 : 1X Overview
or
CDMA-GNL131 : e1X Overview (Web-based)
3. CDMA-OMCR100NE : OMC-R Network Element Overview for Release 16.x
4. CDMA-MM100NE : Mobility Manager Network Element Overview for G16.x Release
5. CDMA-XC100NE : XC Network Element Overview for Release 16.x
6. CDMA-OMCP100NE : OMC-IP Network Element Overview for G16.x Release
7. CDMA-MLS100NE : MLS Network Element Overview for Release 16.x
8. CDMA-AGN100NE : AGNODE Network Element Overview for Release 16.x
9. CDMA-OMCR100OM : Operations and Maintenance: OMCR
10.CDMA-MM100OM : Operations and Maintenance: MM
11.CDMA-XC100OM : Operations and Maintenance: XC
12.OMCP100OM
13.CDMA-MLS100OM : Operations and Maintenance: MLS
14.CDMA-AGN100OM : Operations and Maintenance: AGNODE

Packet CBSC Operations


1. CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
2. CDMA-GNL130 : 1X Overview
or
CDMA-GNL131 : e1X Overview (Web-based)
3. CDMA-OMCP100NE : OMC-IP Network Element Overview for G16.x Release
4. CDMA-MLS100NE : MLS Network Element Overview for Release 16.x
5. CDMA-AGN100NE : AGNODE Network Element Overview for Release 16.x
6. OMCP100OM
7. CDMA-MLS100OM : Operations and Maintenance: MLS
8. CDMA-AGN100OM : Operations and Maintenance: AGNODE

Circuit CBSC Operations


1. CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
2. CDMA-GNL130 : 1X Overview
or
CDMA-GNL131 : e1X Overview (Web-based)
3. CDMA-OMCR100NE : OMC-R Network Element Overview for Release 16.x
4. CDMA-MM100NE : Mobility Manager Network Element Overview for G16.x Release
5. CDMA-OMCR100OM : Operations and Maintenance: OMCR
6. CDMA-MM100OM : Operations and Maintenance: MM
7. CDMA-XC100OM : Operations and Maintenance: XC

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

61

62

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

Training Advice
GSM....................................................................................................................................................................... 65
GPRS..................................................................................................................................................................... 75
Cell Site BTS.......................................................................................................................................................... 89
Switch .................................................................................................................................................................... 99
SwitchMATE...................................................................................................................................................... 123
Intelligent Network Operations............................................................................................................................. 129
Unix/Circuit CBSC/IWU........................................................................................................................................ 141
CDMA Optimization ............................................................................................................................................. 151
Universal Network Operations ............................................................................................................................. 155
SMAP................................................................................................................................................................... 157
NetPlan ................................................................................................................................................................ 159
1X Operations...................................................................................................................................................... 163

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

63

64

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

GSM
GSM Network Operator / Advanced Network Operator......................................................................................... 66
GSM Network Administrator .................................................................................................................................. 67
GSM Network Planner ........................................................................................................................................... 68
GSM Database Engineer....................................................................................................................................... 69
BSS Optimization Engineer ................................................................................................................................... 70
BSS Commissioning and Maintenance Engineer .................................................................................................. 71
BSS Diagnostics Engineer..................................................................................................................................... 72
OMC-R System Administrator................................................................................................................................ 73

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

65

GSM Network Operator / Advanced Network Operator


Jobset Description
The Network Operator jobset can be divided into two levels of expertise, identified as:

Network Operator.
Advanced Network Operator.

Both are based at the OMC-R and responsible for a number of operational tasks.
Network OperatorThe Network Operator skill set can be gained through attending the mandatory
courses of GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular, GSM-BSS11 : BSS Operational Theory and GSM-NET01 :
OMC-R Network Operations, and will be responsible for:

Using the OMC-R to monitor and maintain BSS network health.


Using the OMC-R as a tool for troubleshooting faulty BSS devices.
Using the OMC-R to download new software and databases to the BSS network.
Using the OMC-R to upload BSS databases.
Using the OMC-R for creating and scheduling statistical reports.

Advanced Network OperatorIn addition to the courses identified for the Network Operator, the
Advanced Network Operator must also attend GSM-SYS02 : Introduction to BSS Database and GSM-NET02 :
OMC-R Advanced Network Operations, with the options of attending GSM-NET05 : Network Health Analyst and
GSM-NET06 : Datagen Operations at a later stage, and will be responsible for:

Using the OMC-R to add new BSS Network Elements.


Packet Switch configuration.
Using the OMC-R to equip all BSS network devices, functions and algorithms.
Using the OMC-R to bring new BTS sites into the network including daisy chain and closed loop
configurations.
Using the OMC-R to carry out major online network reconfigurations such as general small-scale
frequency changes, changing of BCCH carrier frequency and re-parenting sites.
Using various OMC-R utilities to manipulate the Management Information Base (MIB).

Curriculum Path
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular


GSM-BSS11 : BSS Operational Theory
GSM-NET01 : OMC-R Network Operations
GSM-SYS02 : Introduction to BSS Database
GSM-NET02 : OMC-R Advanced Network Operations
GSM-NET05 : Network Health Analyst (optional)
GSM-NET06 : Datagen Operations (optional)

Options
The GSM-NET05 : Network Health Analyst course will equip the student with the skills to evaluate network
performance and execute preventative measures prior to system failure. The GSM-NET06 : Datagen
Operations course will give the student knowledge to carry out major offline tasks including network
wide frequency plan manipulation and major network reconfiguration.

Timing
It is not advisable to attend the GSM-NET02 : OMC-R Advanced Network Operations directly after GSM-NET01
: OMC-R Network Operations and GSM-SYS02 : Introduction to BSS Database. The student should gain six
months work experience on a live OMC-R, before returning on this more advanced course. Similarly
students should gain three to six months work experience after attendance of NET02 before
attending GSM-NET05 : Network Health Analyst and GSM-NET06 : Datagen Operations.

66

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

GSM Network Administrator


Jobset Description
A fully qualified Network Administrator should be the highest trained engineer capable of carrying
out many and varied tasks in addition to those of an Advanced Network Operator. The Network
Administrator skill set can be gained through attending the mandatory courses GSM-CP02 : Introduction
to GSM Cellular, GSM-BSS11 : BSS Operational Theory, GSM-NET01 : OMC-R Network Operations, GSM-SYS02 :
Introduction to BSS Database, GSM-NET02 : OMC-R Advanced Network Operations, GSM-NET03 : Network
Performance, GSM-SYS03 : Advanced BSS Database and GSM-SYS04 : Introduction to BSS Planning and
Dimensioning, and will be responsible for:

Creating complete databases using all methods


Identifying and solving difficult network problems
Analyzing network performance, recommending and implementing network improvements

Curriculum Path
1. GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular
2. GSM-BSS11 : BSS Operational Theory
3. GSM-NET01 : OMC-R Network Operations
4. GSM-SYS02 : Introduction to BSS Database
5. GSM-NET02 : OMC-R Advanced Network Operations
6. GSM-NET03 : Network Performance
7. GSM-SYS03 : Advanced BSS Database
8. GSM-SYS04 : Introduction to BSS Planning and Dimensioning
9. GSM-SYS01 : GSM Interfaces and Protocols (optional)
10.GSM-NET05 : Network Health Analyst (optional)
11.GSM-NET06 : Datagen Operations (optional)

Options
The GSM-SYS01 : GSM Interfaces and Protocols course provides in-depth knowledge of the terrestrial and
air interfaces within the GSM network. The NET05 course will equip the student with the skills to
evaluate network performance and execute preventative measures prior to system failure. The
NET06 course will give the student knowledge to carry out major offline tasks including network
wide frequency plan manipulation and major network reconfiguration.

Timing
The responsibilities of a Network Administrator are many and varied, hence the training curriculum
indicated should be completed over a longer period of time. As can be seen from the curriculum, a
Network Administrator is essentially a higher trained Advanced Network Operator, with a wider
range of experience. Interspersing training courses with periods of on-the-job training enables the
engineer to gain the necessary experience to progress on to the next level of training courses. It is
very important that this on-the-job training take place in order for the engineer to gain maximum
benefit from the more advanced training courses.
The GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular, GSM-BSS11 : BSS Operational Theory, GSM-NET01 : OMC-R Network
Operations, GSM-SYS02 : Introduction to BSS Database and GSM-NET02 : OMC-R Advanced Network Operations
courses should be completed as per the Advanced Network Operator (i.e. six months work
experience in between NET01/GSM-SYS02 : Introduction to BSS Database and NET02). The GSM-NET03 :
Network Performance, GSM-SYS03 : Advanced BSS Database and GSM-SYS04 : Introduction to BSS Planning and
Dimensioning should be completed within 18 months of network launch.

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

67

GSM Network Planner


Jobset Description
The Network Planner skill set can be gained through the attending the mandatory courses GSM-CP02
: Introduction to GSM Cellular, GSM-BSS11 : BSS Operational Theory, GSM-SYS02 : Introduction to BSS Database and
GSM-SYS04 : Introduction to BSS Planning and Dimensioning, and will be responsible for:

Planning site hardware configurations to meet traffic capacity requirements


Calculating the number of necessary processors
Planning and re-planning cell size and location to meet traffic capacity
Producing a viable frequency reuse plan, allowing for future expansion
Calculating the number of signalling links required at each interface
Planning link capacity in relation to network topology and connectivity
Determining specific system Database parameters

Curriculum Path
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular


GSM-BSS11 : BSS Operational Theory
GSM-SYS02 : Introduction to BSS Database
GSM-SYS04 : Introduction to BSS Planning and Dimensioning
GSM-NET03 : Network Performance (optional)
GSM-SYS03 : Advanced BSS Database (optional)
GSM-SYS12 : Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multi-layered Systems (optional)

Options
In-depth database training is unlikely to be necessary for this jobset. As a network moves from
rollout to maturity it is imperative that the network is monitored and re-planned, in this case the GSMNET03 : Network Performance course gives the planner the information on statistics that need to be
taken into account. The GSM-SYS03 : Advanced BSS Database course gives the planner a greater insight
of database parameters and the GSM-SYS12 : Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multi-layered Systems gives
invaluable knowledge on capacity enhancing techniques and multilayer systems.

Timing
The level and duration of Motorola support will dictate the speed at which this jobset stream is
completed. The complete stream should certainly be achieved in preparation for the first major
expansion.
For a new network the Planning Engineer should have completed all mandatory courses before the
network becomes operational. GSM-NET03 : Network Performance, GSM-SYS03 : Advanced BSS Database and
GSM-SYS12 : Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multi-layered Systems should be completed within 18 months
of network launch.

68

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

GSM Database Engineer


Jobset Description
The GSM Database Engineer skill set can be obtained through attending the mandatory courses
GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular, GSM-BSS11 : BSS Operational Theory, GSM-SYS02 : Introduction to BSS
Database and GSM-SYS03 : Advanced BSS Database, and will be responsible for tasks including:

Building BSS Databases based on Network design


Testing BSS databases for validity and sanity
Compiling database objects
Troubleshooting database problems
Operation of DataGen to produce and convert BSS databases
Implementing database modifications to enhance and optimize network functionality.

Curriculum Path
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular


GSM-BSS11 : BSS Operational Theory
GSM-SYS02 : Introduction to BSS Database
GSM-SYS03 : Advanced BSS Database
GSM-NET03 : Network Performance
GSM-SYS01 : GSM Interfaces and Protocols (optional)
GSM-SYS04 : Introduction to BSS Planning and Dimensioning (optional)
GSM-BSS12 : BSS Operations and Maintenance (optional)

Options
The courses that follow the mandatory courses are optional and will depend upon network
complexity with regard to micro and picocellular applications. The GSM-NET03 : Network Performance,
GSM-SYS01 : GSM Interfaces and Protocols and GSM-SYS04 : Introduction to BSS Planning and Dimensioning
courses are optional and do not themselves cover database parameters, but will provide extra
knowledge useful to the Database Engineer including statistical parameters and planning
techniques. GSM-SYS12 : Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multi-layered Systems is an option as it covers
more advanced database parameters as well as the micro and picocellular parameters.

Timing
Depending on the level and duration of Motorola support in this technical area it is recommended
that Database Engineers attend the mandatory courses before the network becomes operational.

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

69

BSS Optimization Engineer


Jobset Description
The BSS Optimization Engineer skill set can be gained from attending the mandatory courses GSMCP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular, GSM-BSS11 : BSS Operational Theory, GSM-SYS02 : Introduction to BSS
Database, GSM-SYS03 : Advanced BSS Database, GSM-SYS01 : GSM Interfaces and Protocols, GSM-NET03 :
Network Performance and GSM-SYS12 : Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multi-layered Systems, and will be
responsible for tasks including:

Implementation of planned network enhancements


Troubleshooting BSS related network problems
Propose enhancements to support improved network functionality
Meaningful interpretation of BSS performance data
Air interface optimization
BSS database optimization
Investigation and diagnosis of complex network problems
A - interface optimization

Curriculum Path
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular


GSM-BSS11 : BSS Operational Theory
GSM-SYS02 : Introduction to BSS Database
GSM-SYS03 : Advanced BSS Database
GSM-SYS01 : GSM Interfaces and Protocols
GSM-NET03 : Network Performance
GSM-SYS12 : Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multi-layered Systems
GSM-BSS07 : Advanced BSS Field Support (optional)

Options
BSS07 has been shown as optional and will depend on the scope of field investigation work to be
undertaken. BSS07 will equip the student with the knowledge to collect BSS system information for
analysis.

Timing
The training programme for this type of engineer must be seen as a long term investment, the
training courses must be interspersed with periods of work experience. For a new network the
potential BSS Optimization Engineer should complete the GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular, GSMBSS11 : BSS Operational Theory and GSM-SYS02 : Introduction to BSS Database courses before network
launch.
All remaining courses should be completed within 18 months.

70

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

BSS Commissioning and Maintenance Engineer


Jobset Description
A BSS Commissioning and Maintenance Engineer skill set can be gained from attending the
mandatory courses GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular, GSM-BSS11 : BSS Operational Theory and GSMBSS12 : BSS Operations and Maintenance, and is responsible for tasks including:

Installing and commissioning BSS equipment


Performing routine maintenance tasks
Diagnosing equipment problems to board/cable level

Curriculum Path
1. GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular
2. GSM-BSS11 : BSS Operational Theory
3. GSM-BSS12 : BSS Operations and Maintenance

Options
None

Timing
It is strongly recommended that GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular, GSM-BSS11 : BSS Operational
Theory, GSM-BSS12 : BSS Operations and Maintenance are completed in one training period. Courses are
scheduled in Swindon to accommodate this.
After completing these courses, it is advisable for the student to undergo a short period (three
months is recommended) of on the job training with a more experienced engineer, in order to gain
an appreciation and understanding of local site specific details.
For a new network, all Commissioning and Maintenance Engineers should have completed these
mandatory courses before independently attempting to install base site equipment. The urgency of
this requirement will depend on the level of Motorola network support to be provided.
New engineers joining a cellular operations company should complete these courses before
individually attempting to install equipment.

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

71

BSS Diagnostics Engineer


Jobset Description
The BSS Diagnostic Engineer skill set can be gained through attending the mandatory courses GSMCP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular, GSM-BSS11 : BSS Operational Theory, GSM-BSS12 : BSS Operations and
Maintenance, GSM-SYS02 : Introduction to BSS Database, GSM-SYS03 : Advanced BSS Database, GSM-SYS01 :
GSM Interfaces and Protocols and GSM-BSS07 : Advanced BSS Field Support, and will be responsible for tasks
including:

Effective use of the EMON tools to gather information pertaining to system problems
Gathering the correct information concerning possible software errors to be fed back to the
Customer Network Resolution Centre and Motorola software engineers
Filtering and interpreting inter-process messages
Making database enhancements as a result of the data gathered and subsequent diagnosis

Curriculum Path
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular


GSM-BSS11 : BSS Operational Theory
GSM-BSS12 : BSS Operations and Maintenance
GSM-SYS02 : Introduction to BSS Database
GSM-SYS03 : Advanced BSS Database
GSM-SYS01 : GSM Interfaces and Protocols
GSM-BSS07 : Advanced BSS Field Support

Options
None.

Timing
It is strongly recommended that the initial mandatory courses GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular,
GSM-BSS11 : BSS Operational Theory and GSM-BSS12 : BSS Operations and Maintenance be completed in one
training period, before network launch. Courses are scheduled to accommodate this. A prerequisite
of BSS07 is one years field experience, hence two work experience breaks.

Work Experience Objectives


After completing the GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular, GSM-BSS11 : BSS Operational Theory and GSMBSS12 : BSS Operations and Maintenance the following objectives should be achieved before continuing
with GSM-SYS02 : Introduction to BSS Database, GSM-SYS03 : Advanced BSS Database and GSM-SYS01 : GSM
Interfaces and Protocols, this should take around three months:

Install & commission:


BSC.
RXCDR.
Horizonmacro.
Horizonmicro, Horizoncompact
Carry out fault finding to board level.
Make limited database adjustments.

After completing GSM-SYS02 : Introduction to BSS Database, GSM-SYS03 : Advanced BSS Database and GSMSYS01 : GSM Interfaces and Protocols a period of approximately 9 months should be spent on the
following objectives before attending the GSM-BSS07 : Advanced BSS Field Support

72

Fault finding and troubleshooting on BSS equipment.


Experience in the modification of databases.

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

OMC-R System Administrator


Jobset Description
It is strongly recommended that all potential OMC-R System Administrators attend Sun Solaris
System Administration parts one and two, and Informix Dynamic Server Administration before
attending GSM-OMC03 : OMC-R System Administration (E3x00 Platform). These courses are available from
Sun and Informix respectively, or alternatively may be available as a buyout option from Motorola
training. The OMC-R System Administrator must attend the mandatory courses GEN-CP04 : UNIX for
OMC Users and GSM-OMC03 : OMC-R System Administration (E3x00 Platform), and will be responsible for
tasks including:

Backup and restoration of file systems


Backup and restoration of databases
Administering user accounts
Configuration of cron jobs
Viewing log files

Curriculum Path
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

GEN-CP04 : UNIX for OMC Users


GSM-OMC03 : OMC-R System Administration (E3x00 Platform)
GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular (optional)
GSM-BSS11 : BSS Operational Theory (optional)
GSM-BSS12 : BSS Operations and Maintenance (optional)
GSM-NET01 : OMC-R Network Operations (optional)

Options
A number of courses are shown as optional, these modules may be necessary depending on the
daily activities of the administrator determined locally. If the sole task is to administer the OMC-R
platform then the completion of these optional modules may not be necessary. They will however
provide a greater understanding of network functionality, which will assist with OMC-R System
Administration tasks.

Timing
For a new network, a Systems Administrator should complete all mandatory courses before the
OMC-R becomes operational. The urgency will depend on the level of Motorola support to be
provided. For new employees joining an existing operator these courses should be completed
before any operational responsibility is undertaken.

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

73

74

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

GPRS
BSS (GPRS) Network Operator / Advanced Network Operator ............................................................................ 76
BSS (GPRS) Network Administrator...................................................................................................................... 77
BSS (GPRS) Network Planner............................................................................................................................... 78
BSS (GPRS) Database Engineer .......................................................................................................................... 79
BSS (GPRS) Optimization Engineer...................................................................................................................... 80
BSS (GPRS) Commissioning and Maintenance Engineer..................................................................................... 81
GSN Network Operator.......................................................................................................................................... 82
GSN Network Administrator................................................................................................................................... 83
GSN Network Planner............................................................................................................................................ 84
GSN Optimization Engineer................................................................................................................................... 85
GSN Commissioning and Maintenance Engineer.................................................................................................. 86
ISS System Administrator...................................................................................................................................... 87
OMC-G System Administrator ............................................................................................................................... 88

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

75

BSS (GPRS) Network Operator / Advanced Network


Operator
Jobset Description
BSS (GPRS) Network Operator reflects the additional tasks that a GSM Network Operator is
required to carry out due to the addition of the GPRS PCU network element.
BSS (GPRS) Network Operator
The skills required may be obtained through attendance of GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular,
GPRS-CP07 : Introduction to GPRS, GSM-BSS11 : BSS Operational Theory, GPRS-BSS101 : PCU Operational Theory
and GSM-NET01 : OMC-R Network Operations. The tasks include:

Using the OMC-R to monitor the BSS (GPRS) network health


Using the OMC-R as a tool for troubleshooting the faulty BSS (GPRS) devices
Using the OMC-R to download new software and databases to the BSS (GPRS) devices
Using the OMC-R to upload BSS (GPRS) databases
Using the OMC-R for creating and scheduling statistical reports

BSS (GPRS) Advanced Network Operator


In addition to the tasks for the Network Operator, the Advanced Network Operator should also
attend GSM-SYS02 : Introduction to BSS Database, GPRS-SYS102 : BSS (GPRS) Database and GPRS-SYS101 :
GPRS Interfaces and Protocols. The tasks include:
Using the OMC-R to add new BSS (GPRS) elements

Using the OMC-R to equip and configure all BSS (GPRS) network devices, functions and
algorithms

Curriculum Path
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular


GPRS-CP07 : Introduction to GPRS
GSM-BSS11 : BSS Operational Theory
GSM-NET01 : OMC-R Network Operations
GPRS-BSS101 : PCU Operational Theory
GSM-SYS02 : Introduction to BSS Database
GSM-NET02 : OMC-R Advanced Network Operations
GPRS-SYS102 : BSS (GPRS) Database

Options
None

Timing
Training up to GPRS-BSS101 : PCU Operational Theory (including all prerequisite training should be
completed by all Network Operators before GPRS is operational and before any operational
responsibility is undertaken by a new Network Operator.
The GPRS-SYS101 : GPRS Interfaces and Protocols course is necessary for developing Network Operators
into Advanced Network Operators. It is essential that six months work experience be gained before
attending GPRS-SYS101 : GPRS Interfaces and Protocols.

76

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

BSS (GPRS) Network Administrator


Jobset Description
A fully qualified Network Administrator is a highly trained engineer capable of carrying out many and
varied tasks in addition to those of an Advanced Network Operator. The Network Administrator skill
set may be gained through attending the mandatory courses GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular,
GPRS-CP07 : Introduction to GPRS, GSM-BSS11 : BSS Operational Theory, NET01, GSM-SYS02 : Introduction to
BSS Database, NET02, GPRS-BSS101 : PCU Operational Theory, GPRS-SYS102 : BSS (GPRS) Database, GSMSYS04 : Introduction to BSS Planning and Dimensioning, GPRS-SYS104 : BSS (GPRS) Planning, GSM-NET03 :
Network Performance, GPRS-NET103 : BSS (GPRS) Network Performance, GSM-SYS01 : GSM Interfaces and
Protocols and GPRS-SYS101 : GPRS Interfaces and Protocols, and will be responsible for tasks including:

Creating complete databases from source using all methods


Identifying and solving in-depth BSS (GPRS) network problems
Analyzing statistics to identify problem areas and suggesting solutions
Planning new BSS (GPRS) networks and modifying existing network configurations

Curriculum Path
1. GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular
2. GPRS-CP07 : Introduction to GPRS
3. GSM-BSS11 : BSS Operational Theory
4. GPRS-BSS101 : PCU Operational Theory
5. GSM-NET01 : OMC-R Network Operations
6. GSM-SYS02 : Introduction to BSS Database
7. GSM-NET02 : OMC-R Advanced Network Operations
8. GPRS-BSS101 : PCU Operational Theory
9. GPRS-SYS102 : BSS (GPRS) Database
10.GSM-SYS04 : Introduction to BSS Planning and Dimensioning
11.GPRS-SYS104 : BSS (GPRS) Planning
12.GSM-NET03 : Network Performance
13.GPRS-NET103 : BSS (GPRS) Network Performance
14.GSM-SYS01 : GSM Interfaces and Protocols
15.GPRS-SYS101 : GPRS Interfaces and Protocols

Options
None.

Timing
After the attendance of the GPRS-SYS102 : BSS (GPRS) Database course 6 months work experience
should be undertaken before attending GSM-SYS04 : Introduction to BSS Planning and Dimensioning, GPRSSYS104 : BSS (GPRS) Planning, GSM-NET03 : Network Performance and GPRS-NET103 : BSS (GPRS) Network
Performance. 18 months work experience should be completed before attending GSM-SYS01 : GSM
Interfaces and Protocols and GPRS-SYS101 : GPRS Interfaces and Protocols.

Work Experience Objectives


The work experience required to undertake and fully appreciate the more advanced training
necessary to fulfill the role of Network Administrator is as follows:

January 2002

Use the OMC-R to perform major reconfiguration changes to the network for GPRS
Use the OMC-R to add GPRS elements to the network
Configure the OMC-R map for ease of use by Basic Network Operators
Use the OMC-R to equip all BSS (GPRS) network devices, functions and algorithms

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

77

BSS (GPRS) Network Planner


Jobset Description
The BSS (GPRS) Network Planner skill set can be gained through attending the mandatory courses
GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular, GPRS-CP07 : Introduction to GPRS, GSM-BSS11 : BSS Operational Theory,
GPRS-BSS101 : PCU Operational Theory, GSM-SYS02 : Introduction to BSS Database, GPRS-SYS102 : BSS (GPRS)
Database, GSM-SYS04 : Introduction to BSS Planning and Dimensioning and GPRS-SYS104 : BSS (GPRS) Planning,
and is responsible for tasks including:

GPRS Cell planning


Equipment and network planning for GPRS

Curriculum Path
1. GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular
2. GPRS-CP07 : Introduction to GPRS
3. GSM-BSS11 : BSS Operational Theory
4. GPRS-BSS101 : PCU Operational Theory
5. GSM-SYS02 : Introduction to BSS Database
6. GPRS-SYS102 : BSS (GPRS) Database
7. GSM-SYS04 : Introduction to BSS Planning and Dimensioning
8. GPRS-SYS104 : BSS (GPRS) Planning
9. GSM-NET03 : Network Performance (optional)
10.GPRS-NET103 : BSS (GPRS) Network Performance (optional)

Options
GSM-NET03 : Network Performance and GPRS-NET103 : BSS (GPRS) Network Performance give the BSS
(GPRS) Network Planner information about the statistics required to make planning adjustments to
an operational network.

Timing
For a new network, the Network Planning Engineer should complete all mandatory courses before
the GPRS network becomes operational. The GSM-NET03 : Network Performance and GPRS-NET103 : BSS
(GPRS) Network Performance should be completed within 18 months of the GPRS network launch.

78

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

BSS (GPRS) Database Engineer


Jobset Description
The BSS (GPRS) Database Engineer skill set can be gained through attending the mandatory
courses GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular, GPRS-CP07 : Introduction to GPRS, GSM-BSS11 : BSS
Operational Theory, GPRS-BSS101 : PCU Operational Theory, GSM-SYS02 : Introduction to BSS Database and
GPRS-SYS102 : BSS (GPRS) Database, and is responsible for tasks including:

Constructing databases
Implementing and testing databases

Curriculum Path
1. GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular
2. GPRS-CP07 : Introduction to GPRS
3. GSM-BSS11 : BSS Operational Theory
4. GPRS-BSS101 : PCU Operational Theory
5. GSM-SYS02 : Introduction to BSS Database
6. GPRS-SYS102 : BSS (GPRS) Database
7. GSM-SYS04 : Introduction to BSS Planning and Dimensioning
8. GPRS-SYS104 : BSS (GPRS) Planning
9. GSM-NET03 : Network Performance
10.GPRS-NET103 : BSS (GPRS) Network Performance
11.GSM-SYS01 : GSM Interfaces and Protocols
12.GPRS-SYS101 : GPRS Interfaces and Protocols

Options
GSM-SYS04 : Introduction to BSS Planning and Dimensioning and GPRS-SYS104 : BSS (GPRS) Planning will add to
the Database Engineers knowledge in understanding the configuration of some database
parameters. GSM-NET03 : Network Performance and GPRS-NET103 : BSS (GPRS) Network Performance gives
the Database Engineer the information on statistics that will help determine database parameters.
GSM-SYS01 : GSM Interfaces and Protocols and GPRS-SYS101 : GPRS Interfaces and Protocols gives the
Database Engineer a detailed insight into the operation of the interfaces in GSM and GPRS and will
assist in understanding the parameters associated with maintaining and operating these links.

Timing
For a new network, Database Engineers should complete all mandatory courses before the network
becomes operational. All optional courses should be completed within 18 months of network launch

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

79

BSS (GPRS) Optimization Engineer


Jobset Description
The BSS (GPRS) Optimization Engineer skill set can be gained through attending the mandatory
courses GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular, GPRS-CP07 : Introduction to GPRS, GSM-BSS11 : BSS
Operational Theory, GPRS-BSS101 : PCU Operational Theory, GSM-SYS02 : Introduction to BSS Database, GPRSSYS102 : BSS (GPRS) Database, GSM-NET03 : Network Performance, GPRS-NET103 : BSS (GPRS) Network
Performance, GSM-SYS01 : GSM Interfaces and Protocols and GPRS-SYS101 : GPRS Interfaces and Protocols, and
will be responsible for tasks including:

Implementing planned improvements including air interface optimization


Troubleshooting BSS (GPRS) related network problems

Curriculum Path
1. GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular
2. GPRS-CP07 : Introduction to GPRS
3. GSM-BSS11 : BSS Operational Theory
4. GPRS-BSS101 : PCU Operational Theory
5. GSM-SYS02 : Introduction to BSS Database
6. GPRS-SYS102 : BSS (GPRS) Database
7. GSM-NET03 : Network Performance
8. GPRS-NET103 : BSS (GPRS) Network Performance
9. GSM-SYS01 : GSM Interfaces and Protocols
10.GPRS-SYS101 : GPRS Interfaces and Protocols

Options
None.

Timing
The training programme for this type of engineer should be seen as a long term commitment, the
training courses should be interspersed with periods of work experience. For a new network the
BSS (GPRS) Optimization Engineer should complete the GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular, GPRSCP07 : Introduction to GPRS, GSM-BSS11 : BSS Operational Theory, GPRS-BSS101 : PCU Operational Theory, GSMSYS02 : Introduction to BSS Database and GPRS-SYS102 : BSS (GPRS) Database courses before the GPRS
network launch. The GSM-NET03 : Network Performance, GPRS-NET103 : BSS (GPRS) Network Performance,
GSM-SYS01 : GSM Interfaces and Protocols and GPRS-SYS101 : GPRS Interfaces and Protocols courses should
be completed within 18 months of the GPRS network launch.

80

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

BSS (GPRS) Commissioning and Maintenance Engineer


Jobset Description
The BSS (GPRS) Commissioning and Maintenance Engineer skill set can be gained through
attending the mandatory courses GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular, GPRS-CP07 : Introduction to GPRS,
GSM-BSS11 : BSS Operational Theory and GPRS-BSS101 : PCU Operational Theory, and will be responsible for
tasks including:

Installing and Commissioning PCU elements


Performing routine maintenance tasks
Diagnosing equipment problems to a board or cable level

Curriculum Path
1.
2.
3.
4.

GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular


GPRS-CP07 : Introduction to GPRS
GSM-BSS11 : BSS Operational Theory
GPRS-BSS101 : PCU Operational Theory

Options:
None.

Timing
Engineers should complete these courses before the GPRS network becomes operational.

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

81

GSN Network Operator


Jobset description
The GSN Network Operator jobset incorporates tasks that an operator will carry out in the daily
operation of GSN nodes. The GSN Network Operator skill set can be gained through attending the
mandatory courses GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular, GPRS-CP07 : Introduction to GPRS, GPRS-GSN101
: GPRS CommHub, GPRS-GSN102 : GSN Complex Installation, GPRS-GSN103 : Gateway GPRS Support Node and
GPRS-NET101 : OMC-G Network Operations, and will be responsible for tasks including:

Using the OMC-G to monitor the GSN network health


Using the OMC-G as a tool for troubleshooting faulty GSN devices
Using the OMC-G to configure GSN elements
Using the OMC-G to download new software and databases to GSN nodes
Using the OMC-G to generate statistical reports

Curriculum Path
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular


GPRS-CP07 : Introduction to GPRS
GPRS-GSN101 : GPRS CommHub
GPRS-GSN102 : GSN Complex Installation
GPRS-GSN103 : Gateway GPRS Support Node
GPRS-NET101 : OMC-G Network Operations

Options
None

Timing
Whilst work experience is beneficial, all courses should be taken in the order shown at the students
convenience.

82

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

GSN Network Administrator


Jobset Description
The GSN Network Administrator is a highly trained engineer capable of carrying out many and
varied tasks in addition to those of the Advanced Network Operator. The GSN Network
Administrator skill set can be gained through attending the mandatory courses GSM-CP02 : Introduction
to GSM Cellular, GPRS-CP07 : Introduction to GPRS, GPRS-GSN101 : GPRS CommHub, GPRS-GSN102 : GSN
Complex Installation, GPRS-GSN103 : Gateway GPRS Support Node, GPRS-SYS115 : GSN Planning, GPRS-NET101 :
OMC-G Network Operations, GEN-CP03 : Introduction to SS7 Signaling and GPRS-SYS116 : SF Database, and will
be responsible for tasks including:

Configuring a node using all methods


Identifying and solving network problems
Analyzing statistics to identify problem areas and suggesting solutions
Planning and modifying network configurations

Curriculum Path
1. GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular
2. GPRS-CP07 : Introduction to GPRS
3. GPRS-GSN101 : GPRS CommHub
4. GPRS-GSN102 : GSN Complex Installation
5. GPRS-GSN103 : Gateway GPRS Support Node
6. GPRS-SYS115 : GSN Planning
7. GPRS-NET101 : OMC-G Network Operations
8. GEN-CP03 : Introduction to SS7 Signaling
9. GPRS-SYS116 : SF Database
10.GPRS-NET106 : IP Security (optional)

Options
GPRS-NET106 : IP Security. This course will give the Network Administrator the additional skills to
implement a security policy within the GPRS network.

Timing
Depending on the level of Motorola support all mandatory courses should be completed before the
GPRS network launch.

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

83

GSN Network Planner


Jobset description
A GSN Network Planner is responsible for the planning required to provision a GSN system. The
GSN Network Planner skill set can be gained through attending the mandatory courses GSM-CP02 :
Introduction to GSM Cellular, GPRS-CP07 : Introduction to GPRS, GPRS-GSN101 : GPRS CommHub, GPRS-GSN102
: GSN Complex Installation, GPRS-GSN103 : Gateway GPRS Support Node and GPRS-SYS115 : GSN Planning, and
will be responsible for tasks including:

Planning hardware configurations to meet traffic capacity requirements


Planning link capacity
Planning network topology and connectivity
Determining certain system parameters
Calculating redundancy where required
Using available statistical information when re-planning

Curriculum Path
1. GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular
2. GPRS-CP07 : Introduction to GPRS
3. GPRS-GSN101 : GPRS CommHub
4. GPRS-GSN102 : GSN Complex Installation
5. GPRS-GSN103 : Gateway GPRS Support Node
6. GPRS-SYS115 : GSN Planning
7. GPRS-NET101 : OMC-G Network Operations (optional)
8. GEN-CP03 : Introduction to SS7 Signaling (optional)
9. GPRS-SYS116 : SF Database (optional)
10.GPRS-NET106 : IP Security (optional)

Options
GPRS-NET101 : OMC-G Network Operations will give the student the additional skills required to operate
the OMC-G. GEN-CP03 : Introduction to SS7 Signaling and GPRS-SYS116 : SF Database provide information
on the SS7 signalling information. GPRS-NET106 : IP Security gives the GSN Network Planner
information on security that can be incorporated into the planning process.

Timing
The level and duration of Motorola support will dictate the speed at which this jobset stream is
completed. The complete stream should be achieved in preparation for the first major expansion.
For a new network, the Network Planner should have completed all mandatory courses before the
Network becomes operational.

84

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

GSN Optimization Engineer


Jobset Description
A GSN Optimization Engineer skill set can be gained through attending the mandatory courses GSMCP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular, GPRS-CP07 : Introduction to GPRS, GPRS-GSN101 : GPRS CommHub, GPRSGSN102 : GSN Complex Installation, GPRS-GSN103 : Gateway GPRS Support Node, GPRS-NET101 : OMC-G Network
Operations, GPRS-NET106 : IP Security, GEN-CP03 : Introduction to SS7 Signaling, GPRS-SYS116 : SF Database,
GSM-SYS01 : GSM Interfaces and Protocols and GPRS-SYS101 : GPRS Interfaces and Protocols, and will be
responsible for tasks including:

Implementation of planned network enhancements


Troubleshooting GSN related network problems
Propose enhancements to support improved network functionality
Correct and meaningful interpretation of network statistics
Link optimization
GSN database modifications
Investigation and diagnosis of complex network problems

Curriculum Path
1. GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular
2. GPRS-CP07 : Introduction to GPRS
3. GPRS-GSN101 : GPRS CommHub
4. GPRS-GSN102 : GSN Complex Installation
5. GPRS-GSN103 : Gateway GPRS Support Node
6. GPRS-NET101 : OMC-G Network Operations
7. GPRS-NET106 : IP Security
8. GEN-CP03 : Introduction to SS7 Signaling
9. GPRS-SYS116 : SF Database
10.GSM-SYS01 : GSM Interfaces and Protocols
11.GPRS-SYS101 : GPRS Interfaces and Protocols

Options
None.

Timing
The training programme for this type of engineer should be seen as a long term commitment. The
training courses should be interspersed with periods of work experience to provide maximum
benefit.
The timing can be accelerated depending on the previous experience of the engineer and the level
and duration of Motorola support provided.
For a new network, the GSN Optimization Engineer should complete the GSM-CP02 : Introduction to
GSM Cellular, GPRS-CP07 : Introduction to GPRS, GPRS-GSN101 : GPRS CommHub, GPRS-GSN102 : GSN Complex
Installation, GPRS-GSN103 : Gateway GPRS Support Node, GPRS-NET101 : OMC-G Network Operations, GPRSNET106 : IP Security, GEN-CP03 : Introduction to SS7 Signaling and GPRS-SYS116 : SF Database courses before
the network becomes operational. GSM-SYS01 : GSM Interfaces and Protocols and GPRS-SYS101 : GPRS
Interfaces and Protocols should be completed within 18 months of network launch.

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

85

GSN Commissioning and Maintenance Engineer


Jobset Description
The GSN Commissioning and Maintenance Engineer skill set can be gained through attending the
mandatory courses GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular, GPRS-CP07 : Introduction to GPRS, GPRS-GSN101
: GPRS CommHub, GPRS-GSN102 : GSN Complex Installation, GPRS-GSN103 : Gateway GPRS Support Node,
GPRS-NET101 : OMC-G Network Operations, GEN-CP03 : Introduction to SS7 Signaling and GPRS-SYS116 : SF
Database, and will be responsible for tasks including:

Installing and commissioning GSN equipment


Carrying out basic fault finding to board level
Making limited database adjustments

Curriculum Path
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular


GPRS-CP07 : Introduction to GPRS
GPRS-GSN101 : GPRS CommHub
GPRS-GSN102 : GSN Complex Installation
GPRS-GSN103 : Gateway GPRS Support Node
GPRS-NET101 : OMC-G Network Operations
GEN-CP03 : Introduction to SS7 Signaling
GPRS-SYS116 : SF Database

Options
None.

Timing
After completing these courses it is advisable for the student to undergo a short period (three
months is recommended) of on the job training with a more experienced engineer, in order to gain
an appreciation and understanding of local specific details. For a new network, all Commissioning
and Maintenance Engineers should have completed these courses before independently attempting
to install GSN equipment. The urgency of this requirement will depend on the level of Motorola
support to be provided.

86

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

ISS System Administrator


Jobset Description
The ISS System Administrator is responsible for the administration of the Sun Cluster and the ISS
applications running on it. The ISS System Administrator skill set can be gained through attending
the mandatory courses GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular, GPRS-CP07 : Introduction to GPRS, GPRSGSN101 : GPRS CommHub, Sun Solaris System Admin Parts 1 and 2, GPRS-GSN104 : Sun Enterprise Cluster
and GPRS-GSN105 : ISS Applications, and is responsible for tasks including:

Configuring the Charging Gateway


Determining Sun Cluster and ISS status
Interpreting and resolving ISS alarms
Interpreting all ISS commands and responses available for system administration

Curriculum Path
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular


GPRS-CP07 : Introduction to GPRS
GPRS-GSN101 : GPRS CommHub
Sun Solaris System Admin, Pts. 1 & 2.
GPRS-GSN104 : Sun Enterprise Cluster
GPRS-GSN105 : ISS Applications

Options
None.

Timing
Each Sun Solaris System Administration course is a 5-day, instructor-led course. They must be
completed before attending the GPRS-GSN104 : Sun Enterprise Cluster. These courses are available
directly from Sun Educational Services, or alternatively as a buyout option arranged through
Motorola Training.
For a new network an ISS System Administrator should complete all courses before the network
becomes operational. The urgency will depend on the level of Motorola support to be provided.

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

87

OMC-G System Administrator


Jobset Description
The OMC-G System Administrator is responsible for ensuring that the OMC-G is functioning at peak
performance. The OMC-G System Administrator skill set can be gained through attending the
mandatory courses GEN-CP04 : UNIX for OMC Users, GSM-OMC03 : OMC-R System Administration (E3x00
Platform), OMC-G103 or equivalent (this course is available through Motorola training on a buyout
only basis) and GPRS-OMC-G105 : OMC-G System Administration, and is responsible for tasks including:

Administering user accounts


Configuration of cron jobs
Ascertaining the status of Bull Openmaster
Viewing log files

Curriculum Path
1.
2.
3.
4.

GEN-CP04 : UNIX for OMC Users


GSM-OMC03 : OMC-R System Administration (E3x00 Platform)
GEN-OMC-G103 : Windows NT4.0 Core Technologies
GPRS-OMC-G105 : OMC-G System Administration

Options
None.

Timing
For a new network, a Systems Administrator should complete all courses before the OMC-G
becomes operational. The urgency will depend on the level of Motorola support to be provided.

88

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

Cell Site BTS

Analog Technicians................................................................................................................................................ 90
Digital (CDMA, PCS) Technicians ......................................................................................................................... 91
Digital SC4812T (CDMA) (Trunked) BTS Operation for Technicians ................................................................ 92
Digital SC4812ET (CDMA) (Trunked) BTS Operation for Technicians .............................................................. 93
Digital SC4812ET Lite (CDMA) (Trunked) BTS Operation for Technicians ....................................................... 94
Digital SC614 (CDMA) BTS Operation for Technicians LAC Only.................................................................. 95
Digital SC614T (CDMA) BTS Operation for Technicians ................................................................................... 96
Analog SC 9600 (SAS) BTS Operation for Technicians .................................................................................... 97
Digital SC9600 (CDMA) BTS Operation for Technicians ................................................................................... 98

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

89

Analog Technicians
Jobset Description
This curriculum is designed for people who require a technical overview and functional description
of a Motorola-based analog cellular telephone system.

Curriculum Path
1. ANA-GNL020 : Analog Cellular Overview Companion CD-ROM
2. ANA-GNL030 : Analog Cellular Systems Overview

Options
None.

Timing
It is advisable for students to attend ANA-GNL030 : Analog Cellular Systems Overview within two weeks of
completing ANA-GNL020 : Analog Cellular Overview Companion CD-ROM.

Work Experience Objectives


Upon completion of the course, students will:

90

Identify the subsystems of an analog cellular system.


Describe the interface between the subsystems.
Describe the cellular call process flow.

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

Digital (CDMA, PCS) Technicians


Jobset Description
This curriculum is designed for people who require a technical overview and functional description
of a Motorola-based digital cellular telephone system. The primary audience includes Switch
Technicians, Cellular Field Engineers, and operations of CDMA equipment. Secondary audiences
may include Network Administrators, entry-level Systems Engineers or Development Engineers,
and Product Managers.

Curriculum Path
1. CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM
2. CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)

Options
None.

Timing
It is advisable for students to attend CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA) within two
weeks of completing CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM.

Work Experience Objectives


Upon completion of the course, students will:

January 2002

Identify the subsystems of a digital CDMA cellular system.


Describe the functionality of the subsystems.
Describe the cellular call process flow.

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

91

Digital SC4812T (CDMA) (Trunked) BTS Operation for


Technicians
Jobset Description
This curriculum is designed for people involved with the optimization and maintenance of the SC
4812T BTS. It describes the subsystems, functionality, and operation of the SC 4812T Base
Transceiver Station (BTS) for Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA).
This curriculum provides students with hands-on laboratory activities that allow them to perform
optimization, calibration, and Acceptance Test Procedures (ATPs) on the SC 4812T BTS.

Curriculum Path
1.
2.
3.
4.

CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM


CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
CDMA-BTS710 : SC 4812T Base Transceiver Station (CDMA) (Trunked)
CDMA-PER400 : LMF for Windows Operations (CDMA)

Options
For additional CDMA LMF training, students may take CDMA-PER400 : LMF for Windows Operations
(CDMA).

Timing
This curriculum can be completed in a short period of time. Courses can be completed within two
weeks of each other.

Work Experience Objectives


Upon completion of the course, students will:

92

Be able to perform optimization, calibration, ATP tests, and troubleshooting on the SC 4812T
BTS.
Refer to the course description CDMA-BTS710 : SC 4812T Base Transceiver Station (CDMA) (Trunked) for
additional learning objectives.

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

Digital SC4812ET (CDMA) (Trunked) BTS Operation for


Technicians
Jobset Description
This curriculum is designed for people involved with the optimization and maintenance of the SC
4812ET BTS. It describes the subsystems, functionality, and operation of the SC 4812ET Base
Transceiver Station (BTS) for Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA).
This curriculum provides students with hands-on laboratory activities that allow them to perform
optimization, calibration, and Acceptance Test Procedures (ATP) on the SC 4812ET BTS.

Curriculum Path
1.
2.
3.
4.

CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM


CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
CDMA-BTS610 : SC 4812ET Base Transceiver Station (CDMA) (Trunked)
CDMA-PER400 : LMF for Windows Operations (CDMA)

Options
For additional CDMA LMF training, students may take CDMA-PER400 : LMF for Windows Operations
(CDMA).

Timing
This curriculum can be completed within a short period of time. Courses can be completed within
two weeks of each other.

Work Experience Objectives


Upon completion of the course, students will:

January 2002

Be able to perform optimization, calibration, ATP tests, and troubleshooting on the SC 4812ET
CDMA BTS.
Refer to the course description CDMA-BTS610 : SC 4812ET Base Transceiver Station (CDMA) (Trunked)
for additional learning objectives.

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

93

Digital SC4812ET Lite (CDMA) (Trunked) BTS Operation


for Technicians
Jobset Description
This curriculum is designed for people involved with the optimization and maintenance of the SC
4812ET Lite BTS. It describes the subsystems, functionality, and operation of the SC 4812ET Lite
Base Transceiver Station (BTS) for Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA).
This curriculum provides students with hands-on laboratory activities that allow them to perform
optimization, calibration, and Acceptance Test Procedures (ATP) on the SC 4812ET Lite BTS.

Curriculum Path
1.
2.
3.
4.

CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM


CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
CDMA-BTS810 : SC 4812ET LITE Base Transceiver Station (CDMA) (Trunked)
CDMA-PER400 : LMF for Windows Operations (CDMA)

Options
For additional CDMA LMF training, students may take CDMA-PER400 : LMF for Windows Operations
(CDMA).

Timing
This curriculum can be completed within a short period of time. Courses can be completed within
two weeks of each other.

Work Experience Objectives


Upon completion of the course, students will:

94

Be able to perform optimization, calibration, ATP tests, and troubleshooting on the SC 4812ET
Lite CDMA BTS.
Refer to the course description CDMA-BTS810 : SC 4812ET LITE Base Transceiver Station (CDMA)
(Trunked) for additional learning objectives.

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

Digital SC614 (CDMA) BTS Operation for Technicians


LAC Only
Jobset Description
This curriculum is designed for people involved with the optimization and maintenance of the SC
614 CDMA BTS. It describes the subsystems, functionality, and operation of the SC 614 Base
Transceiver Station (BTS) for Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA).
This curriculum provides students with hands-on laboratory activities that allow them to perform
optimization, calibration, and Acceptance Test Procedures (ATP) on the SC 614 (CDMA) BTS.
This curriculum is offered in the Latin America and Caribbean (LAC) Motorola Training facilities only.

Curriculum Path
1. CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM
2. CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
3. GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals (or GEN-GNL010 : UNIX Commands Applied to Motorola's
Networkc LAC only)
4. CDMA-BTS440 : SC 614 Base Transceiver Station (CDMA) LAC only
5. CDMA-PER400 : LMF for Windows Operations (CDMA)

Options
None.

Timing
This curriculum can be completed within a fairly short period of time. Courses can be completed
within two weeks of each other.

Work Experience Objectives


Upon completion of the course, students will:

January 2002

Be able to perform optimization, calibration and ATP tests on the SC 614 (CDMA) BTS
Refer to the course description CDMA-BTS440 : SC 614 Base Transceiver Station (CDMA) for additional
learning objectives.

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

95

Digital SC614T (CDMA) BTS Operation for Technicians


Jobset Description
This curriculum is designed for people involved with the calibration, optimization, maintenance,
acceptance test, and troubleshooting procedures for the SC 614T CDMA BTS. It provides a
functional description of the SC 614T (CDMA) Base Transceiver Station (BTS). Test procedures
are introduced to enable the student to perform optimization and ATP testing of the SC 614T
(CDMA) BTS. Procedures for field replaceable unit (FRU) removal and installation and
troubleshooting are covered.

Curriculum Path
1.
2.
3.
4.

CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM


CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
CDMA-BTS840 : SC 614T Base Transceiver Station (CDMA)
CDMA-PER400 : LMF for Windows Operations (CDMA)

Options
For additional CDMA LMF training, students may take CDMA-PER400 : LMF for Windows Operations
(CDMA).

Timing
This curriculum can be completed within a short period of time. Courses can be completed within
two weeks of each other.

Work Experience Objectives


Upon completion of the course, students will:

96

Be able to perform optimization, calibration and ATP tests on the SC 614T CDMA BTS.
Refer to the course description CDMA-BTS840 : SC 614T Base Transceiver Station (CDMA) for additional
learning objectives.

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

Analog SC 9600 (SAS) BTS Operation for Technicians


Jobset Description
This curriculum is designed for people involved with the optimization and maintenance of the SC
SAS 9600 BTS. It provides a description of the subsystems, functionality, and operation of the SC
9600 Base Transceiver Station (BTS) in a Stand-alone Analog System (SAS).
This curriculum provides students with hands-on laboratory activities that allow them to perform
optimization, calibration, and Acceptance Test Procedures (ATP) on the SC 9600 SAS BTS.

Curriculum Path
1. ANA-GNL020 : Analog Cellular Overview Companion CD-ROM
2. ANA-GNL030 : Analog Cellular Systems Overview
3. GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals (or GEN-GNL010 : UNIX Commands Applied to Motorola's
Network LAC only)
4. ANA-BTS110 : SC 9600 Base Transceiver Station for Stand-Alone Analog Systems
5. CDMA-PER400 : LMF for Windows Operations (CDMA)

Options
In LAC Only: students may take GEN-GNL010 : UNIX Commands Applied to Motorola's Network instead of
GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals.

Timing
This curriculum can be completed within a fairly short period of time. Courses can be completed
within two weeks of each other. Depending upon their work experience, students may want to gain
one month of on-the-job training prior to taking GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals.

Work Experience Objectives


Upon completion of the course, students will:

January 2002

Be able to perform optimization, calibration and ATP tests on the SC 9600 SAS BTS.
Refer to the course description ANA-BTS110 : SC 9600 Base Transceiver Station for Stand-Alone Analog
Systems for additional learning objectives.

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

97

Digital SC9600 (CDMA) BTS Operation for Technicians


Jobset Description
This curriculum is designed for people involved with the optimization and maintenance of the SC
9600 CDMA BTS. It describes the subsystems, functionality, and operation of the SC 9600 Base
Transceiver Station (BTS) for Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA).
This curriculum provides students with hands-on laboratory activities that allow them to perform
optimization, calibration, and Acceptance Test Procedures (ATP) on the SC 9600 (CDMA) BTS.

Curriculum Path
1.
2.
3.
4.

CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM


CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
CDMA-BTS120 : SC 9600 Base Transceiver Station (CDMA)
CDMA-PER400 : LMF for Windows Operations (CDMA)

Options
For additional CDMA LMF training, students may take CDMA-PER400 : LMF for Windows Operations
(CDMA).

Timing
This curriculum can be completed within a fairly short period of time. Courses can be completed
within two weeks of each other.

Work Experience Objectives


Upon completion of the course, students will:

98

Be able to perform optimization, calibration and ATP tests on the SC 9600 (CDMA) BTS.
Refer to the course description CDMA-BTS120 : SC 9600 Base Transceiver Station (CDMA) for additional
learning objectives.

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

Switch
EMX2500 Overview .......................................................................................................................................... 100
EMX5000 Overview .......................................................................................................................................... 101
EMX Operation and Maintenance for Analog Technicians................................................................................ 102
EMX Operation and Maintenance for Digital Technicians................................................................................. 104
(Analog) SS7/C7 Common Channeling Signal .................................................................................................... 106
(CDMA) SS7/C7 Common Channeling Signal..................................................................................................... 107
(Analog) CCS/SS7 Implementation ..................................................................................................................... 108
(CDMA) CCS/SS7 Common Channeling Signal.................................................................................................. 109
(Analog) CCS/C7 Implementation........................................................................................................................ 110
(CDMA) CCS/C7 Implementation ........................................................................................................................ 111
(Analog) EMX-V Installation, Operation and Maintenance................................................................................ 112
(CDMA) EMX-V Installation, Operation and Maintenance ................................................................................ 113
(Analog) EMX-V Translations............................................................................................................................ 114
(CDMA) EMX-V Translations ............................................................................................................................ 115
EMX International Translations ......................................................................................................................... 116
(Analog) CALEA Wiretap Network Implementation ............................................................................................. 117
(CDMA) CALEA Wiretap Network Implementation .............................................................................................. 118
(Analog) CALEA Wiretap Network Operations and Maintenance........................................................................ 119
(CDMA) CALEA Wiretap Network Operations and Maintenance ........................................................................ 120
(Analog) EMX Operation and Maintenance for Traffic Engineers and Performance Engineers ....................... 121
(CDMA) EMX Operation and Maintenance for Traffic Engineers and Performance Engineers........................ 122

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

99

EMX2500 Overview
Jobset Description
This non-technical curriculum has been designed for personnel who need an overall understanding
of the EMX2500 Switching system.

Curriculum Path
1. ANA-GNL020 : Analog Cellular Overview Companion CD-ROM
2. ANA-GNL030 : Analog Cellular Systems Overview
3. ANA-SWT040 : EMX 2500 Overview

Options
For students that do not require in-depth systems knowledge, ANA-GNL030 : Analog Cellular Systems
Overview is optional.

Timing
ANA-GNL020 : Analog Cellular Overview Companion CD-ROM self-study course should be completed within
two weeks of ANA-GNL030 : Analog Cellular Systems Overview. ANA-GNL030 : Analog Cellular Systems Overview
should be completed within 30 days of ANA-SWT040 : EMX 2500 Overview.

Work Experience Objectives

100

Familiarity with the basic components, architecture, capabilities, and capacities of the
EMX2500 switch.
Understanding of the subsystem component functions, capabilities, and capacities of the
EMX2500 switch.

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

EMX5000 Overview
Jobset Description
This course is intended for persons who require an overall description of the EMX5000 switch as
well as the subsystem component functions, capabilities, and capacities of the EMX5000 switch.

Curriculum Path
1. CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM
2. CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
3. CDMA-SWT340 : EMX 5000 Overview

Options
None.

Timing
This entire curriculum path can be completed within four to six weeks. students should complete
CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM and CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
within two weeks of one another. students should attend CDMA-SWT340 : EMX 5000 Overview within
two weeks of completing CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM and CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product
Family Overview (CDMA). On-the-job experience is encouraged while completing the courses.

Work Experience Objectives


After completing the EMX5000 Overview students should be able to:

January 2002

Describe the primary functions of any EMX5000 subsystem and the physical attributes of each
frame.
Identify the capacities of a minimum and expansion configuration and the major blocks of the
alarm subsystem.
Interpret visual alarm displays and decode and interpret Information and Problem Reports
(IPRs).
Describe billing and statistical information generated by the EMX5000 including:
The devices necessary for Call Detail Record (CDR) generation and storage.
The relationship between Automatic Message Accounting (AMA) batch files and the billing file.
Traffic Metering and Measurement (TMM) data storage, the major TMM reporting systems, the
Man-Machine Interface (MMI) commands to display or distribute AMA/TMM data.
Tracing the call processing sequence for a mobile-to-land call.

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

101

EMX Operation and Maintenance for Analog Technicians


Jobset Description
This curriculum has two audiences. For the progression to CDMA-SWT150 : EMX Advanced, the
intended audience consists of customer technicians, support personnel, Motorola CFE's, and
engineers requiring advanced fault analysis and problem-resolution techniques. The intended
audience for SWT160 includes Cellular Field Engineers, Operations Managers, and On-site Switch
Operators.

Curriculum Path
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

ANA-GNL020 : Analog Cellular Overview Companion CD-ROM


ANA-GNL030 : Analog Cellular Systems Overview
CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling
CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance
CDMA-SWT150 : EMX Advanced
or
CDMA-SWT160 : DMX

Options
CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance is a three-week course and includes the same material
as the three one-week courses: CDMA-SWT110 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance (Week 1), CDMASWT120 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance (Week 2), CDMA-SWT130 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation &
Maintenance (Week 3). These three courses can be substituted if the student's time schedule does not
allow three consecutive weeks of classroom training.
Following completion of CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance and six months of work
experience, students can take either CDMA-SWT160 : DMX or CDMA-SWT160 : DMX. CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/
C7 Common Channel Signaling, though recommended, is optional if the student has significant work
experience.

Timing
ANA-GNL030 : Analog Cellular Systems Overview should be taken within two weeks of completing ANAGNL020 : Analog Cellular Overview Companion CD-ROMANA-GNL020 : Analog Cellular Overview Companion CD-ROM.
One month of work experience on the EMX5000 switch should be gained before taking CDMASWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance and six months experience is required before taking CDMASWT150 : EMX Advanced or CDMA-SWT160 : DMX. Prior to taking CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and
Maintenance, students should have a working knowledge of RF theory and communications
electronics.

102

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

EMX Operation and Maintenance for Analog Technicians


Work Experience Objectives
After completing CDMA-SWT160 : DMX: Ability to create, test and troubleshoot a DMX network
between two EMX switches, including:

defining the function of each hardware element required to establish a DMX connection between
two EMX2500's
designing a DMX configuration using all hardware elements required to connect two EMXs
the ability to Bit Error Rate Test (BERT) a data link
determining if a data link is clean
using an established testing procedure to determine if the DMX network can successfully
complete EMX to EMX hand-offs
given a basic configuration consisting of two EMX2500's, the ability to list the commands
needed to implement DMX
the ability to execute the commands necessary to install DMXing on our training switches
the ability to execute the commands from Section 4 on both of the EMX's that are being
DMX'ed together
the ability to list commands needed to implement DMX the ability to execute the commands
necessary to install DMXing

After completing CDMA-SWT150 : EMX Advanced: Ability to operate and maintain the EMX2500 and/
or EMX5000 switch system(s) with a higher or greater level of proficiency, as well as identify and
resolve some of the more unusual system anomalies, including:

January 2002

interpreting matrix failure IPR's


connecting the Debug cable and terminal to a processor, then executing basic Debug commands
performing an Initial Program Load
performing specified Debug operations
using Debug to examine and modify database elements

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

103

EMX Operation and Maintenance for Digital Technicians


Jobset Description
This curriculum has two audiences. For the progression to CDMA-SWT150 : EMX Advanced, the
intended audience consists of customer technicians, support personnel, Motorola CFE's, and
engineers requiring advanced fault analysis and problem-resolution techniques. The intended
audience for SWT160 includes Cellular Field Engineers, Operations Managers, and On-site Switch
Operators.

Curriculum Path
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM


CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling
CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance
CDMA-SWT150 : EMX Advanced
or
CDMA-SWT160 : DMX

Options
CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance is a three-week course and includes the same material
as the three one-week courses: CDMA-SWT110 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance (Week 1), CDMASWT120 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance (Week 2), CDMA-SWT130 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation &
Maintenance (Week 3). These three courses can be substituted if the student's time schedule does not
allow three consecutive weeks of classroom training.
Following completion of CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance and six months of work
experience, students can take either CDMA-SWT160 : DMX or CDMA-SWT160 : DMX. CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/
C7 Common Channel Signaling, though recommended, is optional if the student has significant work
experience.

Timing
CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA) should be taken within two weeks of completing
CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROMANA-GNL020 : Analog Cellular Overview Companion CD-ROM. One
month of work experience on the EMX5000 switch should be gained before taking CDMA-SWT450 :
EMX Operation and Maintenance and six months experience is required before taking CDMA-SWT150 :
EMX Advanced or CDMA-SWT160 : DMX. Prior to taking CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance,
students should have a working knowledge of RF theory and communications electronics.

104

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

EMX Operation and Maintenance for Digital Technicians


Work Experience Objectives
After completing CDMA-SWT160 : DMX: Ability to create, test and troubleshoot a DMX network
between two EMX switches, including:

defining the function of each hardware element required to establish a DMX connection between
two EMX2500's
designing a DMX configuration using all hardware elements required to connect two EMX's
the ability to Bit Error Rate Test (BERT) a data link
determining if a data link is clean
using an established testing procedure to determine if the DMX network can successfully
complete EMX to EMX hand-offs
given a basic configuration consisting of two EMX2500's, the ability to list the commands
needed to implement DMX
the ability to execute the commands necessary to install DMXing on our training switches
the ability to execute the commands from Section 4 on both of the EMX's that are being
DMX'ed together
the ability to list commands needed to implement DMX the ability to execute the commands
necessary to install DMXing

After completing CDMA-SWT150 : EMX Advanced: Ability to operate and maintain the EMX2500 and/
or EMX5000 switch system(s) with a higher or greater level of proficiency, as well as identify and
resolve some of the more unusual system anomalies, including:

January 2002

interpreting matrix failure IPR's


connecting the Debug cable and terminal to a processor, then executing basic Debug commands
performing an Initial Program Load
performing specified Debug operations
using Debug to examine and modify database elements

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

105

(Analog) SS7/C7 Common Channeling Signal


Jobset Description
SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling deals with basic understanding of SS7 and C7 signaling and
its associated protocols.

Curriculum Path
1. ANA-GNL020 : Analog Cellular Overview Companion CD-ROM
2. ANA-GNL030 : Analog Cellular Systems Overview
3. CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling

Options
None.

Timing
After completing ANA-GNL030 : Analog Cellular Systems Overview, students should gain one month of
experience before taking CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling.

Work Experience Objectives

106

Able to apply basic understanding of SS7 and C7 signaling.


Analyze a signaling network management messages, and network/link manager scenarios.
Identify user applications within the SS7/C7 network.

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

(CDMA) SS7/C7 Common Channeling Signal


Jobset Description
SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling deals with basic understanding of SS7 and C7 signaling and
its associated protocols.

Curriculum Path
1. CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM
2. CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
3. CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling

Options
None.

Timing
After completing CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA), students should gain one month of
experience before taking CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling.

Work Experience Objectives

January 2002

Able to apply basic understanding of SS7 and C7 signaling.


Analyze a signaling network management messages, and network/link manager scenarios.
Identify user applications within the SS7/C7 network.

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

107

(Analog) CCS/SS7 Implementation


Jobset Description
This curriculum is designed for Switch Technicians or System Managers responsible for operations,
data fills, systems operations, or troubleshooting on the EMX switch.

Curriculum Path
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

ANA-GNL020 : Analog Cellular Overview Companion CD-ROM


ANA-GNL030 : Analog Cellular Systems Overview
CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling
CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance
CDMA-SWT260 : CCS/SS7 Implementation

Options
CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance is a three-week course and includes the same material
as the following one-week series of courses: CDMA-SWT110 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance
(Week 1), CDMA-SWT120 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance (Week 2), CDMA-SWT130 : EMX 2500/5000
Operation & Maintenance (Week 3). These three courses can be substituted if the student's time schedule
does not allow three consecutive weeks of classroom training.
In LAC Only: CDMA-SWT270 : CCS/C7 Implementation is offered instead of CDMA-SWT260 : CCS/SS7
Implementation.

Timing
Students should complete the prerequisites within two weeks prior to CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7 Common
Channel Signaling and have gained a working knowledge of microprocessor and digital logic-based
systems, telephony, and communications electronics. students should gain approximately one
month of experience on the EMX switch before taking CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance
and CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance and one month of experience prior to taking CDMASWT260 : CCS/SS7 Implementation.

Work Experience Objectives

108

In-depth understanding of SS7/C7 protocol.


Plan SS7 into the EMX switch.
Optimize the SS7 subsystem and database management.
Maintain the EMX hardware and database for SS7.
Perform diagnostics tests on the databases for the SS7 network.
Knowledge of the major functions, components, and subsystems of the EMX switch.
Perform fault analysis and problem resolution.
Operate and maintain an EMX switching system.
Modify various databases for day-to-day operations.

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

(CDMA) CCS/SS7 Common Channeling Signal


Jobset Description
This curriculum is designed for Switch Technicians or System Managers responsible for operations,
data fills, systems operations, or troubleshooting on the EMX switch.

Curriculum Path
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM


CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling
CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance
CDMA-SWT260 : CCS/SS7 Implementation

Options
CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance is a three-week course and includes the same material
as the following one-week series of courses: CDMA-SWT110 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance
(Week 1), CDMA-SWT120 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance (Week 2), CDMA-SWT130 : EMX 2500/5000
Operation & Maintenance (Week 3). These three courses can be substituted if the student's time schedule
does not allow three consecutive weeks of classroom training.
In LAC Only: CDMA-SWT270 : CCS/C7 Implementation is offered instead of CDMA-SWT260 : CCS/SS7
Implementation.

Timing
Students should complete the prerequisites within two weeks prior to CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7 Common
Channel Signaling and have gained a working knowledge of microprocessor and digital logic-based
systems, telephony, and communications electronics. students should gain approximately one
month of experience on the EMX switch before taking CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance
and CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance and one month of experience prior to taking CDMASWT260 : CCS/SS7 Implementation.

Work Experience Objectives

January 2002

In-depth understanding of SS7/C7 protocol.


Plan SS7 into the EMX switch.
Optimize the SS7 subsystem and database management.
Maintain the EMX hardware and database for SS7.
Perform diagnostics tests on the databases for the SS7 network.
Knowledge of the major functions, components, and subsystems of the EMX switch.
Perform fault analysis and problem resolution.
Operate and maintain an EMX switching system.
Modify various databases for day-to-day operations.

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

109

(Analog) CCS/C7 Implementation


Jobset Description
This curriculum is designed for Switch Technicians or System Managers responsible for operations,
data fills, systems operations, or troubleshooting on the EMX switch.

Curriculum Path
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

ANA-GNL020 : Analog Cellular Overview Companion CD-ROM


ANA-GNL030 : Analog Cellular Systems Overview
CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling
CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance
CDMA-SWT270 : CCS/C7 Implementation (LAC only)

Options
CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance is a three-week course and includes the same material
as the following one-week series of courses: CDMA-SWT110 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance
(Week 1), CDMA-SWT120 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance (Week 2), CDMA-SWT130 : EMX 2500/5000
Operation & Maintenance (Week 3). These three courses can be substituted if the student's time schedule
does not allow three consecutive weeks of classroom training.
In LAC Only: CDMA-SWT270 : CCS/C7 Implementation is offered instead of CDMA-SWT260 : CCS/SS7
Implementation.

Timing
Students should complete the prerequisites within two weeks prior to CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7 Common
Channel Signaling and have gained a working knowledge of microprocessor and digital logic-based
systems, telephony, and communications electronics. students should gain approximately one
month of experience on the EMX switch before taking CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance
and CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance and one month of experience prior to taking CDMASWT260 : CCS/SS7 Implementation.

Work Experience Objectives

110

In-depth understanding of SS7/C7 protocol.


Plan SS7 into the EMX switch.
Optimize the SS7 subsystem and database management.
Maintain the EMX hardware and database for SS7.
Perform diagnostics tests on the databases for the SS7 network.
Knowledge of the major functions, components, and subsystems of the EMX2500 or
EMX5000 switch.
Perform fault analysis and problem resolution.
Operate and maintain an EMX2500 or EMX5000 switching system.
Modify various databases for day-to-day operations.

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

(CDMA) CCS/C7 Implementation


Jobset Description
This curriculum is designed for Switch Technicians or System Managers responsible for operations,
data fills, systems operations, or troubleshooting on the EMX switch.

Curriculum Path
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM


CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling
CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance
CDMA-SWT270 : CCS/C7 Implementation (LAC only)

Options
CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance is a three-week course and includes the same material
as the following one-week series of courses: CDMA-SWT110 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance
(Week 1), CDMA-SWT120 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance (Week 2), CDMA-SWT130 : EMX 2500/5000
Operation & Maintenance (Week 3). These three courses can be substituted if the student's time schedule
does not allow three consecutive weeks of classroom training.
In LAC Only: CDMA-SWT270 : CCS/C7 Implementation is offered instead of CDMA-SWT260 : CCS/SS7
Implementation.

Timing
Students should complete the prerequisites within two weeks prior to CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7 Common
Channel Signaling and have gained a working knowledge of microprocessor and digital logic-based
systems, telephony, and communications electronics. students should gain approximately one
month of experience on the EMX switch before taking CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance
and CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance and one month of experience prior to taking CDMASWT260 : CCS/SS7 Implementation.

Work Experience Objectives

January 2002

In-depth understanding of SS7/C7 protocol.


Plan SS7 into the EMX switch.
Optimize the SS7 subsystem and database management.
Maintain the EMX hardware and database for SS7.
Perform diagnostics tests on the databases for the SS7 network.
Knowledge of the major functions, components, and subsystems of the EMX2500 or EMX5000
switch.
Perform fault analysis and problem resolution.
Operate and maintain an EMX2500 or EMX5000 switching system.
Modify various databases for day-to-day operations.

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

111

(Analog) EMX-V Installation, Operation and Maintenance


Jobset Description
This curriculum path is designed for personnel responsible for the installation, operation, and
maintenance of the Electronic Mobile Exchange (EMX) switch with a Visitor Location Register
(EMX-V). students will review the hardware and will be introduced to the software, the database,
and operation of the EMX-V switch.

Curriculum Path
Students should have a working knowledge of RGF theory and communications electronics.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

ANA-GNL020 : Analog Cellular Overview Companion CD-ROM


ANA-GNL030 : Analog Cellular Systems Overview
CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling
CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance
CDMA-SWT370 : EMX-V Implementation/Migration

Options
Students will follow one of two curriculum paths, either digital or analog.

Timing
After completing the prerequisite courses and the operation and maintenance courses, students
should undergo a period of three months on the job training. It is advisable for the student to work
with a more experienced engineer to gain an appreciation and understanding of local site-specific
details.

Work Experience Objectives


Upon completion of this curriculum path you will be able to:

112

Install and expand the EMX-V switch hardware and software.


Perform VLR processor board database operations.
Interpret and trouble shoot diagnostic reports on the EMX-V switch.
Manage Traffic Metering and Measurements (TMM) data.
Analyze ANSI-41 standard messages.

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

(CDMA) EMX-V Installation, Operation and Maintenance


Jobset Description
This curriculum path is designed for personnel responsible for the installation, operation, and
maintenance of the Electronic Mobile Exchange (EMX) switch with a Visitor Location Register
(EMX-V). students will review the hardware and will be introduced to the software, the database,
and operation of the EMX-V switch.

Curriculum Path
Students should have a working knowledge of microprocessors, digital logic-based systems,
telephony, and communications electronics.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM


CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling
CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance
CDMA-SWT370 : EMX-V Implementation/Migration

Options
Students will follow one of two curriculum paths, either digital or analog.

Timing
After completing the prerequisite courses and the operation and maintenance courses, students
should undergo a period of three months on the job training. It is advisable for the student to work
with a more experienced engineer to gain an appreciation and understanding of local site-specific
details.

Work Experience Objectives


Upon completion of this curriculum path you will be able to:

January 2002

Install and expand the EMX-V switch hardware and software.


Perform VLR processor board database operations.
Interpret and trouble shoot diagnostic reports on the EMX-V switch.
Manage Traffic Metering and Measurements (TMM) data.
Analyze ANSI-41 standard messages.

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

113

(Analog) EMX-V Translations


Jobset Description
This curriculum is designed to assist Switch Technicians and System Engineers in understanding
the function and operation of an EMX-V switch. Limited on-the-job experience is required.

Maintain translation tables.


Create SS7 database and equip voice trunks.
Load EMX software (split or non-split mode).
Monitor system performance.
Perform (daily and occasional) Network administration.
Upgrade EMX software.

Curriculum Path
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

ANA-GNL020 : Analog Cellular Overview Companion CD-ROM


ANA-GNL030 : Analog Cellular Systems Overview
CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling
CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance
CDMA-SWT440 : EMX-V Translations

Options
CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance is a three-week course and includes the same material
as the three one-week courses: CDMA-SWT110 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance (Week 1), CDMASWT120 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance (Week 2), CDMA-SWT130 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation &
Maintenance (Week 3). These three courses can be substituted if the student's time schedule does not
allow three consecutive weeks of classroom training.

Timing
This curriculum path requires limited on-the-job training and can be completed within three to six
months depending upon the student's experience. students should gain at least one month of work
experience between CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance and CDMA-SWT440 : EMX-V
Translations. Prior to taking CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance students should have a
working knowledge of RF theory and communications electronics.

Work Experience Objectives


Upon completion of this curriculum path you will be able to:

114

Perform translation of dialed digits.


Modify an existing translator.
Perform translation of dialed digits, from an ANSI-41 and non-ANSI41 subscriber, in a mobile-toland call to determine the trunk group routing list and character string to out pulse to the Public
Switched Telephone Network.
Perform translation of the dialed digits in a land-to-mobile call to determine the actual characters
to use in the page message.
Modify an existing translator.

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

(CDMA) EMX-V Translations


Jobset Description
This curriculum is designed to assist Switch Technicians and System Engineers in understanding
the function and operation of an EMX-V switch. Limited on-the-job experience is required.

Maintain translation tables.


Create SS7 database and equip voice trunks.
Load EMX software (split or non-split mode).
Monitor system performance.
Perform (daily and occasional) Network administration.
Upgrade EMX software.

Curriculum Path
Students should have a working knowledge of microprocessors, digital logic-based systems,
telephony, and communications electronics.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM


CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling
CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance
CDMA-SWT440 : EMX-V Translations

Options
Students will follow either digital or analog curriculum paths. CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and
Maintenance is a three-week course and includes the same material as the three one-week courses:
CDMA-SWT110 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance (Week 1), CDMA-SWT120 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation
& Maintenance (Week 2), CDMA-SWT130 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance (Week 3). These three
courses can be substituted if the student's time schedule does not allow three consecutive weeks of
classroom training.

Timing
This curriculum path requires limited on-the-job training and can be completed within three to six
months depending upon the student's experience. students should gain at least one month of work
experience between CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance and CDMA-SWT440 : EMX-V
Translations.

Work Experience Objectives


Upon completion of this curriculum path you will be able to:

January 2002

Perform translation of dialed digits.


Modify an existing translator.
Perform translation of dialed digits, from an ANSI-41 and non-ANSI41 subscriber, in a mobile-toland call to determine the trunk group routing list and character string to out pulse to the Public
Switched Telephone Network.
Perform translation of the dialed digits in a land-to-mobile call to determine the actual characters
to use in the page message.
Modify an existing translator.

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

115

EMX International Translations


Jobset Description
Curriculum is designed for Switch Technicians and Systems Engineers involved in network planning
and Systems Engineers involved with implementation.

Curriculum Path
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

ANA-GNL020 : Analog Cellular Overview Companion CD-ROM


ANA-GNL030 : Analog Cellular Systems Overview
CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling and ANA-SWT040 : EMX 2500 Overview
CDMA-SWT110 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance (Week 1)
CDMA-SWT240 : EMX Translations (International)

Options
Students with less than six moths of planning or implementation experience should take CDMAGNL100 : SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling. students can choose either the ANA-SWT040 : EMX 2500
Overview 3 day course or the CDMA-SWT110 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance (Week 1) 5 day
course.

Timing
ANA-GNL030 : Analog Cellular Systems Overview should be completed within two weeks of beginning ANASWT040 : EMX 2500 Overview and CDMA-SWT110 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance (Week 1). It is not
advisable for the student to begin CDMA-SWT240 : EMX Translations (International) without three to six
months of work experience and prior telephony translations experience.

Work Experience Objectives

116

Explain mobile validation process and the results of both inward and outward translations.
Read the translations tables and determine the output of each, translate calls that use roamer
access dialing, exception routing, voice mail, external devices, and sector-of-origin routing.
Modify the appropriate tables to add a new area code or office code.

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

(Analog) CALEA Wiretap Network Implementation


Jobset Description
This curriculum path will provide students with the knowledge and skills to implement the CALEA
Wiretap Network in an analog cellular network.

Curriculum Path
Students should have a working knowledge of RF theory and communications electronics.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

ANA-GNL020 : Analog Cellular Overview Companion CD-ROM


ANA-GNL030 : Analog Cellular Systems Overview
CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling (optional)
CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance
GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals
GEN-NET200 : Sun Solaris Part 1: Basic Administration
CDMA-SWT260 : CCS/SS7 Implementation
CDMA-SWT370 : EMX-V Implementation/Migration
CDMA-PER280 : CALEA Wiretap Network Implementation

Options
CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling is optional on the analog curriculum path.
In LAC Only: students may take GEN-GNL010 : UNIX Commands Applied to Motorola's Network instead of
GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals and GEN-NET200 : Sun Solaris Part 1: Basic Administration and
CDMA-SWT270 : CCS/C7 Implementation instead of CDMA-SWT260 : CCS/SS7 Implementation.

Timing
This curriculum path can be completed within eighteen months. students should gain six months
work experience prior to GEN-NET200 : Sun Solaris Part 1: Basic Administration, and three months work
experience prior to each of the following courses; CDMA-SWT260 : CCS/SS7 Implementation, CDMASWT370 : EMX-V Implementation/Migration, and CDMA-PER280 : CALEA Wiretap Network Implementation.
For a new network, all Commissioning and Maintenance Engineers should have completed these
courses before independently attempting to install base site equipment.
A new engineer joining a cellular operator company should complete these courses before any
operational responsibility is undertaken.

Work Experience Objectives


Upon completion of this curriculum path you will be able to:

January 2002

Identify the roles of the components within the CALEA Network Architecture
Equip the SPR Hardware
Test SRP Hardware Connectivity
Install and configure the SRP software

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

117

(CDMA) CALEA Wiretap Network Implementation


Jobset Description
This curriculum path will provide students with the knowledge and skills to implement the CALEA
Wiretap Network in a CDMA cellular network.

Curriculum Path
Students should have a working knowledge of RF theory and communications electronics.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM


CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling (optional)
CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance
GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals
GEN-NET200 : Sun Solaris Part 1: Basic Administration
CDMA-SWT260 : CCS/SS7 Implementation
CDMA-SWT370 : EMX-V Implementation/Migration
CDMA-PER280 : CALEA Wiretap Network Implementation

Options
CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling is optional on the analog curriculum path.
In LAC Only: students may take GEN-GNL010 : UNIX Commands Applied to Motorola's Network instead of
GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals and GEN-NET200 : Sun Solaris Part 1: Basic Administration and
CDMA-SWT270 : CCS/C7 Implementation instead of CDMA-SWT260 : CCS/SS7 Implementation.

Timing
This curriculum path can be completed within eighteen months. students should gain six months
work experience prior to GEN-NET200 : Sun Solaris Part 1: Basic Administration, and three months work
experience prior to each of the following courses; CDMA-SWT260 : CCS/SS7 Implementation, CDMASWT370 : EMX-V Implementation/Migration, and CDMA-PER280 : CALEA Wiretap Network Implementation.
For a new network, all Commissioning and Maintenance Engineers should have completed these
courses before independently attempting to install base site equipment.
A new engineer joining a cellular operator company should complete these courses before any
operational responsibility is undertaken.

Work Experience Objectives


Upon completion of this curriculum path you will be able to:

118

Identify the roles of the components within the CALEA Network Architecture
Equip the SPR Hardware
Test SRP Hardware Connectivity
Install and configure the SRP software

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

(Analog) CALEA Wiretap Network Operations and


Maintenance
Jobset Description
This curriculum path is designed for persons who need the knowledge and skills to operate,
maintain, and troubleshoot the CALEA Wiretap network including data collection, backup and
recovery procedures, and daily operation and maintenance of the SRP and related architecture.

Curriculum Path
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

ANA-GNL020 : Analog Cellular Overview Companion CD-ROM


ANA-GNL030 : Analog Cellular Systems Overview
CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling
CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance
GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals
GEN-NET200 : Sun Solaris Part 1: Basic Administration
CDMA-SWT260 : CCS/SS7 Implementation
CDMA-SWT370 : EMX-V Implementation/Migration
CDMA-PER290 : CALEA Wiretap Network Operations and Maintenance

Options
It is suggested that students complete CDMA-SWT260 : CCS/SS7 Implementation and CDMA-SWT370 :
EMX-V Implementation/Migration prior to taking CDMA-PER290 : CALEA Wiretap Network Operations and
Maintenance.
In LAC Only: students may take GEN-GNL010 : UNIX Commands Applied to Motorola's Network instead of
GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals and GEN-NET200 : Sun Solaris Part 1: Basic Administration and
CDMA-SWT270 : CCS/C7 Implementation instead of CDMA-SWT260 : CCS/SS7 Implementation.

Timing
Students should gain four months of experience before attending CDMA-SWT260 : CCS/SS7
Implementation, and an additional four months of work experience prior to taking CDMA-SWT370 : EMXV Implementation/Migration. Additionally, students should acquire an additional six months of work
experience prior to CDMA-PER290 : CALEA Wiretap Network Operations and Maintenance. Prior to GEN-NET200
: Sun Solaris Part 1: Basic Administration students should complete GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User
Fundamentals and gain a minimum of six months of work experience.

Work Experience
Objectives Necessary knowledge and skills required to operate, maintain and troubleshoot the
CALEA Wiretap network, including:

January 2002

Performing Case provisioning.


Managing records via EMX.
Managing SRP statistical, call detailing or billing records.
Interfacing with Log Manager and Viewer.
Diagnosing and resolving system problems.

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

119

(CDMA) CALEA Wiretap Network Operations and


Maintenance
Jobset Description
This curriculum path is designed for persons who need the knowledge and skills to operate,
maintain, and troubleshoot the CALEA Wiretap network including data collection, backup and
recovery procedures, and daily operation and maintenance of the SRP and related architecture.

Curriculum Path
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM


CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling
CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance
GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals
GEN-NET200 : Sun Solaris Part 1: Basic Administration
CDMA-SWT260 : CCS/SS7 Implementation
CDMA-SWT370 : EMX-V Implementation/Migration
CDMA-PER290 : CALEA Wiretap Network Operations and Maintenance

Options
It is suggested that students complete CDMA-SWT260 : CCS/SS7 Implementation and CDMA-SWT370 :
EMX-V Implementation/Migration prior to taking CDMA-PER290 : CALEA Wiretap Network Operations and
Maintenance.
In LAC Only: students may take GEN-GNL010 : UNIX Commands Applied to Motorola's Network instead of
GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals and GEN-NET200 : Sun Solaris Part 1: Basic Administration and
CDMA-SWT270 : CCS/C7 Implementation instead of CDMA-SWT260 : CCS/SS7 Implementation.

Timing
Students should gain four months of experience before attending CDMA-SWT260 : CCS/SS7
Implementation, and an additional four months of work experience prior to taking CDMA-SWT370 : EMXV Implementation/Migration. Additionally, students should acquire an additional six months of work
experience prior to CDMA-PER290 : CALEA Wiretap Network Operations and Maintenance.
Prior to GEN-NET200 : Sun Solaris Part 1: Basic Administration students should complete GEN-NET100 : UNIX
Part 1: User Fundamentals and gain a minimum of six months of work experience.

Work Experience
Objectives Necessary knowledge and skills required to operate, maintain and troubleshoot the
CALEA Wiretap network, including:

120

Performing Case provisioning.


Managing records via EMX.
Managing SRP statistical, call detailing or billing records.
Interfacing with Log Manager and Viewer.
Diagnosing and resolving system problems.

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

(Analog) EMX Operation and Maintenance for Traffic


Engineers and Performance Engineers
Jobset Description
Traffic Engineers and Performance Engineers are responsible for a number of specialized tasks,
these include:

Daily operation and maintenance of EMX switching systems.


Performance monitoring of the EMX switch.
Determine system design requirements.
Noise floor testing.
Plan spectrum and frequency use.
Calculate link budget to determine system design assumptions.
Predict and optimize coverage from a path loss perspective.

Curriculum Path
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

ANA-GNL020 : Analog Cellular Overview Companion CD-ROM


ANA-GNL030 : Analog Cellular Systems Overview
CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling
CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance
CDMA-SWT180 : Managing Switch Performance and Growth

Options
CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance is a three-week course and includes the same material
as the following one-week series of courses: CDMA-SWT110 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance
(Week 1), CDMA-SWT120 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance (Week 2), CDMA-SWT130 : EMX 2500/5000
Operation & Maintenance (Week 3). These three courses can be substituted if the student's time schedule
does not allow three consecutive weeks of classroom training.

Timing
It is recommended that the self-paced courses be completed within two weeks of each other. Thirty
days of on-the-job training should be realized before beginning CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and
Maintenance and six months before taking CDMA-SWT180 : Managing Switch Performance and Growth.

Work Experience Objectives

January 2002

Ability to describe the basic components and capabilities of the EMX switch.
Ability to describe the major functions, components, and subsystems of the EMX switching
system.
Performance of some fault analysis and problem resolution.
Modification of various databases for day-to-day operations.
Ability to operate and maintain the hardware components of the EMX switch.
Identify switch loading in order to predict capacity, identify strategies for optimizing processor
utilization, develop a keen awareness and knowledge of factors involved in subscriber
forecasting and trending in order to project resource needs.

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

121

(CDMA) EMX Operation and Maintenance for Traffic


Engineers and Performance Engineers
Jobset Description
Traffic Engineers and Performance Engineers are responsible for a number of specialized tasks,
these include:

Daily operation and maintenance of EMX switching systems.


Performance monitoring of the EMX switch.
Determine system design requirements.
Noise floor testing.
Plan spectrum and frequency use.
Calculate link budget to determine system design assumptions.
Predict and optimize coverage from a path loss perspective.

Curriculum Path
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM


CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling
CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance
CDMA-SWT180 : Managing Switch Performance and Growth

Options
CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance is a three-week course and includes the same material
as the following one-week series of courses: CDMA-SWT110 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance
(Week 1), CDMA-SWT120 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance (Week 2), CDMA-SWT130 : EMX 2500/5000
Operation & Maintenance (Week 3). These three courses can be substituted if the student's time schedule
does not allow three consecutive weeks of classroom training.

Timing
It is recommended that the self-paced courses be completed within two weeks of each other. Thirty
days of on-the-job training should be realized before beginning CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and
Maintenance and six months before taking CDMA-SWT180 : Managing Switch Performance and Growth.

Work Experience Objectives

122

Ability to describe the basic components and capabilities of the EMX switch.
Ability to describe the major functions, components, and subsystems of the EMX switching
system.
Performance of some fault analysis and problem resolution.
Modification of various databases for day-to-day operations.
Ability to operate and maintain the hardware components of the EMX switch.
Identify switch loading in order to predict capacity, identify strategies for optimizing processor
utilization, develop a keen awareness and knowledge of factors involved in subscriber
forecasting and trending in order to project resource needs.

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

SwitchMATE
(Analog) SwitchMATE Operation and Administration........................................................................................ 124
(CDMA) SwitchMATE Operation and Administration ........................................................................................ 126

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

123

(Analog) SwitchMATE Operation and Administration


Jobset Description
Personnel involved with the day-to-day operation of SwitchMATE and SwitchMATE II for the
EMX switches. This curriculum is designed for personnel involved with the system administration
of the SwitchMATE intelligent message processor for the EMX switches.

Curriculum Path
Students should have a working knowledge of microprocessor and digital logic-based systems,
telephone, and communications electronics. Working knowledge of Windows 3.1, Windows95, or
Windows NT is also recommended.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

ANA-GNL020 : Analog Cellular Overview Companion CD-ROM


ANA-GNL030 : Analog Cellular Systems Overview
CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling
CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance
GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals
GEN-NET200 : Sun Solaris Part 1: Basic Administration
CDMA-PER140 : SwitchMATE and SwitchMATE II Operations

Options
CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance can be completed in one of the two following formats:
the three-week CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance course, or the CDMA-SWT110 : EMX 2500/
5000 Operation & Maintenance (Week 1), CDMA-SWT120 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance (Week 2),
CDMA-SWT130 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance (Week 3) series of courses, each of which is one
week in duration. The latter option is offered for students whose schedules do not allow for three
consecutive weeks of class participation.
GEN-NET200 : Sun Solaris Part 1: Basic Administration is optional. For students following the CDMA-SWT450 :
EMX Operation and Maintenance curriculum path who have more than six months of work experience,
CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling is not required.
In LAC Only: students may take GEN-GNL010 : UNIX Commands Applied to Motorola's Network instead of
GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals and GEN-NET200 : Sun Solaris Part 1: Basic Administration.

Timing
Prerequisites should be completed within two weeks of each other. students should gain one month
of work experience before taking GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals, six months of work
experience on the UNIX system before taking GEN-NET200 : Sun Solaris Part 1: Basic Administration and an
additional six months of work experience with an experienced senior engineer before taking CDMAPER140 : SwitchMATE and SwitchMATE II Operations.

124

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

(Analog) SwitchMATE Operation and Administration


Work Experience Objectives
Ability to operate and identify the differences between SwitchMATE and SwitchMATE II,
including:

Configuring a Cellular Application Terminal (CAT) to operate correctly with a SwitchMATE/


SwitchMATE II.
Performing administration functions on the EMX switch using SwitchMATE/SwitchMATE II.
Accessing each of the 12 status display screens to:
Identify the state of each processor.
Change the state of a processor from the status screen GUI interface.
View a detailed alarm list.
Searching each of the log files to find alarm, troubleshooting, subscriber, and maintenance data.
Configuring and testing the alarm database and notification feature.
Generating and analyzing various reports and alarms including Preventative Maintenance
Analysis (PMA).
Generating and scheduling jobs to test the Radio Frequency Diagnostic Sub-system (RFDS) and
System-wide Audio Loopback Test (SALT, Turbo-SALT) for the SC 9600 system.

Ability to perform system administration functions on the SwitchMATE message processor,


including:

January 2002

Performing SwitchMATE administration functions, using the SMadm menu.


Configuring and resetting SwitchMATE ports.
Scheduling, then generating call record and traffic reports for system performance
measurement.
Generating Open Data Access reports, using TM&M, IPR, and the channel parameters
database.
Generating, then analyzing Preventative Maintenance Analysis (PMA) reports and alarms.
Troubleshooting the SwitchMATE software.

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

125

(CDMA) SwitchMATE Operation and Administration


Jobset Description
Personnel involved with the day-to-day operation of SwitchMATE and SwitchMATE II for the
EMX switches. This curriculum is designed for personnel involved with the system administration
of the SwitchMATE intelligent message processor for the EMX switches.

Curriculum Path
Students should have a working knowledge of microprocessor and digital logic-based systems,
telephone, and communications electronics. Working knowledge of Windows 3.1, Windows95, or
Windows NT is also recommended.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM


CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling
CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance
GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals
GEN-NET200 : Sun Solaris Part 1: Basic Administration
CDMA-PER140 : SwitchMATE and SwitchMATE II Operations

Options
CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance can be completed in one of the two following formats:
the three-week CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance course, or the CDMA-SWT110 : EMX 2500/
5000 Operation & Maintenance (Week 1), CDMA-SWT120 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance (Week 2),
CDMA-SWT130 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance (Week 3) series of courses, each of which is one
week in duration. The latter option is offered for students whose schedules do not allow for three
consecutive weeks of class participation.
GEN-NET200 : Sun Solaris Part 1: Basic Administration is optional. For students following the CDMA-SWT450 :
EMX Operation and Maintenance curriculum path who have more than six months of work experience,
CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling is not required.
In LAC Only: students may take GEN-GNL010 : UNIX Commands Applied to Motorola's Network instead of
GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals and GEN-NET200 : Sun Solaris Part 1: Basic Administration.

Timing
Prerequisites should be completed within two weeks of each other. students should gain one month
of work experience before taking GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals, six months of work
experience on the UNIX system before taking GEN-NET200 : Sun Solaris Part 1: Basic Administration and an
additional six months of work experience with an experienced senior engineer before taking CDMAPER140 : SwitchMATE and SwitchMATE II Operations.

126

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

(CDMA) SwitchMATE Operation and Administration


Work Experience Objectives
Ability to operate and identify the differences between SwitchMATE and SwitchMATE II,
including:

Configuring a Cellular Application Terminal (CAT) to operate correctly with a SwitchMATE/


SwitchMATE II.
Performing administration functions on the EMX switch using SwitchMATE/SwitchMATE II.
Accessing each of the 12 status display screens to:
Identify the state of each processor.
Change the state of a processor from the status screen GUI interface.
View a detailed alarm list.
Searching each of the log files to find alarm, troubleshooting, subscriber, and maintenance data.
Configuring and testing the alarm database and notification feature.
Generating and analyzing various reports and alarms including Preventative Maintenance
Analysis (PMA).
Generating and scheduling jobs to test the Radio Frequency Diagnostic Sub-system (RFDS) and
System-wide Audio Loopback Test (SALT, Turbo-SALT) for the SC 9600 system.

Ability to perform system administration functions on the SwitchMATE message processor,


including:

January 2002

Performing SwitchMATE administration functions, using the SMadm menu.


Configuring and resetting SwitchMATE ports.
Scheduling, then generating call record and traffic reports for system performance
measurement.
Generating Open Data Access reports, using TM&M, IPR, and the channel parameters
database.
Generating, then analyzing Preventative Maintenance Analysis (PMA) reports and alarms.
Troubleshooting the SwitchMATE software.

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

127

128

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

Intelligent Network Operations


(Analog) Intelligent Network K-Series Fundamentals .......................................................................................... 130
(CDMA) Intelligent Network K-Series Fundamentals........................................................................................... 131
(Analog) Intelligent Network (K-Series) IS-41 Operation and Maintenance......................................................... 132
(CDMA) Intelligent Network (K-Series) Message Register Operation and Maintenance..................................... 135
(Analog) Intelligent Network (K-Series) Message Register Operation and Maintenance .................................... 134
(CDMA) Intelligent Network (K-Series) Message Register Operation and Maintenance..................................... 135
(Analog) Intelligent Network (K-Series) HLR-DMX Operation and Maintenance................................................. 136
(CDMA) Intelligent Network (K-Series) HLR-DMX Operation and Maintenance ................................................. 137
(Analog) Compaq HLR41/AC............................................................................................................................... 138
(CDMA) Compaq HLR 41 / AC ............................................................................................................................ 139

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

129

(Analog) Intelligent Network K-Series Fundamentals


Jobset Description
This curriculum is designed for personnel involved with the operation and maintenance of the
Tandem K-Series product platform hardware and its system components.

Curriculum Path
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

ANA-GNL020 : Analog Cellular Overview Companion CD-ROM


ANA-GNL030 : Analog Cellular Systems Overview
CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling
CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance
CDMA-PER200 : K-Series Fundamentals

Options
CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance can be completed in one of the two following formats:
the three week CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance course, or the CDMA-SWT110 : EMX 2500/
5000 Operation & Maintenance (Week 1), CDMA-SWT120 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance (Week 2),
CDMA-SWT130 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance (Week 3) series of courses, each of which is one
week in duration. The latter option is offered for students whose schedules do not allow for three
consecutive weeks of class participation.

Timing
Students can take the GNL series of courses within one to two weeks of completing the proceeding
course. One month of work experience should be realized prior to taking either CDMA-SWT450 : EMX
Operation and Maintenance. students should obtain an additional six months of experience before taking
CDMA-PER200 : K-Series Fundamentals.

Work Experience Objectives


Ability to operate and maintain the adjunct platform equipment, including:

130

Using the TACL commands.


Defining file system architecture.
Managing the hard disk.
Using the printer.
Interpreting the hardware configuration file.
Interpreting the device listing.
Using the system control panel.
Listing logic board function.
Making the cable connection.
Demonstrating familiarity with workstation software and configuration.

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

(CDMA) Intelligent Network K-Series Fundamentals


Jobset Description
Personnel involved with the operation and maintenance of the Tandem K-Series product platform
hardware and its system components.

Curriculum Path
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM


CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling
CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance
CDMA-PER200 : K-Series Fundamentals

Options
CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance can be completed in one of the two following formats:
the three week CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance course, or the CDMA-SWT110 : EMX 2500/
5000 Operation & Maintenance (Week 1), CDMA-SWT120 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance (Week 2),
CDMA-SWT130 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance (Week 3) series of courses, each of which is one
week in duration. The latter option is offered for students whose schedules do not allow for three
consecutive weeks of class participation.

Timing
Students can take the GNL series of courses within one to two weeks of completing the proceeding
course. One month of work experience should be realized prior to taking either CDMA-SWT450 : EMX
Operation and Maintenance. students should obtain an additional six months of experience before taking
CDMA-PER200 : K-Series Fundamentals.

Work Experience Objectives


Ability to operate and maintain the adjunct platform equipment, including:

January 2002

Using the TACL commands.


Defining file system architecture.
Managing the hard disk.
Using the printer.
Interpreting the hardware configuration file.
Interpreting the device listing.
Using the system control panel.
Listing logic board function.
Making the cable connection.
Demonstrating familiarity with workstation software and configuration.

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

131

(Analog) Intelligent Network (K-Series) IS-41 Operation and


Maintenance
Jobset Description
This curriculum is designed for personnel involved with the operation and maintenance of IS-41
converter equipment in an analog cellular network.

Curriculum Path
Students should have a working knowledge of microprocessor and digital logic-based systems,
telephone, and communications electronics.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

ANA-GNL020 : Analog Cellular Overview Companion CD-ROM


ANA-GNL030 : Analog Cellular Systems Overview
CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling
CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance
CDMA-PER200 : K-Series Fundamentals
CDMA-PER210 : IS-41 Operation

Options
CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance can be completed in one of the two following formats:
the three-week CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance course, or the CDMA-SWT110 : EMX 2500/
5000 Operation & Maintenance (Week 1), CDMA-SWT120 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance (Week 2),
CDMA-SWT130 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance (Week 3) series of courses, each of which is one
week in duration. The latter option is offered for students whose schedules do not allow for three
consecutive weeks of class participation.

Timing
Students can take the GNL series courses within one to two weeks of completing each prior course.
It is recommended students gain one month of work experience prior to taking CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7
Common Channel Signaling, and another month before taking either CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and
Maintenance. students should obtain an additional six months of experience before taking CDMAPER200 : K-Series Fundamentals, and another six months of experience before taking CDMA-PER210 : IS-41
Operation.

Work Experience Objectives


After completing CDMA-PER210 : IS-41 Operation, you will have the ability to operate and maintain the
IS-41 converter equipment, including:

132

Monitoring High-Level Data Link Control (HDLC) and network link status.
Analyzing the IS-41 product message set.
Performing a trace on the links and interpreting the output.
Creating, maintaining, and updating the database.
Interpreting an Exception Reporting and Alarms Distribution (ERAD) message.
Locating a repair procedure.
Populating the SS7 database.
Running a change project.
Verifying that SS7 links are operational.
Decoding the three types of signaling units.

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

(CDMA) Intelligent Network (K-Series) IS-41 Operation and


Maintenance
Jobset Description
This curriculum is designed for personnel involved with the operation and maintenance of IS-41
converter equipment in a CDMA cellular network.

Curriculum Path
Students should have a working knowledge of microprocessor and digital logic-based systems,
telephone, and communications electronics.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM


CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling
CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance
CDMA-PER200 : K-Series Fundamentals
CDMA-PER210 : IS-41 Operation

Options
CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance can be completed in one of the two following formats:
the three-week CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance course, or the CDMA-SWT110 : EMX 2500/
5000 Operation & Maintenance (Week 1), CDMA-SWT120 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance (Week 2),
CDMA-SWT130 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance (Week 3) series of courses, each of which is one
week in duration. The latter option is offered for students whose schedules do not allow for three
consecutive weeks of class participation.

Timing
Students can take the GNL series courses within one to two weeks of completing each prior course.
It is recommended students gain one month of work experience prior to taking CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7
Common Channel Signaling, and another month before taking either CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and
Maintenance. students should obtain an additional six months of experience before taking CDMAPER200 : K-Series Fundamentals, and another six months of experience before taking CDMA-PER210 : IS-41
Operation.

Work Experience Objectives


After completing CDMA-PER210 : IS-41 Operation, you will have the ability to operate and maintain the
IS-41 converter equipment, including:

January 2002

Monitoring High-Level Data Link Control (HDLC) and network link status.
Analyzing the IS-41 product message set.
Performing a trace on the links and interpreting the output.
Creating, maintaining, and updating the database.
Interpreting an Exception Reporting and Alarms Distribution (ERAD) message.
Locating a repair procedure.
Populating the SS7 database.
Running a change project.
Verifying that SS7 links are operational.
Decoding the three types of signaling units.

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

133

(Analog) Intelligent Network (K-Series) Message Register


Operation and Maintenance
Jobset Description
This curriculum is designed for personnel involved with the operation and maintenance of the
Motorola Message Register in an analog cellular network.

Curriculum Path
Students should have a working knowledge of microprocessor and digital logic-based systems,
telephone, and communications electronics.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

ANA-GNL020 : Analog Cellular Overview Companion CD-ROM


ANA-GNL030 : Analog Cellular Systems Overview
CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling
CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance
CDMA-PER200 : K-Series Fundamentals
CDMA-PER220 : Message Register (MR)

Options
CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance can be completed in one of the two following formats:
the three-week CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance course, or the CDMA-SWT110 : EMX 2500/
5000 Operation & Maintenance (Week 1), CDMA-SWT120 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance (Week 2),
CDMA-SWT130 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance (Week 3) series of courses, each of which is one
week in duration. The latter option is offered for students whose schedules do not allow for three
consecutive weeks of class participation.

Timing
Students can take the GNL series courses within one to two weeks of completing each prior course.
It is recommended students gain one month of work experience prior to taking CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7
Common Channel Signaling, and another month before taking either CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and
Maintenance. students should obtain an additional six months of experience before taking CDMAPER200 : K-Series Fundamentals, and another six months of experience before taking CDMA-PER220 :
Message Register (MR).

Work Experience Objectives


After completing CDMA-PER220 : Message Register (MR), you will have the ability to operate the Motorola
Message Register, perform database updates, and complete routine maintenance tasks, including:

134

Using and maintaining database screens and command line mode utility.
Identifying the MR Process Description records, MR Assign records, and Parameter records.
Determining MR-EMX switch link status
Configuring Intelligent Peripheral Devices (IPD)/ Voice Mail Boxes.
Using the CWS to display ERADS, then interpreting them.
Interpreting alarms, then identifying repair procedures.
Conducting alarm/ERAD-specific searches.
Identifying the MR statistics and related registers and messages.
Using the report-generating utility.
Configuring SS7/C7 links and verifying that SS7 links are operational.
Decoding the three types of signaling units.
Describing the Over the Air Activation Feature and using the associated tools and utilities.

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

(CDMA) Intelligent Network (K-Series) Message Register


Operation and Maintenance
Jobset Description
This curriculum is designed for personnel involved with the operation and maintenance of the
Motorola Message Register in a CDMA cellular network.

Curriculum Path
Students should have a working knowledge of microprocessor and digital logic-based systems,
telephone, and communications electronics.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM


CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling
CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance
CDMA-PER200 : K-Series Fundamentals
CDMA-PER220 : Message Register (MR)

Options
CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance can be completed in one of the two following formats:
the three-week CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance course, or the CDMA-SWT110 : EMX 2500/
5000 Operation & Maintenance (Week 1), CDMA-SWT120 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance (Week 2),
CDMA-SWT130 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance (Week 3) series of courses, each of which is one
week in duration. The latter option is offered for students whose schedules do not allow for three
consecutive weeks of class participation.

Timing
Students can take the GNL series courses within one to two weeks of completing each prior course.
It is recommended students gain one month of work experience prior to taking CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7
Common Channel Signaling, and another month before taking either CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and
Maintenance. students should obtain an additional six months of experience before taking CDMAPER200 : K-Series Fundamentals, and another six months of experience before taking CDMA-PER220 :
Message Register (MR).

Work Experience Objectives


After completing CDMA-PER220 : Message Register (MR), you will have the ability to operate the Motorola
Message Register, perform database updates, and complete routine maintenance tasks, including:

January 2002

Using and maintaining database screens and command line mode utility.
Identifying the MR Process Description records, MR Assign records, and Parameter records.
Determining MR-EMX switch link status
Configuring Intelligent Peripheral Devices (IPD)/ Voice Mail Boxes.
Using the CWS to display ERADS, then interpreting them.
Interpreting alarms, then identifying repair procedures.
Conducting alarm/ERAD-specific searches.
Identifying the MR statistics and related registers and messages.
Using the report-generating utility.
Configuring SS7/C7 links and verifying that SS7 links are operational.
Decoding the three types of signaling units.
Describing the Over the Air Activation Feature and using the associated tools and utilities.

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

135

(Analog) Intelligent Network (K-Series) HLR-DMX


Operation and Maintenance
Jobset Description
This curriculum is designed for personnel involved with the operation and maintenance of the HLRDMX application in an analog cellular network.

Curriculum Path
Students should have a working knowledge of microprocessor and digital logic-based systems,
telephone, and communications electronics.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

ANA-GNL020 : Analog Cellular Overview Companion CD-ROM


ANA-GNL030 : Analog Cellular Systems Overview
CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling
CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance
CDMA-PER200 : K-Series Fundamentals
CDMA-PER230 : DMX Home Location Register (DMX HLR)

Options
CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance can be completed in one of the two following formats:
the three-week CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance course, or the CDMA-SWT110 : EMX 2500/
5000 Operation & Maintenance (Week 1), CDMA-SWT120 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance (Week 2),
CDMA-SWT130 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance (Week 3) series of courses, each of which is one
week in duration. The latter option is offered for students whose schedules do not allow for three
consecutive weeks of class participation.

Timing
Students can take the GNL series courses within one to two weeks of completing each prior course.
It is recommended students gain one month of work experience prior to taking CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7
Common Channel Signaling, and another month before taking either CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and
Maintenance. students should obtain an additional six months of experience before taking CDMAPER200 : K-Series Fundamentals, and another six months of experience before taking CDMA-PER230 : DMX
Home Location Register (DMX HLR).

Work Experience Objectives


After completing CDMA-PER230 : DMX Home Location Register (DMX HLR) the ability to operate and
maintain the Motorola HLR application, including:

136

Using and maintaining database screens, using the remote subscriber management interface,
and generating database reports.
Identifying HLR Process Description records, Assign records, and Parameter records.
Determining HLR-EMX switch link status, tracing message activity on the link, and adding/
deleting a link.
Using the CWS to display ERADS, then interpreting them.
Using and maintaining screens and utilities for change-posting, replication, and expanded link
procedures.
Identifying the HLR statistics and related registers and messages.
Using the report-generating utility.

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

(CDMA) Intelligent Network (K-Series) HLR-DMX Operation


and Maintenance
Jobset Description
This curriculum is designed for personnel involved with the operation and maintenance of the HLRDMX application in a CDMA cellular network.

Curriculum Path
Students should have a working knowledge of microprocessor and digital logic-based systems,
telephone, and communications electronics.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM


CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling
CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance
CDMA-PER200 : K-Series Fundamentals
CDMA-PER230 : DMX Home Location Register (DMX HLR)

Options
CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance can be completed in one of the two following formats:
the three-week CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance course, or the CDMA-SWT110 : EMX 2500/
5000 Operation & Maintenance (Week 1), CDMA-SWT120 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance (Week 2),
CDMA-SWT130 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance (Week 3) series of courses, each of which is one
week in duration. The latter option is offered for students whose schedules do not allow for three
consecutive weeks of class participation.

Timing
Students can take the GNL series courses within one to two weeks of completing each prior course.
It is recommended students gain one month of work experience prior to taking CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7
Common Channel Signaling, and another month before taking either CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and
Maintenance. students should obtain an additional six months of experience before taking CDMAPER200 : K-Series Fundamentals, and another six months of experience before taking CDMA-PER230 : DMX
Home Location Register (DMX HLR).

Work Experience Objectives


After completing CDMA-PER230 : DMX Home Location Register (DMX HLR), you will have the ability to
operate and maintain the Motorola HLR application, including:

January 2002

Using and maintaining database screens, using the remote subscriber management interface,
and generating database reports.
Identifying HLR Process Description records, Assign records, and Parameter records.
Determining HLR-EMX switch link status, tracing message activity on the link, and adding/
deleting a link.
Using the CWS to display ERADS, then interpreting them.
Using and maintaining screens and utilities for change-posting, replication, and expanded link
procedures.
Identifying the HLR statistics and related registers and messages.
Using the report-generating utility.

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

137

(Analog) Compaq HLR41/AC


Jobset Description
This curriculum path is designed for Intelligent Network Operations and Cellular Network Operations
personnel who will be operating and maintaining the Compaq HLR41/AC application in an analog
cellular network.

Curriculum Path
Students should have a working knowledge of microprocessor and digital logic-based systems,
telephone, and communications electronics.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

ANA-GNL020 : Analog Cellular Overview Companion CD-ROM


ANA-GNL030 : Analog Cellular Systems Overview
CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling
CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance
CDMA-PER640 : S-Series Fundamentals or CDMA-PER200 : K-Series Fundamentals
CDMA-PER270 : Compaq HLR41/AC

Options
CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance can be completed in one of the two following formats:
the three-week CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance course, or the CDMA-SWT110 : EMX 2500/
5000 Operation & Maintenance (Week 1), CDMA-SWT120 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance (Week 2),
CDMA-SWT130 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance (Week 3) series of courses, each of which is one
week in duration. The latter option is offered for students whose schedules do not allow for three
consecutive weeks of class participation.

Timing
This curriculum can be completed within eighteen months depending upon the students work
experience. Six months of work experience should be realized between CDMA-PER640 : S-Series
Fundamentals and CDMA-PER270 : Compaq HLR41/AC. Prior to CDMA-PER640 : S-Series Fundamentals students
should have a minimum of six months of Cellular Network operations, Cellular Switch operations,
and Intelligent Network operations experience. Prior to beginning CDMA-PER270 : Compaq HLR41/AC, a
student should gain a minimum of six months of work experience on Compaq/Tandem K-Series or
S-Series Equipment operations.

Work Experience Objectives

138

Ability to maintain the various database files necessary for the successful operation of the
Compaq/Tandem HLR/AC system application software, including:
generating reports using the Enform AD-HOC Reporting facility
displaying the Authentication Center Event log and how to use various utilities
populating, updating, and maintaining the following Compaq HLR/AC application software
databases
Authentication Center (AC) Configuration database -HLR Subscriber Management
Asynchronous Data and G3 FAX Service (ADFS) Voice and Data Encryption
Personal Dialing Services (PDS) Configuration files -Enform AD-HOC Reporting
HLR Number Translation database options Forward to Number Translation
Generic Intelligent Network Interface database HLR System Parameters File database.

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

(CDMA) Compaq HLR 41 / AC


Jobset Description
This curriculum path is designed for Intelligent Network Operations and Cellular Network Operations
personnel who will be operating and maintaining the Compaq HLR41/AC application in a CDMA
cellular network.

Curriculum Path
Students should have a working knowledge of microprocessor and digital logic-based systems,
telephone, and communications electronics.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM


CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling
CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance
CDMA-PER640 : S-Series Fundamentals or CDMA-PER200 : K-Series Fundamentals
CDMA-PER270 : Compaq HLR41/AC

Options
CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance can be completed in one of the two following formats:
the three-week CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance course, or the CDMA-SWT110 : EMX 2500/
5000 Operation & Maintenance (Week 1), CDMA-SWT120 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance (Week 2),
CDMA-SWT130 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance (Week 3) series of courses, each of which is one
week in duration. The latter option is offered for students whose schedules do not allow for three
consecutive weeks of class participation.

Timing
This curriculum can be completed within eighteen months depending upon the students work
experience. Six months of work experience should be realized between CDMA-PER640 : S-Series
Fundamentals and CDMA-PER270 : Compaq HLR41/AC.
Prior to CDMA-PER640 : S-Series Fundamentals, students should have a minimum of six months of
Cellular Network operations, Cellular Switch operations, and Intelligent Network operations
experience.
Prior to beginning CDMA-PER270 : Compaq HLR41/AC, a student should gain a minimum of six months of
work experience on Compaq/Tandem K-Series or S-Series Equipment operations.

Work Experience Objectives

January 2002

Ability to maintain the various database files necessary for the successful operation of the
Compaq/Tandem HLR/AC system application software, including:
generating reports using the Enform AD-HOC Reporting facility
displaying the Authentication Center Event log and how to use various utilities
populating, updating, and maintaining the following Compaq HLR/AC application software
databases
Authentication Center (AC) Configuration database -HLR Subscriber Management
Asynchronous Data and G3 FAX Service (ADFS) Voice and Data Encryption
Personal Dialing Services (PDS) Configuration files -Enform AD-HOC Reporting
HLR Number Translation database options Forward to Number Translation
Generic Intelligent Network Interface database HLR System Parameters File database.

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

139

140

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

Unix/Circuit CBSC/IWU
High Speed Packet Data (IWU) ........................................................................................................................... 142
High-Density Interworking Unit (HD-IWU) Operations and Maintenance for Technicians ................................... 143
UNIX SVR4 System Administration ..................................................................................................................... 144
Advanced Scenario Workshop............................................................................................................................. 145
CBSC Operation for Circuit CBSC Operators...................................................................................................... 146
CBSC Operation for Circuit CBSC for BTS Technicians ..................................................................................... 147
CBSC Database Administration........................................................................................................................... 148
CDMA RF System Design ................................................................................................................................... 149

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

141

High Speed Packet Data (IWU)


Jobset Description
This curriculum is designed for Technicians and CFEs involved in the operation and maintenance of
wireless packet data systems that need both the knowledge and skills required to operate and
maintain a HSPD IWU. Included are functional descriptions of components, call flows, and basic IP
networking.

Curriculum Path
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM


CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals
CDMA-OMCR100NE : OMC-R Network Element Overview for Release 16.x
CDMA-MM100NE : Mobility Manager Network Element Overview for G16.x Release
CDMA-XC100NE : XC Network Element Overview for Release 16.x
CDMA-SYS100OM : 1X Operations and Maintenance: Overview
CDMA-PER380 : High Speed Packet Data (IWU)

Options
None.

Timing
This curriculum path can be completed within six months. It is recommended that students gain a
minimum of one month of work experience prior to taking GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals
and three months of work experience, with a senior engineer, prior to taking CDMA-PER380 : High Speed
Packet Data (IWU).

Work Experience Objectives


Upon completion of the course, students will be able to:

142

Describe the functions of HSPD components.


Describe HSPD call flow.
Describe IP protocols.
Install a packet IWU shelf.
Load and configure TCM software.
Monitor the status of individual cards.
Configure routers and services in a HSPD network.

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

High-Density Interworking Unit (HD-IWU) Operations and


Maintenance for Technicians
Jobset Description
This curriculum is designed for Technicians and CFEs involved in the operation and maintenance of
the Inter Working Unit. Courses will provide students with a functional description of the IWU and
will enable students to operate and maintain it.

Curriculum Path
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM


CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals
CDMA-OMCR100NE : OMC-R Network Element Overview for Release 16.x
CDMA-MM100NE : Mobility Manager Network Element Overview for G16.x Release
CDMA-XC100NE : XC Network Element Overview for Release 16.x
CDMA-SYS100OM : 1X Operations and Maintenance: Overview
CDMA-PER330: High Density IWU

Options
None.

Timing
This curriculum path can be completed within six months. It is recommended that students gain a
minimum of one month of work experience prior to taking GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals
and three months of work experience, with a senior engineer, prior to CDMA-PER330: High Density IWU.

Work Experience Objectives


Upon completion of the course, students will be able to:

January 2002

Describe IWU card functions and signal flow.


Perform chassis installation (software).
Configure an IWU.
Load software.
Maintain an IWU.
Download software to the IWU.

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

143

UNIX SVR4 System Administration


Jobset Description
System Engineers and support professionals who will be responsible for administering a UNIX
server environment.

Curriculum Path
1. GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals
2. GEN-NET200 : Sun Solaris Part 1: Basic Administration

Options
In LAC Only: students may take GEN-GNL010 : UNIX Commands Applied to Motorola's Network instead of
GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals and GEN-NET200 : Sun Solaris Part 1: Basic Administration.

Timing
Following completion of GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals, students should gain at least three
months of work experience before taking GEN-NET200 : Sun Solaris Part 1: Basic Administration.

Work Experience Objectives


Necessary knowledge and skills required to install, start-up and shut down a UNIX system, work
with system resources, set up and administer user accounts, set up system accounting and identify
information tracked by different types of accounting. Specific items addressed include:

144

Sequencing the steps to boot a UNIX system from a local CD-ROM.


Changing the system state using the init command.
Matching the run control scripts with their functions.
Shutting down the system using the shutdown command.
Identifying the types of files systems and their parameters.
Creating and labeling a file system.
Mounting and unmounting file systems in UNIX.
Finding free disk space using the df command.
Completing the sacadm command to create a port monitor.
Given a port monitor, displaying its status using the sacadm command.
Enabling a port service by using the pmadm command.
Setting up the local printing services using the lpadmin command.
Adding/modifying/disabling and removing a user account using the admintool.

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

Advanced Scenario Workshop


Jobset Description
This curriculum is designed for people who require training in CBSC troubleshooting, data
collection, backup and recovery procedures.

Curriculum Path
Students should possess an extensive UNIX programming background or related experience
working as a UNIX administrator and have a thorough knowledge of CDMA network operations,
operations ethics, network file systems, or cellular system technologies.
1. CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM
2. CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
3. GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals
4. GEN-NET200 : Sun Solaris Part 1: Basic Administration
5. CDMA-OMCR100NE : OMC-R Network Element Overview for Release 16.x
6. CDMA-MM100NE : Mobility Manager Network Element Overview for G16.x Release
7. CDMA-XC100NE : XC Network Element Overview for Release 16.x
8. CDMA-SYS100OM : 1X Operations and Maintenance: Overview
9. CDMA-OMCR100OM : Operations and Maintenance: OMCR
10.CDMA-MM100OM : Operations and Maintenance: MM
11.CDMA-XC100OM : Operations and Maintenance: XC
12.CDMA-SAO100 : Advanced Scenario Workshop

Options
In LAC Only: students can take either GEN-GNL010 : UNIX Commands Applied to Motorola's Network or GENNET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals and GEN-NET200 : Sun Solaris Part 1: Basic Administration.

Timing
Students should gain six months of work experience prior to taking GEN-NET200 : Sun Solaris Part 1:
Basic Administration and two months of work experience with a senior engineer prior to SAO100. All
other courses can be taken within two weeks of completing the prior course.

Work Experience Objectives


Upon competition of this curriculum path, students will be able to:

January 2002

Perform CBSC troubleshooting techniques and procedures.


Reduce system outage and downtime through more expedient troubleshooting and problem
solving techniques.
Reduce Motorola Cellular Support Center (MCSC) involvement by providing critical information
to the MCSC.
Improve data collection skills necessary for problem resolution.
In a lab environment, provide CBSC field personnel troubleshooting and problem resolution
experience.

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

145

CBSC Operation for Circuit CBSC Operators


Jobset Description
This curriculum is designed for novice CBSC operators or technical support personnel responsible
for monitoring and performing basic troubleshooting for the CBSC.

Curriculum Path
Students should possess a working knowledge of CDMA of/or experience with Code Division
Multiple Access (CDMA) or cellular system technologies.
1. CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM
2. CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
3. GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals
4. GEN-NET200 : Sun Solaris Part 1: Basic Administration
5. CDMA-OMCR100NE : OMC-R Network Element Overview for Release 16.x
6. CDMA-MM100NE : Mobility Manager Network Element Overview for G16.x Release
7. CDMA-XC100NE : XC Network Element Overview for Release 16.x
8. CDMA-SYS100OM : 1X Operations and Maintenance: Overview
9. CDMA-OMCR100OM : Operations and Maintenance: OMCR
10.CDMA-MM100OM : Operations and Maintenance: MM
11. CDMA-XC100OM : Operations and Maintenance: XC

Options
CDMA-OMCR100NE : OMC-R Network Element Overview for Release 16.x, CDMA-MM100NE : Mobility Manager
Network Element Overview for G16.x Release, and CDMA-XC100NE : XC Network Element Overview for Release 16.x
are optional; however, it is recommended students take these courses prior to CDMA-SYS100OM : 1X
Operations and Maintenance: Overview.
In LAC Only: students can take either GEN-GNL010 : UNIX Commands Applied to Motorola's Network or GENNET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals and GEN-NET200 : Sun Solaris Part 1: Basic Administration.

Timing
Students should gain six months of work experience with a senior engineer prior to taking GENNET200 : Sun Solaris Part 1: Basic Administration and two additional months of work experience prior to
CDMA-SYS100OM : 1X Operations and Maintenance: Overview. All other courses can be taken within two
weeks of completing the prior course.

Work Experience Objectives


Upon competition of this curriculum path, students will:

146

Be capable to perform system monitoring and board removal/replacement procedures on the


CBSC/BTS subsystem.
Gain hands-on experience in their critical on-site tasks.
Identify and recover from typical faults in the system.
Perform approximately forty hands-on laboratory sessions.
Use typical fault identification tools, such as the Alarm Manager, Status Display Tool, Command
Line Interface, and Transcoder Command Line Interface.
Identify SC -related processes.
Inhibit channel elements.
Follow procedures to disable, remove, install, and enable various components.

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

CBSC Operation for Circuit CBSC for BTS Technicians


Jobset Description
This curriculum is designed for BTS Technicians responsible for monitoring and performing basic
troubleshooting for the CBSC.

Curriculum Path
Students should possess a working knowledge of CDMA of/or experience with Code Division
Multiple Access (CDMA) or cellular system technologies.
1.
2.
3.
4.

CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM


CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
Any BTS Course of Choice
CDMA-SAO210 : CBSC Operations for BTS Technicians

Options
None.

Timing
All courses can be taken within two weeks of completing the prior course.

Work Experience Objectives


Upon competition of this curriculum path, students will:

January 2002

Be capable to perform system monitoring and board removal/replacement procedures on the


CBSC/BTS subsystem.
Gain hands-on experience in their critical on-site tasks.
Identify and recover from typical faults in the system.
Perform approximately forty hands-on laboratory sessions.
Use typical fault identification tools, such as the Alarm Manager, Status Display Tool, Command
Line Interface, and Transcoder Command Line Interface.
Identify SC -related processes.
Inhibit channel elements.
Follow procedures to disable, remove, install, and enable various components.

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

147

CBSC Database Administration


Jobset Description
This curriculum is primarily designed for technical and support personnel responsible for performing
basic system administration and operation duties at the CBSC and OMC-R. This could include
Cellular Field Engineers, CDMA System Operators, Cellular Network Administrators and System
Administrators.

Curriculum Path
Students should have a working knowledge of/or experience with Code Division Multiple Access
(CDMA) or cellular system technologies.
1. CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM
2. CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
3. GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals
4. GEN-NET200 : Sun Solaris Part 1: Basic Administration
5. CDMA-OMCR100NE : OMC-R Network Element Overview for Release 16.x
6. CDMA-MM100NE : Mobility Manager Network Element Overview for G16.x Release
7. CDMA-XC100NE : XC Network Element Overview for Release 16.x
8. CDMA-OMCR100OM : Operations and Maintenance: OMCR
9. CDMA-MM100OM : Operations and Maintenance: MM
10.CDMA-XC100OM : Operations and Maintenance: XC
11. CDMA-OMCR100A : 1X Cellular Database Administration

Options
None.

Timing
Students should gain six months of work experience prior to taking GEN-NET200 : Sun Solaris Part 1:
Basic Administration and two months of work experience with a senior engineer prior to CDMAOMCR100NE : OMC-R Network Element Overview for Release 16.x. All other courses can be taken within two
weeks of completing the prior course.

Work Experience Objectives


Upon completion of the curriculum, students will be able to:

148

Perform the basic system administration and operation duties at the CBSC and OMC-R.
Change device states of any hardware component on the system: Operations and Maintenance
Center-Radio (OMC-R), Mobility Manager (MM), Transcoder (XC), and Base Transceiver Station
(BTS).
Manage system accounts on the OMC-R, MM, XC, and UNO platforms.
Add, delete, and edit cell site database parameters on the OMC-R.
Operate software tools: Geographical System Display (GSD), Status Display Tool (SDT), Alarm
ManaGer (AMG), Alarm Report Manager (ARM), and performance Management Threshold
Monitoring, using the UNO.
Place phone calls on the system and generate corresponding performance reports.

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

CDMA RF System Design


Jobset Description
This curriculum is designed for system and RF engineers who are involved in the RF design of
CDMA cellular systems using the NetPlan CDMA Static System Simulator. It provides training to the
engineering inputs and outputs necessary in the design of a CDMA RF system using the NetPlan
CDMA Static System Simulator.

Curriculum Path
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals


CDMA-PER300 : NetPlan
CDMA-PER130 : NetPlan CDMA
CDMA-PER350 : NetPlan Fundamentals Plus CDMA
CDMA-PER360 : NetPlan CDMA RF System Design

Options
Students can take one of two curriculum paths. The curriculum path for NetPlan for Analog and
GSM, which includes both analog and digital technologies, consists of GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User
Fundamentals, CDMA-PER300 : NetPlan, CDMA-PER130 : NetPlan CDMA, and CDMA-PER360 : NetPlan CDMA RF
System Design. The curriculum path for NetPlan CDMA Static Simulator (CDMA Technologies only)
consists of GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals, CDMA-PER350 : NetPlan Fundamentals Plus CDMA,
and CDMA-PER360 : NetPlan CDMA RF System Design.

Timing
Students should complete GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals prior to CDMA-PER300 : NetPlan.
students with more than six months of work experience with a UNIX system are not required to take
GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals, however, it is recommended.
Students should gain four months of work experience prior to CDMA-PER300 : NetPlan and one month
of additional work experience prior to CDMA-PER360 : NetPlan CDMA RF System Design.

Work Experience Objectives


Upon completion of the course, students will be able to:

January 2002

Identify and describe the elements of CDMA system design.


Describe how to use the NetPlan tool to assist in the design process.
Analyze outputs from the NetPlan tool to validate design criteria has been met.
Compare actual system data to results of the NetPlan tool, and identify data that should be used
to improve the NetPlan tools predictions.

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

149

150

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

CDMA Optimization
CBSC / RFDS Operations ................................................................................................................................... 130
CDMA System Optimization ............................................................................................................................... 131
Cellular System Performance ............................................................................................................................. 132

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

151

CBSC / RFDS Operations


Jobset Description
This curriculum is designed for technicians and support personnel responsible for performing basic
system operation duties at the CBSC/OMC-R, BTS field sites and associated OMC-R/SC-UNO and/
or UNO processor applications for remote BTS fault identification and recovery. Courses target
Cellular Field Engineers, CDMA System Operators, Cellular Network Administrators and System
Administrators.

Curriculum Path
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM


CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals
A BTS Course of choice
CDMA-SYS200 : CBSC/RFDS Operations

Options
This curriculum path is designed for persons that work with a variety of BTS Base Transceiver
Stations. CBSC operators can take CDMA-SYS200 : CBSC/RFDS Operations. BTS technicians can take
any CDMA-BTS course.

Timing
Students should gain four to six months of work experience with a senior engineer prior to CDMASYS200 : CBSC/RFDS Operations.

Work Experience Objectives


Upon completion of the course, students will be able to:

152

Provide a description of the RF Diagnostic Subsystem for PCS CDMA base stations.
Enable operators/technicians to utilize command syntax to execute RFDS test commands for the
OMC-R and LMF.
Utilize RFDS tests and analyze the results.
Furnish BTS technicians engaged in BTS fault identification/recovery procedures using the SCUNO and/or UNO.
Perform RFDS testing, analyze test results and perform troubleshooting procedures.
Perform remote BTS fault identification/ recovery procedures using the OMC-R/ SC-UNO and/or
UNO.

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

CDMA System Optimization


Jobset Description
The CDMA System Optimization curriculum presents conceptual information and task-oriented
procedures related to the optimization of a pre-commercial CDMA system. There are two audiences
for this curriculum:

System engineers who have primary responsibility for the specific tasks involved in optimizing a
pre-commercial CDMA system.
CFE's, product managers, marketing managers, and sales personnel.

Curriculum Path
Students should have the ability to analyze data received from test
equipment and tools to identify system problems and propose appropriate
resolutions
1. CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM
2. CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
3. CDMA-SYS300 : CDMA System Optimization of the RF Link

Options
None.

Timing
This curriculum path can be completed within six months. It is recommended that students gain a
minimum of six months work experience, with a senior engineer, prior to CDMA-SYS300 : CDMA System
Optimization of the RF Link.

Work Experience Objectives


Upon completion of the course, students will be able to:

January 2002

Identify, analyze and resolve system performance issues encountered during the optimization of
a pre-commercial CDMA system including:
neighbor list problems
pilot pollution
coverage holes
hardware issues
window size.
MAHO parameter issues.
Hand-off and external interference problems.

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

153

Cellular System Performance


Jobset Description
This curriculum has been designed primarily for personnel involved with performance monitoring of
the Motorola CDMA digital cellular system. It provides an introduction to the basic skills necessary
for performance monitoring of the digital cellular system.

Curriculum Path
1. CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM
2. CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
3. GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals
4. GEN-NET200 : Sun Solaris Part 1: Basic Administration
5. CDMA-OMCR100NE : OMC-R Network Element Overview for Release 16.x
6. CDMA-MM100NE : Mobility Manager Network Element Overview for G16.x Release
7. CDMA-XC100NE : XC Network Element Overview for Release 16.x
8. CDMA-OMCR100OM : Operations and Maintenance: OMCR
9. CDMA-MM100OM : Operations and Maintenance: MM
10.CDMA-XC100OM : Operations and Maintenance: XC
11. CDMA-SAO190 : Performance Management

Options
GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals and GEN-NET200 : Sun Solaris Part 1: Basic Administration are
optional if the student is an experienced UNIX user. However, it is recommended that students
complete these self-paced study courses as UNIX refresher courses.
In LAC Only: students can take either GEN-GNL010 : UNIX Commands Applied to Motorola's Network or GENNET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals and GEN-NET200 : Sun Solaris Part 1: Basic Administration.

Timing
It is recommended that students gain a minimum of six months work experience, with a senior
engineer, prior to CDMA-SAO190 : Performance Management.

Work Experience Objectives


Upon completion of the course, students will be able to:

154

Determine the capacity of an operating system.


Determine the resources limiting the capacity of the network for a given configuration.
Identify the options available to increase capacity.
Determine which resources may be impacted by system growth and reconfiguration.

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

Universal Network Operations


Universal Network Operations (UNO).................................................................................................................. 156

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

155

Universal Network Operations (UNO)


Jobset Description
This curriculum is designed to provide the student with a basic understanding of the S-Series
Intelligent Network Server platform and the basic skills required to use the various utilities necessary
for the successful operation of the S-Series Intelligent Network Server platform and an overview of
the Central Office system S-Series hardware.

Curriculum Path
1. CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM
2. CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
3. GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals
4. GEN-NET200 : Sun Solaris Part 1: Basic Administration
5. Any BTS Course of Choice
6. CDMA-OMCR100NE : OMC-R Network Element Overview for Release 16.x
7. CDMA-MM100NE : Mobility Manager Network Element Overview for G16.x Release
8. CDMA-XC100NE : XC Network Element Overview for Release 16.x
9. CDMA-SYS100OM : 1X Operations and Maintenance: Overview
10.CDMA-PER450 : UNO Element Manager
11. CDMA-PER460 : UNO Market Manager

Options
Depending on the type of Base Transceiver Station the student works on, the student can take any
CDMA-BTS course after GEN-NET200 : Sun Solaris Part 1: Basic Administration.
In LAC Only: students may take GEN-GNL010 : UNIX Commands Applied to Motorola's Network instead of
GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals and GEN-NET200 : Sun Solaris Part 1: Basic Administration.

Timing
Students should complete one month of on-the-job training prior to taking GEN-NET200 : Sun Solaris Part
1: Basic Administration and another month of training prior to taking one of the BTS courses. Prior to
taking CDMA-PER450 : UNO Element Manager and CDMA-PER640 : S-Series Fundamentals students should
gain six-months of work experience with a senior engineer.

Work Experience Objectives


Upon completion of the course, students will be able to:

Perform in-depth UNO tool performance procedures.

For an in-depth list of UNO tool performance procedures, refer to the course descriptions for CDMAPER450 : UNO Element Manager and CDMA-PER460 : UNO Market Manager (formerly PER180).

156

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

SMAP
SMAP Operation for System Engineers............................................................................................................... 158

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

157

SMAP Operation for System Engineers


Jobset Description
This curriculum is designed for people involved in the analysis and day-to-day monitoring of CDMA
call processing activity. students will gain hands-on training in the set-up and use of SMAP to
monitor call processing for effective diagnosis and troubleshooting of system malfunctions. SMAP is
a real-time data collection, logging, and display tool that gathers call processing and physical layer
information from the CBSC and BTS.

Curriculum Path
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM


CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals
GEN-NET200 : Sun Solaris Part 1: Basic Administration
CDMA-OMCR100NE : OMC-R Network Element Overview for Release 16.x
CDMA-PER250 : System Monitoring Application Processor (SMAP)

Options
In LAC Only: students may take GEN-GNL010 : UNIX Commands Applied to Motorola's Network instead of
GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals and GEN-NET200 : Sun Solaris Part 1: Basic Administration.
Prerequisite Training students should complete CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM, CDMAGNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA), GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals, GEN-NET200 : Sun
Solaris Part 1: Basic Administration, and CDMA-OMCR100NE : OMC-R Network Element Overview for Release 16.x.

Timing
Students should gain four months of work experience prior to taking CDMA-OMCR100NE : OMC-R
Network Element Overview for Release 16.x and an additional one month of work experience prior to taking
CDMA-PER250 : System Monitoring Application Processor (SMAP).

Work Experience Objectives


Upon completion of the course, students will be able to:

158

Use SMAP as a system monitoring and diagnostic tool.


Recall SMAP operational features and configuration menus and displays.

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

NetPlan
NetPlan Operation for CDMA-Only Systems ....................................................................................................... 160
NetPlan CDMA Static Simulator .......................................................................................................................... 161
NetPlan for Analog and GSM............................................................................................................................... 162

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

159

NetPlan Operation for CDMA-Only Systems


Jobset Description
This curriculum path is designed for individuals involved with the planning, design, analysis, and
operation of CDMA cellular systems. It provides hands-on training on the use of the NetPlan tool
with the CDMA Static Simulator function. A cellular modelling application, designed to automate and
optimize many cellular system planning, design, and analysis functions.

Curriculum Path
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM


CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals
GEN-NET200 : Sun Solaris Part 1: Basic Administration
CDMA-PER350 : NetPlan Fundamentals Plus CDMA

Options
In LAC Only: students may take GEN-GNL010 : UNIX Commands Applied to Motorola's Network instead of
GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals and GEN-NET200 : Sun Solaris Part 1: Basic Administration.
Prerequisite Training students should complete CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM, CDMAGNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA), GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals, and GEN-NET200
: Sun Solaris Part 1: Basic Administration.

Timing
Students should complete one month of on-the-job training prior to taking GEN-NET200 : Sun Solaris Part
1: Basic Administration and an additional one month of on-the-job training prior to taking CDMA-PER350 :
NetPlan Fundamentals Plus CDMA.

Work Experience Objectives


Upon completion of the course, students will be able to:

160

Use the NetPlan tool in cellular system planning, design, and optimization.
Perform basic operations of the CDMA simulator by entering given input parameters and
retrieving output data files and images.

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

NetPlan CDMA Static Simulator


Jobset Description
This curriculum path is designed for System Engineers who are involved in CDMA system design
and who are already familiar with the basic analog NetPlan RF planning tool operations. It provides
an introduction to the CDMA Static System Simulator function of the NetPlan software. The NetPlan
CDMA simulator models the components of a CDMA system, approximating the complex interaction
of capability, coverage, and quality. It allows the incorporation of CDMA characteristics into a system
design before the actual system is installed and permits cost-effective investigation into design
scenarios. The emphasis of the course is on basic simulator operations and is not intended to
provide the in-depth background required for system design. Hands-on laboratory exercises allow
the student to practice using the simulator with a system of seven cell sites.

Curriculum Path
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM


CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals
GEN-NET200 : Sun Solaris Part 1: Basic Administration
CDMA-PER300 : NetPlan
CDMA-PER130 : NetPlan CDMA

Options
In LAC Only: students may take GEN-GNL010 : UNIX Commands Applied to Motorola's Network instead of
GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals and GEN-NET200 : Sun Solaris Part 1: Basic Administration.

Timing
Students should complete one month of on-the-job training prior to taking GEN-NET200 : Sun Solaris Part
1: Basic Administration and an additional one month prior to taking CDMA-PER130 : NetPlan CDMA.

Work Experience Objectives


Upon completion of the course, students will be able to:

January 2002

Perform basic operations of the CDMA simulator by entering CDMA parameters and by
outputting CDMA data files and images.

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

161

NetPlan for Analog and GSM


Jobset Description
This curriculum is designed for people involved with the planning, design, analysis, and operation of
analog cellular systems.
The NetPlan RF planning tool is a cellular modeling application, designed to automate and optimize
many cellular system planning, design, and analysis functions. This curriculum provides hands-on
training on the use of the NetPlan RF planning tool with an emphasis on Analog systems. It
prepares those students planning to attend the NetPlan CDMA Static Simulator training.

Curriculum Path
1. GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals
2. CDMA-PER300 : NetPlan

Options
None.

Timing
Students should gain four months of work experience prior to CDMA-PER300 : NetPlan.

Work Experience Objectives


Upon completion of the course, students will be able to:

162

Use the NetPlan RF planning tool in cellular system planning, design, and optimization.

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

1X Operations
Packet or Circuit CBSC Operators....................................................................................................................... 164
Packet CBSC Operations .................................................................................................................................... 165
Circuit CBSC Operations ..................................................................................................................................... 166
Our CBSC curriculum will be growing over the next two years and we are employing a new
courseware delivery method that will better meet your growing needs and be easier for you and your
employees to register for the right course. All of the new Release 16.x (1X) courseware for the
Digital equipment for the Motorola CBSC has been modularized. Modularization allows you to
select exactly the material in which you need training, without having to sit through material that may
be inappropriate for your particular job function.
This strategy is explained in detail on our website.
Operations is defined as those tasks and duties required to operate cellular equipment and systems
in an optimal operating state. These are typical of duties performed at a Network Operations Control
Point. The maintenance aspects in these job functions would be limited to activities done from a
User Work Station.

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

163

Packet or Circuit CBSC Operators


Jobset Description
This curriculum is designed for the novice CBSC operator or technical support personnel
responsible for monitoring and performing basic troubleshooting on a SUN OMCR/PUMA-based
cellular system with a CISCO PDSN. It consists of the Circuit and Packet CBSC courseware.

Curriculum Path
1. CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
2. CDMA-GNL130 : 1X Overview
or
CDMA-GNL131 : e1X Overview (Web-based)
3. CDMA-OMCR100NE : OMC-R Network Element Overview for Release 16.x
4. CDMA-MM100NE : Mobility Manager Network Element Overview for G16.x Release
5. CDMA-XC100NE : XC Network Element Overview for Release 16.x
6. CDMA-OMCP100NE : OMC-IP Network Element Overview for G16.x Release
7. CDMA-MLS100NE : MLS Network Element Overview for Release 16.x
8. CDMA-AGN100NE : AGNODE Network Element Overview for Release 16.x
9. CDMA-OMCR100OM : Operations and Maintenance: OMCR
10.CDMA-MM100OM : Operations and Maintenance: MM
11. CDMA-XC100OM : Operations and Maintenance: XC
12.OMCP100OM
13.CDMA-MLS100OM : Operations and Maintenance: MLS
14.CDMA-AGN100OM : Operations and Maintenance: AGNODE

164

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

Packet CBSC Operations


Jobset Description
This curriculum is designed for the experienced CBSC operator or technical support personnel
responsible for monitoring and performing troubleshooting on a SUN OMCR/PUMA MM-based
cellular system with a CISCO PDSN. It consists of the Packet CBSC courseware.

Curriculum Path
1. CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
2. CDMA-GNL130 : 1X Overview
or
CDMA-GNL131 : e1X Overview (Web-based)
3. CDMA-OMCP100NE : OMC-IP Network Element Overview for G16.x Release
4. CDMA-MLS100NE : MLS Network Element Overview for Release 16.x
5. CDMA-AGN100NE : AGNODE Network Element Overview for Release 16.x
6. OMCP100OM
7. CDMA-MLS100OM : Operations and Maintenance: MLS
8. CDMA-AGN100OM : Operations and Maintenance: AGNODE

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

165

Circuit CBSC Operations


Jobset Description
This curriculum is designed for the novice CBSC operator or technical support personnel
responsible for monitoring and performing basic troubleshooting on a SUN OMCR/PUMA-based
cellular system. This curriculum does not include the 1X Packet CBSC courseware.

Curriculum Path
1. CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
2. CDMA-GNL130 : 1X Overview
or
CDMA-GNL131 : e1X Overview (Web-based)
3. CDMA-OMCR100NE : OMC-R Network Element Overview for Release 16.x
4. CDMA-MM100NE : Mobility Manager Network Element Overview for G16.x Release
5. CDMA-OMCR100OM : Operations and Maintenance: OMCR
6. CDMA-MM100OM : Operations and Maintenance: MM
7. CDMA-XC100OM : Operations and Maintenance: XC

166

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

Customer Support Documentation


This is a guide to the Motorola Cellular customer support manuals; it describes how the manuals are
referenced, and how to obtain them.
Motorola cellular equipment is supported by a range of documentation that provides the required
information for a customer to manage, operate and maintain their Network, as implemented by
Motorola. This documentation is provided in the form of task-oriented system manuals and
hardware product manuals.
Motorola Technical Information Products and Services provides electronic, on-line and printed
documentation required to install, maintain and operate our cellular infrastructure equipment. For a
complete listing of our publications, please visit our Internet site at:
https://services.motorola.com.

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

167

CDMA/Analog Documentation
Supported Products
On our customer internet site documentation lists are provided for product releases. Products are
grouped into the following categories:

Analog Wireless Products


This group lists SC2400 SAS BTS, SC9600 SAS BTS, and SCSC products.

CDMA Wireless Products


This group lists CDMA2000 1X Packet Data, Circuit Data, OMC-R/CBSC, Packet Data, SC300 BTS,
SC611 BTS, SC 614/SC614T BTS, SC2400 BTS, SC2450 BTS, (1X) SC4812T BTS,
(1X) SC4812ET BTS, (1X) SC4812ET Lite, SC4820/SC4852 BTS, and SC9600 BTS.

JCDMA Wireless Products


This group lists CDMA2000 1X Packet Data, OMC-R/CBSC, Packet Data, (1X) SC340 BTS,
(1X) SC2440 BTS, (1X) SC4840 BTS, and SC9640 BTS.

Switch Products
This group lists EMX 2500/5000/VLR, SwitchMATE, and SwitchMATE II.

System Management Products


This group lists DMX HLR, HLR41, IS-41, Message Register, NetPlan,
SMAP, UNO, and Wiretap.

WiLL Products
This group lists WiLL and NCU (FWT) products.

168

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

CDMA/Analog Documentation
Documentation Distribution
Order number
All CDMA and Analog manuals have an order number. The 68P manual order number is a unique
identifier used for ordering purposes. The order number is an eleven character Motorola code, that
starts with 68P... for technical manuals, as shown in Figure 1. It is the part number used when
ordering Motorola hardcopy CDMA and Analog manuals. An additional suffix letter indicates the
issue status of the manual. Note that this starts at O for original then A, B, C and so on.

68P 09201A40 -E
Technical Manual Identifier
Unique Identity Number
Issue Suffix

Figure 1: Example breakdown of a CDMA / Analog publication number

Example
The order number (in this example 68P09201A40-E) is divided into three parts:
1. The first three characters (68P) identify the item as a technical manual.
2. The second eight characters (09201A40) are allocated from a sequential list of numbers, which
are in effect unique identity numbers. However, these may be allocated in blocks for specific
manual sets.
3. The final letter is the issue suffix as described above.

Manual releases
For each new major CDMA and Analog software release, certain software release dependent
manuals are released. Other manuals, such as hardware service manuals, are upissued as
required. Manual issues are sequentially lettered from O for Original, followed by A, B and so on.

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

169

CDMA/Analog Documentation
How to order manuals
You may contact a customer service representative via phone, fax or e-mail, Monday through Friday
8a.m. 6p.m. Mountain Standard Time. Payment method is by credit card or by purchase order.

Telephone:
+1 800 892 4651 (US, Canada and Mexico only)
+1 303 675-2131 (International)

Facsimile:
+1-303-675-2118

E-mail:
tedsub@hibbertco.com
Please note: When ordering documents, make sure to have the document numbers and your
Subscription Number ready. If you need a Subscription Number to the Motorola Information
Logistics System, fill out the Motorola Subscription form.

Purchase Orders
Purchase Orders (P.O.) are added to the payment methods for Motorola customers. As a
subscriber to the Information Logistics System, you enjoy immediate access to important
information that helps you to work with your Motorola equipment. It is our commitment to you to
continually pursue ways to make our system a valuable resource that meets your needs. As a
Motorola customer, you use purchase orders to secure the documents you need. You are still able
to use credit cards. However, this payment method will provide another option that may be more
appropriate for your circumstances.

170

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

GSM/GPRS Documentation
How does the coding system work?
All manuals have two associated codes, an order number and a classification number:
The 68P... manual order number is a unique identifier, used for ordering purposes.
The classification number (for example GSM100311) identifies the type of manual, the overall
manual set to which it belongs, the type of information it contains, and the user it is aimed at.

Order number
The order number is an eleven character Motorola code, that starts with 68P... for technical
manuals. It is the part number used when ordering Motorola hardcopy GSM and GPRS manuals. An
additional suffix letter indicates the issue status of the manual. Note that this starts at O for original
then A, B, C and so on. For software dependent manuals, the issue suffix letter corresponds to each
major software release.
Other manuals, such as hardware service manuals, are reissued as and when required and are
not linked to a particular software release. Some other manuals contain cumulative release
information that is backward compatible, or cover more than one release. Therefore, these manuals
do not conform to the above suffix letter criteria. Table 1 shows a typical issue history for a software
dependent manual with the identifying order number 68P02900W15 (an example only).
Table 1
Order Number

Date of issue

Remarks

68P02900W15O

3rd Oct 94

Software Release 1.2.2.x

68P02900W15A

30th Dec 94

Software Release 1.2.3.x

68P02900W15B

1st Sep 95

Software Release 1.3.0.x

68P02900W15C

31st May 96

Software Release 1.4.0.x

68P02900W15D

17th Dec 96

Software Release 1.4.1.x

68P02900W15E

29th Aug 97

Software Release GSR2 (1.5.0.x)

68P02900W15F

27th Apr 98

Software Release GSR3 (1.5.1.x)

68P02900W15G

12th Mar 99

Software Release GSR4

68P02900W15H

24th Oct 00

Software Release GSR4.1

68P02900W15J

31st Jul 01

Software Release GSR 5

68P02900W15K

30th Nov 01

Software Release GSR5.1

Example
The order number (in this example 68P02900W15K) is divided into three parts:
1. The first three characters (68P) identifies the item as a technical manual.
2. The second eight characters (02900W15) are allocated from a sequential list of numbers, which
are in effect unique identity numbers. However, these may be allocated in blocks for specific
manual sets.
3. The final letter is the issue suffix as described above.

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

171

GSM/GPRS Documentation
Classification number
The Motorola GSM and GPRS customer support manuals provide technical information, in a
combination of different categories and levels, for the various users of the Motorola GSM and GPRS
equipment.
The classification number consists of three or more letters and two groups of three numbers (for
example GSM100311). Figure 2 illustrates the elements of the numbering system and uses all the
possible components a classification number can have.

GSM 100 311


Technical Manual Identifier
Unique Identity Number
Category
Sub category
Information Level

Figure 2: Example breakdown of a GSM publication number

Table 2 details the component meanings of the publication number:


Table 2: Document Numbering System Components
Component

Description

System

GSM

Variant

100 = Generic GSM manual set

Category

3 = Technical description

Sub category

1 = OMC

Information level

1 = System operation

Details of the classification number components are given in the following sections.

System
Current systems include GSM and GPRS.

Variant
The variant is indicated by the middle three numbers (GSM100311) of the Classification number
code, as shown below. Some variants, such as 003, 004, and 007 are reserved for internal Motorola
use.

172

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

GSM/GPRS Documentation
001: Planning
002: DataGen
005: Advance operational impact
008: Network health analyst
100: Generic GSM manual set
300: Generic GPRS manual set

Category
Table 3 shows how the first digit of the last group of the classification number code (GSM100311)
indicates the category of information:
Table 3
Category

Description

Service Manual

System Information

Operating Information

Technical Description

Installation and Configuration

Maintenance Information

Parts Information

Software Release Notes

Category 0: Service manual.


Category reserved for documentation sets relating to specific hardware components.
Category 1: What it is.
Provides general information on the subject system or subsystem.
Category 2: How to use it.
Contains information required by operational staff using the Motorola GSM equipment. Includes
operating procedures, functional tests and remedial action within the capability of the operational
staff.
Category 3: How it works.
Contains the technical description, including principles of design, operation, function and
interrelation of the various parts of the equipment. Physical construction is also included where
necessary.
Category 4: How to prepare it for use.
Contains installation and commissioning information, and configuration details, to enable the
Motorola GSM equipment to be installed, brought into use and optimized.
Category 5: How to maintain it.
Provides maintenance information to enable the user to troubleshoot, repair and maintain the
Motorola GSM equipment.
Category 6: What it consists of.
Provides detailed parts information.
Category 7: How to update it.
Contains details of new software releases.

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

173

GSM/GPRS Documentation
Sub category
Table 4 shows The second digit of the last group of the classification number code (GSM100311)
indicates the sub category. as follows:
Table 4: Classification number code sub categories
Sub category

Description

System

Operations and Maintenance Centre (OMC)

Base Station System (BSS) or Base Transceiver Station (BTS)


Packet Control Unit (PCU) or GPRS Support Node (GSN)

Base Station Controller (BSC)

Information levels
The third digit of the last group of the classification number code (GSM100311) indicates the level
of information. The information contained in each category is arranged into four levels, as shown in
Table 15, so that users are only supplied with the information at the level they require.
Table 5: Classification number code information levels
Information level

Description

BSS network

System operation

OMC system administration

Engineering staff (planning and field)

How do manual updates work?


Upissuing a manual
For each new major GSM and GPRS software release, certain software release dependent
manuals are revised and reissued. When this happens, the issue suffix letter of the Order number
increments by one letter of the alphabet, for example, release GSR5 manuals have the suffix J and
release GSR5.1 manuals have the suffix K.
Other manuals, such as hardware service manuals, are upissued as and when required and do not
follow the above suffix letter rules, but are sequentially lettered from O for Original, followed by A, B
and so on.

174

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

GSM/GPRS Documentation
General Manual Revisions (GMRs)
GMRs are produced to update and correct GSM and GPRS manuals when required. A GMR may
be produced for release dependent manuals when a software point load is issued. For all manuals,
GMRs are produced to incorporate minor technical changes and to correct any errors. An updated
version of the documentation CDROM is produced when the GMRs are incorporated in the
manuals.
Motorola Order Management maintain a database of customers. Any customer who has ordered
manuals for a particular release will be supplied automatically with GMRs, as and when they are
produced. Similarly, any customer who has ordered a documentation CDROM for a particular
software load will be supplied automatically with the GMR version of that CDROM.
Where a documentation CDROM is supplied free of charge, as part of the software load package,
an updated CDROM will be supplied, when available, by Motorola GSM Software Distribution and
Licensing Centre (SDLC).

How to order manuals


Motorola GSM and GPRS manuals for customers must be ordered through the Motorola Local
Office or Representative. Manuals are ordered using the Order number. Remember to specify the
manual issue required by quoting the correct suffix letter that relates to the software load supported.

Details of publications
Motorola provides electronic, online and printed documentation required to install, maintain and
operate our GSM and GPRS cellular infrastructure equipment. For a complete listing of our
publications, please visit the GSM and GPRS sections of our Internet site at: https://services.motorola.com
A CDROM containing all the GSM and GPRS manuals, except release notes, is also available.
From release GSR5 onwards, the data is structured in a navigable PDF format to facilitate ease of
search and location of specific blocks of information.

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

175

176

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

Motorola Technical Training 4 Layer Model


With the emergence of new technologies, an updated training curriculum is being developed by
Motorola Technical Training. The convergence between IT and cellular technologies brings about
new challenges when training engineers for these emerging systems.
Recognizing the need for ease of identification Motorola Training has structured its portfolio of
training courses to allow customers to clearly identify the correct courses for their staff. Course
modules have been divided in to functional areas. Each area is subdivided into the layer model
allowing ease of identification of the correct level of training for an engineer.

Layer 1 Common and Fundamental Principles


Layer 1 of the training model includes common principles such as TCP/IP and ATM, which are not
linked directly to any generation of cellular technology. These principles (courses) are fundamental
to further understanding of cellular technologies.

Layer 2 Hardware
Layer 2 of the training model includes hardware specific training modules.

Layer 3 Systems
Layer 3 of the training model incorporates Systems training modules.

Layer 4 Network
Layer 4 of the training model includes training modules which facilitate a network wide perspective.

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

177

Tiering
Pricing for technical training courses offered by Motorola are structured in a 5-tier pricing system,
based on the level of content complexity. Contact your Customer Account management team for
questions or additional information. Prices are subject to change.

GSM, GPRS, and UMTS Tiering


Tier1
Overview

Course Number

GEN-CP03 : Introduction to SS7 Signaling

Tier2
Platform

Tier3
Advanced

Tier4
System

GEN-CP04 : UNIX for OMC Users

GEN-CP05 : LAN/WAN Principles

GEN-CP06 : Asynchronous Transfer Mode

GEN-CP08 : Frame Relay

GEN-CP09 : TCP/IP

GEN-CP10 : Voice Over IP

GEN-CP11 : WAP Overview

GEN-OMC-G103 : Windows NT4.0 Core Technologies

GPRS-BSS101 : PCU Operational Theory

GPRS-CP07 : Introduction to GPRS

GPRS-CP07A : GPRS Overview (Non -Technical)

GPRS-GPRS100NE : GPRS eLearning Workshop

GPRS-GSN101 : GPRS CommHub

GPRS-GSN102 : GSN Complex Installation

GPRS-GSN103 : Gateway GPRS Support Node

GPRS-GSN104 : Sun Enterprise Cluster

GPRS-GSN105 : ISS Applications

GPRS-NET101 : OMC-G Network Operations

GPRS-NET103 : BSS (GPRS) Network Performance

GPRS-NET106 : IP Security

GPRS-OMC-G105 : OMC-G System Administration

GPRS-SYS101 : GPRS Interfaces and Protocols

GPRS-SYS102 : BSS (GPRS) Database

GPRS-SYS104 : BSS (GPRS) Planning

GPRS-SYS115 : GSN Planning

GPRS-SYS116 : SF Database

GPRS-TEL1213 : GPRS Fundamentals

GPRS-TEL1214 : GPRS Engineering

GSM-BSS05 : BTS Theory and Equipment Operation

GSM-BSS07 : Advanced BSS Field Support


GSM-BSS11 : BSS Operational Theory

178

Tier5
Optimisation/
Workshops

X
X

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

Tiering
GSM, GPRS, and UMTS Tiering (Continued)
Tier1
Overview

Course Number

GSM-BSS11A : BSS Overview (Non-Technical)

Tier2
Platform

Tier3
Advanced

Tier5
Optimisation/
Workshops

GSM-BSS12 : BSS Operations and Maintenance

GSM-BSS14 : BSS Technical Overview

GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular

GSM-CP02A : GSM Cellular Overview (Non-Technical)

GSM-ENG941 : Understanding GSM

GSM-GNL171 : GSM Air Interface

GSM-GNL172 : GSM Signaling and Protocols Architecture

GSM-GNL173 : GSM Signaling and Protocols Procedures

GSM-NET01 : OMC-R Network Operations

GSM-NET02 : OMC-R Advanced Network Operations

GSM-NET03 : Network Performance

GSM-NET05 : Network Health Analyst

GSM-NET06 : Datagen Operations

GSM-OMC01 : OMC-R Overview

GSM-OMC01A : OMC-R Overview (Non-Technical)

GSM-OMC03 : OMC-R System Administration (E3x00 Platform)

GSM-SYS01 : GSM Interfaces and Protocols

GSM-SYS02 : Introduction to BSS Database

GSM-SYS03 : Advanced BSS Database

GSM-SYS04 : Introduction to BSS Planning and Dimensioning

GSM-SYS12 : Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multi-layered Systems


TDMA-ENG932 : Understanding TDMA

X
X

UMTS-CP13 : Introduction to UMTS

UMTS-CP13A : UMTS Overview (Non-Technical)

UMTS-TEL1215 : UMTS Air Interface

UMTS-TEL1216 : UMTS Fundamentals

UMTS-TEL1226 : Understanding UMTS

January 2002

Tier4
System

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

179

Tiering
CDMA Tiering
Tier 1
Introductory

Course

ANA-BTS110 : SC 9600 Base Transceiver Station for StandAlone Analog Systems

Tier 2
Intermediate

Tier 3
Advanced

Tier 4
System

Tier
New-Tech

ANA-GNL020 : Analog Cellular Overview Companion CD-ROM

ANA-GNL030 : Analog Cellular Systems Overview

ANA-SWT040 : EMX 2500 Overview

CDMA-AGN100NE : AGNODE Network Element Overview for


Release 16.x

CDMA-AGN100OM : Operations and Maintenance: AGNODE

CDMA-BTS120 : SC 9600 Base Transceiver Station (CDMA)

CDMA-BTS330 : SC 2400 Base Transceiver Station with


ELPA (CDMA/SAS)

CDMA-BTS440 : SC 614 Base Transceiver Station (CDMA)

CDMA-BTS610 : SC 4812ET Base Transceiver Station


(CDMA) (Trunked)

CDMA-BTS710 : SC 4812T Base Transceiver Station


(CDMA) (Trunked)

CDMA-BTS810 : SC 4812ET LITE Base Transceiver Station


(CDMA) (Trunked)

CDMA-BTS840 : SC 614T Base Transceiver Station (CDMA)

CDMA-ENG935 : Understanding CDMA

CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM

CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)

CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling

CDMA-GNL130 : 1X Overview

CDMA-GNL131 : e1X Overview (Web-based)

CDMA-GNL174 : CDMA Technology

CDMA-GNL800 : IS-95 CDMA Technology

CDMA-GNL810 : CDMA 2000 / 1XRTT

CDMA-GNL820 : IS-95 & CDMA 2000 / 1XRTT

CDMA-MLS100NE : MLS Network Element Overview for


Release 16.x

CDMA-MLS100OM : Operations and Maintenance: MLS

CDMA-MM100NE : Mobility Manager Network Element Overview for G16.x Release

CDMA-MM100OM : Operations and Maintenance: MM

CDMA-OMCP100NE : OMC-IP Network Element Overview for


G16.x Release

CDMA-OMCR100A : 1X Cellular Database Administration

180

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

Tiering
CDMA Tiering (Continued)
Tier 1
Introductory

Course

Tier 2
Intermediate

Tier 3
Advanced

Tier 4
System

Tier
New-Tech

CDMA-OMCR100NE : OMC-R Network Element Overview for


Release 16.x

CDMA-OMCR100OM : Operations and Maintenance: OMCR

CDMA-OMCR101 : SUN OMC-R (CDMA)

CDMA-PER130 : NetPlan CDMA

CDMA-PER140 : SwitchMATE and SwitchMATE II Operations


CDMA-PER200 : K-Series Fundamentals

X
X

CDMA-PER210 : IS-41 Operation

CDMA-PER220 : Message Register (MR)

CDMA-PER230 : DMX Home Location Register (DMX HLR)

CDMA-PER250 : System Monitoring Application Processor


(SMAP)

CDMA-PER270 : Compaq HLR41/AC

CDMA-PER280 : CALEA Wiretap Network Implementation

CDMA-PER290 : CALEA Wiretap Network Operations and


Maintenance

CDMA-PER300 : NetPlan

CDMA-PER330: High Density IWU

CDMA-PER350 : NetPlan Fundamentals Plus CDMA

CDMA-PER360 : NetPlan CDMA RF System Design

CDMA-PER380 : High Speed Packet Data (IWU)


CDMA-PER400 : LMF for Windows Operations (CDMA)

X
X

CDMA-PER440 : NetPlan 5.0 System Availability Workshop

CDMA-PER450 : UNO Element Manager

CDMA-PER460 : UNO Market Manager

CDMA-PER550 : WAP Server Overview and Operations


CDMA-PER640 : S-Series Fundamentals

X
X

CDMA-S2K320 : 3G CDMA 2000 Implementation and Operational Issues

CDMA-S2K400 : WCDMA for UMTS: Guided Tour of the Physical Layer

CDMA-SAO100 : Advanced Scenario Workshop

CDMA-SAO110 : IOS

CDMA-SAO190 : Performance Management

CDMA-SAO210 : CBSC Operations for BTS Technicians

CDMA-SAWR150B : R15 System Availability Workshop Tools

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

181

Tiering
CDMA Tiering (Continued)
Tier 1
Introductory

Course

Tier 2
Intermediate

CDMA-SAWR150C : R15 System Availability Workshop BTS/


CBSC

CDMA-SAWS150 : S15 System Availability Workshop

CDMA-SWT110 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance


(Week 1)

CDMA-SWT120 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance


(Week 2)

CDMA-SWT130 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance


(Week 3)

Tier 3
Advanced

CDMA-SWT150 : EMX Advanced

CDMA-SWT160 : DMX

CDMA-SWT180 : Managing Switch Performance and Growth

CDMA-SWT240 : EMX Translations (International)

CDMA-SWT260 : CCS/SS7 Implementation

CDMA-SWT270 : CCS/C7 Implementation

CDMA-SWT280 : Split Mode Operation and Maintenance

CDMA-SWT281 : SLIC II Operations

CDMA-SWT340 : EMX 5000 Overview

Tier 4
System

Tier
New-Tech

CDMA-SWT370 : EMX-V Implementation/Migration

CDMA-SWT440 : EMX-V Translations

CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance

CDMA-SYS100OM : 1X Operations and Maintenance: Overview

CDMA-SYS200 : CBSC/RFDS Operations

CDMA-SYS300 : CDMA System Optimization of the RF Link

CDMA-XC100NE : XC Network Element Overview for Release


16.x

CDMA-XC100OM : Operations and Maintenance: XC

GEN-GNL010 : UNIX Commands Applied to Motorola's Network

GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals

GEN-NET200 : Sun Solaris Part 1: Basic Administration

182

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

Tiering
General Technology Tiering
Tier 1
Introductory

Course Number

GEN-ENG745 : Understanding ATM

Tier 2
Intermediate

Tier 3
Advanced

Tier
New-Tech

GEN-ENG746 : Understanding Advanced ATM

GEN-ENG934 : Understanding the Basics of Communications


Networks

GEN-ENG936 : Understanding SS7 for IN, Wireless, and VoIP

GEN-ENG937 : Understanding Wireless Internet Access

GEN-ENG939 : Understanding Emerging Technologies in 2001

GEN-ENG942 : Understanding 3G Wireless Mobile Communications

GEN-ENG943 : Understanding Emerging Wireless Technologies

GEN-ENG945 : Understanding TCP/IP

GEN-ENG947 : Understanding Voice over IP

GEN-ENG948 : Understanding Frame Relay

GEN-GNL175 : Wireless Rating and Billing Fundamentals

GEN-GNL177 : Telecommunications Customer Care

GEN-GNL178 : Telecommunications Revenue Assurance

GEN-GNL181 : ATM Over Satellite Module 1

GEN-GNL182 : ATM Over Satellite Module 2

GEN-GNL183 : IPv6 Fundamentals

GEN-GNL184 : IPv6 Advanced

GEN-GNL185 : Setting Tariffs for IP

GEN-NET110 : UNIX Part 2: Advanced Topics for Users

GEN-NET210 : Sun Solaris Part 2: Network Administration

GEN-TEL1212 : ATM Fundamentals (Module 1)

GEN-TEL1217 : ATM Fundamentals (Module 2)

GEN-TEL1218 : Understanding the Principles of LANs and


WANs

GEN-WAP101 : WAP Overview

GEN-WAP201 : Writing Static WML Pages

January 2002

Tier 4
System

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

183

184

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

General Courses
General Technology courses equip the student with the fundamental knowledge and confidence required to attend
more advanced technology and product specific courses. Whilst these courses are usually generic, it is imperative
that course descriptions are read to confirm suitability for each student.

GEN-CP03 : Introduction to SS7 Signaling.......................................................................................................... 186


GEN-CP04 : UNIX for OMC Users ...................................................................................................................... 187
GEN-CP05 : LAN/WAN Principles....................................................................................................................... 188
GEN-CP06 : Asynchronous Transfer Mode......................................................................................................... 189
GEN-CP08 : Frame Relay ................................................................................................................................... 190
GEN-CP09 : TCP/IP ............................................................................................................................................ 191
GEN-CP10 : Voice Over IP.................................................................................................................................. 192
GEN-CP11 : WAP Overview................................................................................................................................ 193
GEN-ENG745 : Understanding ATM ................................................................................................................... 194
GEN-ENG746 : Understanding Advanced ATM .................................................................................................. 195
GEN-ENG934 : Understanding the Basics of Communications Networks .......................................................... 196
GEN-ENG936 : Understanding SS7 for IN, Wireless, and VoIP.......................................................................... 197
GEN-ENG937 : Understanding Wireless Internet Access ................................................................................... 198
GEN-ENG939 : Understanding Emerging Technologies in 2001 ........................................................................ 199
GEN-ENG942 : Understanding 3G Wireless Mobile Communications................................................................ 200
GEN-ENG943 : Understanding Emerging Wireless Technologies ...................................................................... 201
GEN-ENG945 : Understanding TCP/IP ............................................................................................................... 202
GEN-ENG947 : Understanding Voice over IP ..................................................................................................... 203
GEN-ENG948 : Understanding Frame Relay ...................................................................................................... 204
GEN-GNL010 : UNIX Commands Applied to Motorola's Network....................................................................... 205
GEN-GNL175 : Wireless Rating and Billing Fundamentals................................................................................. 206
GEN-GNL177 : Telecommunications Customer Care ......................................................................................... 207
GEN-GNL178 : Telecommunications Revenue Assurance ................................................................................. 208
GEN-GNL181 : ATM Over Satellite Module 1................................................................................................... 209
GEN-GNL182 : ATM Over Satellite Module 2................................................................................................... 210
GEN-GNL183 : IPv6 Fundamentals..................................................................................................................... 211
GEN-GNL184 : IPv6 Advanced ........................................................................................................................... 212
GEN-GNL185 : Setting Tariffs for IP.................................................................................................................... 213
GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals ............................................................................................... 214
GEN-NET110 : UNIX Part 2: Advanced Topics for Users ................................................................................... 215
GEN-NET200 : Sun Solaris Part 1: Basic Administration .................................................................................... 216
GEN-NET210 : Sun Solaris Part 2: Network Administration................................................................................ 217
GEN-TEL1212 : ATM Fundamentals (Module 1)................................................................................................. 219
GEN-TEL1217 : ATM Fundamentals (Module 2)................................................................................................. 220
GEN-TEL1218 : Understanding the Principles of LANs and WANs .................................................................... 221
GEN-WAP101 : WAP Overview........................................................................................................................... 222
GEN-WAP201 : Writing Static WML Pages......................................................................................................... 223

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

185

GEN-CP03 : Introduction to SS7 Signaling

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

2 days

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


None.
However a good understanding of telecommunication
networks is desirable.

Audience
The course is intended for technical staff requiring a
detailed appreciation of the SS7 Signaling network.

Features
An instructor-led course providing a detailed
introduction to SS7 signaling network.

Course Content
This course introduces the principles of Signaling System Number 7. It covers all protocols and interaction
between applications and different layers. There is also comparison between the OSI 7 layer model and the SS7 4
level model. The course explains the interoperation of the SCCP, TCAP and MAP layers.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Describe the main layers in the OSI protocol Stack.
Illustrate the major functionality of the SS7 protocol stack and its operation in a GSM network
To explain the function of the MTP layers 1-3 and the operation of the SS7 network within the GSM network
and the expanding function of databases in the network.

186

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

GEN-CP04 : UNIX for OMC Users

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

5 days

Yes

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


None

Audience

Operational staff performing routine UNIX activities


on either the OMC-R or the OMC-G systems.
Systems engineers requiring knowledge of UNIX
particularly biased towards an OMC

Features
An instructor-led course designed to train personnel in
the UNIX operating system of the OMC platform.

Course Content
CP04 is aimed particularly at OMC operational staff requiring knowledge of the UNIX operating system, file
systems, use of commands and shell scripts.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
State what UNIX provides and categorize the main features.
Use keyboard, mouse and window controls to login and logout of a UNIX computer.
Use popular UNIX commands particularly relevant to the OMC platform.
Describe and identify the OMC-R hardware and software.
Identify the OMC-R file systems, their structure and associated commands.
Use editors to create and manage text files.
Create Shell scripts useful on the OMC platform.
Identify and control processes.
Use distributive processing commands.
Explain the need for a backup strategy and use backup commands.

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

187

GEN-CP05 : LAN/WAN Principles

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

2 days

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 Telecommunications background is essential.

Audience
The course is intended for technical staff requiring an
overview of Data-Communications.

Features
This course is designed to provide an in depth
introduction to Data Communication principles.

Course Content
This course covers generic LAN/WAN principles including an overview of Data Communications, LAN/WAN
architecture and internetworking including Gateways, Bridges and Routers.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Describe the concept of the OSI seven layer model.
Explain the origins of Local Area Networks.
Explain physical and datalink LAN architectures.
Describe LAN network protocol suites.
Explain Wide Area Network Services.
Describe Gateways, Bridges and Routers.

188

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

GEN-CP06 : Asynchronous Transfer Mode

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

2 days

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 GEN-CP05 : LAN/WAN Principles

Audience
The course is intended for technical staff requiring an
overview of Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM).

Features
An instructor-led course providing an in depth
understanding of ATM.

Course Content
The course covers generic ATM technology including protocol layers, system switching and usage.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Describe ATM in comparison to traditional WAN technologies.
Describe and explain the ATM layers.
Describe the ATM network hardware.
Explain ATM LANs.
Explain Traffic Management.

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

189

GEN-CP08 : Frame Relay

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

2 days

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 GEN-CP05 : LAN/WAN Principles

Audience
The course is intended for technical staff requiring an
overview of Frame Relay.

Features
An instructor-led course providing an understanding of
Frame Relay.

Course Content
This course covers generic frame relay principles including an overview of WANS, Packet Switching and Frame
Relay architecture/features and management.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Review the concept of Circuit and Packet Switching.
Explain the origins of Frame Relay.
Explain the principles of Frame Relay.
State the Frame Relay Structure.
Explain the concepts of Virtual Circuits.
Describe Frame Relay Management.
Explain Committed Information Rate.
Local Management Interface Procedures.
Consolidated Link Layer Management (CLLM).

190

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

GEN-CP09 : TCP/IP

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

3 days

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 GEN-CP05 : LAN/WAN Principles

Audience
This course is intended for technical staff requiring an
overview of the TCP/IP suite.

Features
An instructor-led course providing an understanding of
the TCP/IP suite.

Course Content
This course covers generic TCP/IP principles.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Explain the structure of TCP/IP protocols and its general principles.
Describe the datagram structure, addressing, subnetting and mapping IP addresses to physical network
address.
Explain the function of routers and gateways.
Describe routing protocols including Routing Information Protocol (RIP), Open Shortest Path First (OSPF),
Exterior Gateway Protocol (EGP), Border Gateway Protocol (BGP).
Describe the operation of TCP and User Datagram Protocol (UDP).
Describe and explain the Application protocols including telnet, FTP, Domain Name Service (DNS), Simple
Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) and Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

191

GEN-CP10 : Voice Over IP

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

3 days

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 GEN-CP05 : LAN/WAN Principles

Audience
The course is intended for technical staff requiring a
technical overview of Voice over IP.

Features
An instructor-led course providing an understanding of
Frame Relay.

Course Content
The course provides generic Voice Over IP (VoIP) principles training including a Review of IP and the benefits of
VoIP. Also included are a description of the VoIP Architecture and how voice is processed in IP Networks.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Upon completion of the course the student will be able to:
Describe the TCP/IP protocol suite including IP Addressing and Subnetting.
Explain benefits of implementing VoIP.
Explain the VoIP architecture including Interworking between IP and PSTN.
Describe how Voice Quality and IP Network Performance are monitored.
Explain how voice is supported in IP networks with H.323 and RSVP

192

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

GEN-CP11 : WAP Overview

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

1 day

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 GEN-CP05 : LAN/WAN Principles
2 GEN-CP09 : TCP/IP

Audience
The course is intended for technical staff requiring a
detailed appreciation of WAP and E-commerce in a
mobile environment.

Features
An instructor-led course providing a detailed
description of Wireless Application Protocol.

Course Content
The course covers generic principles of WAP including WAP architecture, protocols and interfaces. Also included
is the integration of WAP into telecom systems and networks.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Describe the functions and architecture of Wireless Application Protocol and its relationship to the internet.
Describe and explain the WAP protocols and standards.
Describe Wireless Mark-up Language, WML Script and the WAP interfaces.
Explain the benefits of using WAP over wireless networks.
Describe E-commerce within the WAP environment.

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

193

GEN-ENG745 : Understanding ATM

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

Self-paced, approximately 16 hours

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

Log onto to Motorolas Lifecycle Services On-Line


(https://services.motorola.com), and click on the Technical
Training Direct link.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


None

Audience
This course is intended for any interested student.
However, the course is best suited to those at an
intermediate experience level.

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
This module is designed to provide students with an excellent understanding of current ATM technologies, where
ATM is deployed in the network, as well as the issues involved in migrating non-ATM traffic over ATM.
Understanding ATM helps students conceptualize ATM and identify profitable ATM applications and deployment
scenarios.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to understand and identify the following:
Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) Essentials
ATM Overview
ATM Standard and Interfaces
Service Provided to Users
ATM Protocol
Selected Topics in ATM
ATM Summary

194

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

GEN-ENG746 : Understanding Advanced ATM

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

Self-paced, approximately 16 hours

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

Log onto to Motorolas Lifecycle Services On-Line


(https://services.motorola.com), and click on the Technical
Training Direct link.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 A basic understanding of ATM, either from your
own work experience or from an introductory ATM
course is helpful.

Audience
This course is intended for anyone responsible for
equipment or services employing ATM, including
systems integration, network management, public
network services, sales, and personnel dealing with
QoS issues either internally or as part of a product
support team.

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
This module is designed to provide a comprehensive appreciation of the role of ATM in today's networks. students
also gain an understanding of how ATM interworks with other networks and transports non-ATM traffic.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to understand and identify:
Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) Basics
ATM For the Public Carrier Backbone
Public Carrier ATM Service Interworking
ATM over Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line (ADSL)
Video over ATM
Switching and Routing over ATM
Private ATM Wide Area Networks (WANs)
QoS in ATM and IP

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

195

GEN-ENG934 : Understanding the Basics of


Communications Networks
Duration

Practical/Lab Content

Self-paced, approximately 16 hours

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

Log onto to Motorolas Lifecycle Services On-Line


(https://services.motorola.com), and click on the Technical
Training Direct link.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


None

Audience
This course is intended for students who need to
understand the fundamentals of switching, signaling or
transmission, enhance your ability to explain complex
communications concepts, or identify and compare
competitive technologies

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
This module is designed to broaden the student's comprehension of current and emerging communications
networks enabling them to easily identify the major components of telephone networks and enhance their ability to
analyze the benefits of various technologies. students will examine the current industry structure establishing an
appreciation of market motivations as well as explore the network services typically available.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
understand how today's network operates
understand how it has evolved from its analog roots
understand how it is now transitioning from circuit to packet

196

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

GEN-ENG936 : Understanding SS7 for IN, Wireless, and


VoIP
Duration

Practical/Lab Content

Self-paced, approximately 16 hours

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

Log onto to Motorolas Lifecycle Services On-Line


(https://services.motorola.com), and click on the Technical
Training Direct link.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


A solid, mid-level understanding of
telecommunications equivalent to ENG934 and
ENG936.

Audience
This course is intended for network planners, design
and systems engineers, equipment and service
product managers, and sales and network support
specialists who need to understand Signaling System
Number 7 and its evolving role in any of a variety of
networks.

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
This module is designed to provide a comprehensive explanation of how SS7 protocols work in current
telecommunications networks, including Intelligent Networks, and how SS7 is evolving and being deployed for
Wireless and VoIP networks based on emerging standards.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
understand how and why SS7 is used for call control and supports new services using Intelligent Networks as
well as the Wireless and VoIP environments

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

197

GEN-ENG937 : Understanding Wireless Internet Access

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

Self-paced, approximately 16 hours

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

Log onto to Motorolas Lifecycle Services On-Line


(https://services.motorola.com), and click on the Technical
Training Direct link.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 A basic understanding of wireless communications
and of fundamental Internet technologies, including
Transmission Control Protocol / Internet Protocol
(TCP/IP), and digital and cellular technologies.

Audience
Students who need a comprehensive overview of
Mobile Data Applications, networks, and protocols will
benefit from attending this course.

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
This module is designed to provide you with a comprehensive understanding of how today's wireless networks are
being extended to support Mobile IP/Wireless IP and GPRS. Scenarios are presented from IS-835 (TIA's wireless
IP standard) and GPRS (ETSI's General Packet Radio Service), which explain the fundamentals of mobile Internet
access. With this as the foundation, the emphasis of the course shifts to show how each of the major GSM GSM,
TDMA, and CDMA Digital Cellular / PCS technologies is evolving to 3G capabilities for providing higher bit rate
services and new multimedia capabilities.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
understand how the Internet is evolving to support Mobile IP networking as well as the current and future
evolution of data capabilities in GSM and 3G Digital Cellular / PCS systems

198

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

GEN-ENG939 : Understanding Emerging Technologies in


2001
Duration

Practical/Lab Content

Self-paced, approximately 24 hours

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

Log onto to Motorolas Lifecycle Services On-Line


(https://services.motorola.com), and click on the Technical
Training Direct link.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 Completion of entry-level communications training,
including the basics of communications networks,
data Communications, and wireless
communications.

Audience
Students who need a comprehensive overview of
emerging technologies in the communications
industry.

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
This module is designed to provide a comprehensive understanding of the wide range of emerging technologies
and a clear perspective of what's in store for the near future.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Make sound decisions regarding which technologies are becoming popular and are projected to become
extremely important in the future.

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

199

GEN-ENG942 : Understanding 3G Wireless Mobile


Communications
Duration

Practical/Lab Content

Self-paced, approximately 16 hours

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

Log onto to Motorolas Lifecycle Services On-Line


(https://services.motorola.com), and click on the Technical
Training Direct link.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 A basic comprehension of digital cellular and GSM
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
technologies and wireless communications.

Audience
This course is intended for anyone who wants to
understand next generation wireless mobile
communications, as well as the technologies that
enable it.

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
This module is designed to provide a a basic understanding of the future growth in high-bandwidth wireless
services. The major impetus for the investment in 3G (currently well over $4 billion) is the present trend of wired
data's double-digit growth rates. Wireless growth is expected to follow wired growth as more and more
businesses look for alternatives to the incumbent telephone company's ability to meet increasing bandwidth
needs.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
To understand the possible flavors of 3G systems expected in the near future.
To discover how current GSM systems form the technical foundation for the 3G systems of tomorrow.
To discuss and compare 3G proposals, as well as the capabilities and service sets 3G systems will offer.

200

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

GEN-ENG943 : Understanding Emerging Wireless


Technologies
Duration

Practical/Lab Content

Self-paced, approximately 16 hours

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

Log onto to Motorolas Lifecycle Services On-Line


(https://services.motorola.com), and click on the Technical
Training Direct link.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


Basic knowledge of the wireless cellular industry,
along with First Generation (1G) and Second
Generation (GSM) wireless systems.

Audience
This course is intended for account representatives,
programmers, communications or operations
managers, and system engineers.

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
This module is designed to provide students with an objective overview of the wide range of emerging wireless
technologies, a comprehensive understanding of the many voice and data services available in the market today,
as well as what's in store for the near future.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
identify the basics of Third Generation (3G) systems
identify in-building wireless systems
identify how wireless systems offer quickly-deployed solutions for data-hungry customers

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

201

GEN-ENG945 : Understanding TCP/IP

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

Self-paced, approximately 16 hours

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

Log onto to Motorolas Lifecycle Services On-Line


(https://services.motorola.com), and click on the Technical
Training Direct link.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


None

Audience
This course is intended for anyone who wants a
detailed technical overview of TCP/IP and related
protocols.

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
This module is designed to provide students with a good understanding of the TCP/IP suite so they can evaluate
the potential communication opportunities it presents. They will be able to discuss it technically and professionally
with colleagues and customers alike and will be able to make intelligent decisions, not only for their own
companys needs, but also for those of their clients and customers.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to understand and identify the basics of:
Internet Protocol (IP) Addressing and Routing
Transmission Control Protocol (TCP)
User Datagram Protocol (UDP)
Quality of Service (QoS)
Related Protocols and Applications
Network Security

202

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

GEN-ENG947 : Understanding Voice over IP

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

Self-paced, approximately 16 hours

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

Log onto to Motorolas Lifecycle Services On-Line


(https://services.motorola.com), and click on the Technical
Training Direct link.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


None

Audience
This course is intended for anyone who needs to
understand Voice over IP (VoIP) and its impact on
current networks.

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
This module is designed to enable students to gain an understanding of Voice over IP and its impact on current
networks and provide a comprehensive examination of the applications and services available for IP. students will
explore the process of migrating voice traffic to packet-based networking solutions as well as examine the
business forces driving integration of communications services over IP networks and the services in store for the
near term.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to understand and identify:
VoIP applications and services
internet protocol (IP)
protocols for VoIP call control
the public switched telephone network (PSTN) and VoIP interworking
the basics of voice coding, fax, and delay

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

203

GEN-ENG948 : Understanding Frame Relay

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

Self-paced, approximately 16 hours

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

Log onto to Motorolas Lifecycle Services On-Line


(https://services.motorola.com), and click on the Technical
Training Direct link.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


None

Audience
This course is intended for applications engineers,
sales and marketing personnel, planners, end-user
management, network operations personnel, and
consultants.

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
This module is designed to provide students with an understanding of network solutions based on Frame Relay.
students will acquire a basic understanding of Frame Relay as a protocol, how Frame Relay networks are
designed, engineering considerations for Frame Relay solutions, and how Frame Relay networks are managed.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to understand and identify:
frame relay standards activity
inside the frame relay protocol
frame relay popularity
customer network management (CNM)
frame relay implementation
frame relay and ATM interworking
frame relay end to end
engineering a frame relay solution
management, service configuration, and troubleshooting

204

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

GEN-GNL010 : UNIX Commands Applied to Motorola's


Network
Duration

Practical/Lab Content

5 days

No

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

Offered by the Latin America and Caribbean Motorola


training facilities only, or other premises by
arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM
2 CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)

Audience
System Engineers, Field Engineers and Technicians
involved with Motorola's network operation and
Maintenance tasks.

Features
Offered in LAC only as an option to taking both GENNET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals and GEN-NET200 :
Sun Solaris Part 1: Basic Administration.

Course Content
This course presents the UNIX commands and concepts that are most used in Motorola's network. Those UNIX
commands are needed to perform several tasks in Motorola's network, such as operation and maintenance of
CBSC, SwitchMATE, UNIX LMF, NetPlan and UNO.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
identify and execute the UNIX commands used in Motorola's network operation and maintenance tasks.
In this course, you will learn:
handling of files using vi editor
Manage file access permissions
User maintenance
Control processes
command execution scheduling
Shell programming
File directory structure

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

205

GEN-GNL175 : Wireless Rating and Billing Fundamentals

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

Self-paced, approximately 3 hours

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

Log onto to Motorolas Lifecycle Services On-Line


(https://services.motorola.com), and click on the Technical
Training Direct link.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


None

Audience
The main target audience groups for this course are:
Customer Service Representatives of wireless service
providers
Billing clerks for wireless billers
Recent computer science graduates employed in the
wireless industry
Those who need to understand wireless
communication technology from a billing perspective

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
This module is designed to provide a comprehensive overview of rating and billing procedures for wireless
telecommunications service providers.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
define the common European and North American wireless standards
identify the components and structure of a wireless network
list the components of a wireless Event Detail Record, and identify how these are used in wireless billing
list typical wireless charge types, pricing components, billing cycles, roaming parameters, and billing media
list the steps required to produce a customer invoice
define 'Interconnect Accounting'

206

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

GEN-GNL177 : Telecommunications Customer Care

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

Self-paced, approximately 3 hours

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

Log onto to Motorolas Lifecycle Services On-Line


(https://services.motorola.com), and click on the Technical
Training Direct link.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 A general understanding of wireline and wireless
telecommunications products and services.

Audience
The main target audience groups for this course are:
Customer service representatives (CSRs) of
telecommunications service providers
Marketing and billing representatives of
telecommunications service providers
Persons needing to understand the customer care
function within a telecommunications company

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
This module is designed to provide a comprehensive overview of customer care principles and procedures
relevant to the telecommunications industry.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
define the significance of customer care for a telecommunications company
identify the different steps of the customer contact cycle, and their importance to the customer-telco
relationship
identify account set-up, maintenance, and closing procedures
identify the typical telecommunications services, and how they are sold
identify service activation procedures
define the use of account hierarchies in multiple account management
identify the steps involved granting or restricting credit to accounts
identify the process of generating and delivering invoices
identify a range of payment types and their processing
identify account investigation and adjustment procedures

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

207

GEN-GNL178 : Telecommunications Revenue Assurance

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

Self-paced, approximately 3 hours

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

Log onto to Motorolas Lifecycle Services On-Line


(https://services.motorola.com), and click on the Technical
Training Direct link.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 A general understanding of wireline and wireless
telecommunications products and services.

Audience
The main target audience groups for this course are:
Customer service representatives (CSRs) of
telecommunications service providers
Marketing and billing representatives of
telecommunications service providers
Persons needing to understand the customer care
function within a telecommunications company

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
This module is designed to provide a comprehensive overview of revenue assurance principles and procedures
relevant to the telecommunications industry.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
define the role of 'revenue assurance' for a telecommunications service provider
identify the activities involved in ensuring billing integrity
identify strategies for managing account and usage fraud, and bad debt
identify strategies for managing customer credit
identify collection management strategies
define 'customer churn' and identify strategies for managing it
identify how customer service and revenue assurance demands may be balanced
identify the role of the billing system in revenue assurance

208

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

GEN-GNL181 : ATM Over Satellite Module 1

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

Self-paced, approximately 3 hours

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

Log onto to Motorolas Lifecycle Services On-Line


(https://services.motorola.com), and click on the Technical
Training Direct link.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 TEL1212 ATM Fundamentals Module 1
2 TEL1217 ATM Fundamentals Module 2

Audience
This course is aimed at the following target groups:
Technical staff needing an introduction to ATM over
Satellite
Staff in organizations providing products that use ATM
over Satellite
Non-technical staff (including management) requiring
knowledge of the fundamentals of ATM over Satellite
technology
Persons with a general knowledge of
telecommunications wishing to learn about ATM over
Satellite

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
This module is designed to provide a comprehensive overview of the use of ATM as a transport technology for
satellite. The components of a satellite communications system are described and the different standards
organizations introduced. The course also considers the principal issues in using ATM over satellite, including
error rates and propagation delays. Finally, the principal types of satellite architectures for ATM over satellite
systems are considered.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
outline the key components of a satellite communications system
list the main benefits of ATM over satellite
identify the different standards bodies and organizations involved
describe key issues in the use of ATM over satellite
outline the Bent-Pipe and Onboard Processing architectures, as used by ATM satellite systems

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

209

GEN-GNL182 : ATM Over Satellite Module 2

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

Self-paced, approximately 3 hours

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

Log onto to Motorolas Lifecycle Services On-Line


(https://services.motorola.com), and click on the Technical
Training Direct link.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 GEN-TEL1212 : ATM Fundamentals (Module 1)
2 GEN-TEL1217 : ATM Fundamentals (Module 2)
3 GEN-GNL181 : ATM Over Satellite Module 1

Audience
This course is aimed at the following target groups:
Technical staff working in the area of ATM over
Satellite who need to enhance their knowledge of that
area
Non-technical staff (including management) with a
basic knowledge of ATM over Satellite who need a
deeper understanding of this area

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
This module is designed to provide further details on ATM over satellite systems introduced in ATM over Satellite
Module 1. In particular, the course examines satellite access and Quality of Service issues, multiplexing in
onboard processing satellite systems, error coding schemes, and antenna systems. The course introduces
examples of satellite networks that use ATM, and considers a number of relevant research projects.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
identify the features of satellite access and Quality of Service (QoS)
describe multiplexing in Onboard Processing (OBP) systems
identify the characteristics of error coding and antennas
offer examples of satellite networks using ATM
offer examples of projects involving ATM over satellite

210

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

GEN-GNL183 : IPv6 Fundamentals

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

Self-paced, approximately 3 hours

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

Log onto to Motorolas Lifecycle Services On-Line


(https://services.motorola.com), and click on the Technical
Training Direct link.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 Basic knowledge of network principles
2 Basic knowledge of packet-switched networks
3 Basic knowledge of IPv4

Audience
The primary target audience groups for this course
are:
satellite and terrestrial telecommunications service
provider employees
satellite manufacturer employees
organizations affected by developments in
telecommunications technologies

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
This module is designed to provide a comprehensive overview of IPv6, the latest level of the Internet Protocol.
The course will consider the development of IPv6 as a consequence of the shortcomings of IPv4 and of the
development of new technologies. Details of the IPv6 packet structure, address options and addressing
mechanisms are given. This course also considers the benefits IPv6 brings to certain application areas.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
identify the shortcomings of IPv4 and the need for a 'next generation' version of the Internet Protocol
describe the structure of IPv6
list the enhanced features of IPv6
describe IPv6 Addressing Types
describe the IPv6 benefits that IPv6 has to offer to the business community

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

211

GEN-GNL184 : IPv6 Advanced

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

Self-paced, approximately 3 hours

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

Log onto to Motorolas Lifecycle Services On-Line


(https://services.motorola.com), and click on the Technical
Training Direct link.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 Basic knowledge of network principles
2 Basic knowledge of packet-switched networks
3 Basic knowledge of IPv4
4 GEN-GNL183 : IPv6 Fundamentals

Audience
The primary target audience groups for this course are:
satellite and terrestrial telecommunications service
provider employees
satellite manufacturer employees
organizations affected by developments in
telecommunications technologies

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
This module is designed to following on from IPv6 Fundamentals. Particularly close attention is given to optional
header extensions, security issues, traffic types and flow. In addition, the various associated protocols (ICMP,
DNS, etc.) are considered. The course also includes details of IPv4-to-IPv6 transition options.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
describe the IPv6 neighbor discovery process
describe the IPv6 address auto configuration process
describe the IPv6 extension headers structure and functionality
describe network security issues considered in the development of IPv6
identify the implications of IPv6 for associated IP protocols
identify a range of IPv4-to-IPv6 transition options
describe the 6bone system
summarize the advantages of IPv6

212

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

GEN-GNL185 : Setting Tariffs for IP

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

Self-paced, approximately 3 hours

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

Log onto to Motorolas Lifecycle Services On-Line


(https://services.motorola.com), and click on the Technical
Training Direct link.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 GEN-GNL175 : Wireless Rating and Billing Fundamentals
2 An understanding of how charges are calculated for
wireline and wireless telecommunication events
3 A basic understanding of telecommunications and
IP technology
4 A basic knowledge of the wireless service provision
industry

Audience
The main target audience groups for this course are:
Customer Service Representatives involved in
interactions that require an in-depth understanding of
IP services and how these services are charged to the
customer
Accounting staff and billing representatives who
require an understanding of the calculation of charges
for IP service
Systems developers and maintenance staff involved in
developing and maintaining billing systems for IP
services

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
This module is designed to provide comprehensive details tariffing for IP services, and for the new telephony
services delivered over an IP framework. An overview is given of the IP services common in today's market, with
in-depth explanations of the tariffing options currently available. North American, European, and Asian markets
are compared in terms of IP tariffing, and examples provided to illustrate the tariffing methods commonly used in
each of these areas.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
identify the challenges presented by IP tariffing to the established tariffing models of the telecommunications
industry
define tariffing models currently used in North America, Europe, and Asia
define usage-based IP tariffing, and its variations
define flat-rate tariffing for IP and Voice-over-IP applications
define xDSL tariffing
define packaged IP tariffing, and explain how this is applied to residential and corporate customers

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

213

GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

Self-paced, approx. 6-8 hours

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


None

Audience
End User, Application Developer, Technical Manager,
System Analyst, System Administrator, Software
Engineer, Database Administrator, Help Desk/
Support.

Features
CD-ROM

Course Content
The UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals course is the first in a series of 10 courses on the UNIX operating system. It
describes how to get started with UNIX, introducing the Common Desktop Environment (CDE) and the terminal
window. It introduces files, directories, and printing and operations frequently performed on these. It teaches how
to manipulate input and output, as well as how to compress and uncompress files. It also introduces the UNIX
shell environment, shell functionality, and text patterns.

Course Objectives
Upon completion the student will be able to:
Identify the differences between working with windows and with shells.
Identify the features of X-windows.
Identify the components of the Common Desktop Environment (CDE).
Identify the command options used to change directories.
Identify print commands for printing options in System V.
Identify the functions of filters and pipes.
Identify ways of manipulating shell variables.
Identify the methods for condensing command names by using wildcards and metacharacters.

214

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

GEN-NET110 : UNIX Part 2: Advanced Topics for Users

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

Self-paced, approx. 6-8 hours

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


None

Audience
The intended audience for this series of courses are
End Users, Application Developers, Technical
Managers, System Analysts, System Administrators,
Software Engineers, Database Administrators, Help
Desk/Support.

Features
CD-ROM

Course Content
The second course in the UNIX curriculum teaches end users a little about how UNIX works and handles
resources. It shows how UNIX can be best used by advanced users in a UNIX-based enterprise. This course can
even act as a starting primer for users interested in becoming administrators.

Course Objectives
Upon completion the student will be able to:
Identify the hardware requirements for a UNIX system
Identify the features of job control
Identify the guidelines for managing disk space usage
Identify the benefits of networking
Identify the features of Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)
Identify the requirements for remote access
Identify the features of Network Information Services (NIS)
Identify the features of Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP)

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

215

GEN-NET200 : Sun Solaris Part 1: Basic Administration

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

Self-paced, approx. 6-8 hours

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals

Audience
System Manager, System Administrator, System
Analyst, Web Administrator, Database Administrator,
Mail Administrator, Network Engineers.

Features
CD-ROM-based training.

Course Content
The first course in the Sun Solaris implementation track covers basic user and system administration in the Solaris
environment. It focuses on the common skills that an administrator will perform and how they are handled in this
flavor of Unix.

Course Objectives
Upon completion the student will be able to:
Identify the functions of the Unix system administrator
Identify the features of the Solaris operating environment
Identify the methods for installing Solaris
Identify the commands used to manage groups with the CLI
Identify the features of Solaris physical disk partitions
Identify the types of Solaris file systems
Identify the ps command options
Identify the features of system message logging
Identify the function of system monitoring

216

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

GEN-NET210 : Sun Solaris Part 2: Network Administration

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

Self-paced, approx. 6-8 hours

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


None

Audience
System Manager, System Administrator, System
Analyst, Web Administrator, Database Administrator,
Mail Administrator, Network Engineers. Specifying,
installing and administering UNIX systems in small to
large enterprises. Administering applications running
on UNIX systems (both hardware and software).
Managing users and security. Providing advanced help
desk and information services.

Features
CD-ROM

Course Content
This second course in the Sun Solaris implementation track covers internetworking connectivity, systems,
services, and security. Wherever possible, It focus's on the tools and features specific to Solaris.

Course Objectives
Upon completion the student will be able to:
Identify the characteristics of the print service
Identify the CLI commands used to add a network printer
Identify the CLI commands used to manage print queues and jobs
Identify the features of computer networks
Identify the components that configure TCP/IP
Identify the features of the TCP/IP-related commands
Identify the features of the NFS service
Identify the features of automounter
Identify features of e-mail services
Identify the characteristics of sendmail
Identify the features of POP3.

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

217

GEN-OMC-G103 : Windows NT4.0 Core Technologies

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

5 days

Yes

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

Please note that this course is ONLY available as a


buyout, which may be delivered globally at a
recognized Motorola training facility, or other premises
by arrangement. Please contact Motorola Training to
arrange this course.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 No Motorola courses; however, an operational
understanding of computers is essential.

Audience
This training is aimed at potential OMC-G system
administrators so that they may gain the fundamental
Windows NT4.0 knowledge to attend the GPRS-OMCG105 : OMC-G System Administration course.

Features
An instructor-led course with practical exercises
designed to train staff in the system administration of
Windows NT4.0.

Course Content
This course includes the Windows NT architecture, file systems supported by Windows NT, Redundant Array of
Inexpensive Data (RAID) variations, networking environments, and partitioning.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Describe the Windows NT system architecture components.
Explain the differences between domains and workgroups
Install Windows NT
Describe the purpose of the Windows NT registry
Describe how system policy works
Explain the difference between the FAT and NTFS file systems
Describe the types of partitions available in Windows NT

218

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

GEN-TEL1212 : ATM Fundamentals (Module 1)

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

Self-paced, approximately 3 hours

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

Log onto to Motorolas Lifecycle Services On-Line


(https://services.motorola.com), and click on the Technical
Training Direct link.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


None

Audience
This course is intended for technical staff needing an
introduction to ATM, support staff (including training
and customer care) in organizations providing
products that use ATM. non-technical staff (including
management) requiring knowledge of the
fundamentals of ATM technology, and persons with a
general knowledge of telecommunications wishing to
learn about ATM.

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
This module is designed to provide an overview of the Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) network. In particular,
this module will consider the switching mechanisms used by the ATM network and ATM cells.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
define Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM)
outline the history and origins of ATM
describe ATM network services
distinguish between virtual channels and virtual paths
describe the different network nodes and their interfaces
outline the components of an ATM cell
describe the Cell Relay process
outline the Protocol Reference Model

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

219

GEN-TEL1217 : ATM Fundamentals (Module 2)

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

Self-paced

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

Log onto to Motorolas Lifecycle Services On-Line


(https://services.motorola.com), and click on the Technical
Training Direct link.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 GEN-TEL1212 : ATM Fundamentals (Module 1)

Audience
This course is intended for technical staff needing an
introduction to ATM, support staff (including training
and customer care) in organizations providing products
that use ATM, non-technical staff (including
management) requiring knowledge of the
fundamentals of ATM technology, and persons with a
general knowledge of telecommunications wishing to
learn about ATM.

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
This module is designed to provide an overview of the Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) network. In particular,
this module will consider the ATM protocol stack, signaling, Quality of Service, and Network Management.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
describe the function of the ATM, ATM adaptation, and ATM physical layer(s)
identify the ATM signaling protocols
outline the main steps in ATM UNI signaling
outline the function of the Signaling ATM Adaptation Layer
identify the traffic types supported by an ATM network
describe the techniques used by ATM networks to manage congestion
describe the network management reference model

220

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

GEN-TEL1218 : Understanding the Principles of LANs and


WANs
Duration

Practical/Lab Content

Self-paced, approximately 16 hours

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

Log onto to Motorolas Lifecycle Services On-Line


(https://services.motorola.com), and click on the Technical
Training Direct link.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


None

Audience
Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
This module is designed to provide students with an excellent overview of how modern communication networks
function by examining LANs, WANs, Internet Protocol, and evolving data networks.This course prepares the
student to confidently discuss LAN/WAN technologies such as Ethernet, xDSL, ATM, Frame Relay, and TCP/IP,
and increases the students comfort level with the services and equipment available in today's marketplace.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
understand the fundamental concepts associated with LAN and WAN technologies, standards, operations, and
internetworking
explain the potential of Local and Wide Area Networks
discuss networking technologies and concepts

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

221

GEN-WAP101 : WAP Overview

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

Self-paced

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

Log onto to Motorolas Lifecycle Services On-Line


(https://services.motorola.com), and click on the Technical
Training Direct link.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


None

Audience
This course is intended for WAP developers.

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
This module is designed to provide a provide a basic understanding of the history, architecture, and development
requirements for Wireless Application Protocol (WAP) programming. The learning activities have been designed to
introduce developers to the practical world of WAP communications, wireless devices and their WAP functionality,
markup languages and scripting, and development tools.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
begin learning WAP program development'

222

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

GEN-WAP201 : Writing Static WML Pages

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

Self-paced

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

Log onto to Motorolas Lifecycle Services On-Line


(https://services.motorola.com), and click on the Technical
Training Direct link.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 GEN-WAP101 : WAP Overview

Audience
This course is intended for WAP developers.

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
This module is designed to provide developers with an overview of WML and the background information and
basic skills needed to begin creating useful, commercial WAP applications using the Motorola Application
Development Toolkit.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to perform the following WAP / WML functions:
write a single card deck
create navigation
use timers
create a list of choices
use WML variables
acquire text input
use images
Create an optional head section of a WML document

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

223

224

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

CDMA Courses
CDMA Technology courses equip the student with the knowledge required to commission, maintain, monitor and
optimize digital CDMA networks. It is imperative that course descriptions are read to confirm suitability for each
student and to ensure that all prerequisite training is completed.

CDMA-AGN100NE : AGNODE Network Element Overview for Release 16.x .................................................... 227
CDMA-BTS120 : SC 9600 Base Transceiver Station (CDMA) ........................................................................ 229
CDMA-BTS330 : SC 2400 Base Transceiver Station with ELPA (CDMA/SAS)............................................... 230
CDMA-BTS440 : SC 614 Base Transceiver Station (CDMA) .......................................................................... 231
CDMA-BTS610 : SC 4812ET Base Transceiver Station (CDMA) (Trunked) ................................................... 232
CDMA-BTS710 : SC 4812T Base Transceiver Station (CDMA) (Trunked)...................................................... 233
CDMA-BTS810 : SC 4812ET LITE Base Transceiver Station (CDMA) (Trunked)........................................... 234
CDMA-BTS840 : SC 614T Base Transceiver Station (CDMA) ........................................................................ 235
CDMA-ENG935 : Understanding CDMA ............................................................................................................. 236
CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM ............................................................................................ 237
CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA) ................................................................................. 238
CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling....................................................................................... 239
CDMA-GNL130 : 1X Overview ............................................................................................................................ 240
CDMA-GNL131 : e1X Overview (Web-based)..................................................................................................... 241
CDMA-GNL174 : CDMA Technology................................................................................................................... 242
CDMA-GNL800 : IS-95 CDMA Technology......................................................................................................... 243
CDMA-GNL810 : CDMA 2000 / 1XRTT............................................................................................................... 244
CDMA-GNL820 : IS-95 & CDMA 2000 / 1XRTT.................................................................................................. 245
CDMA-MLS100NE : MLS Network Element Overview for Release 16.x............................................................. 246
CDMA-MLS100OM : Operations and Maintenance: MLS ................................................................................... 247
CDMA-MM100NE : Mobility Manager Network Element Overview for G16.x Release ....................................... 248
CDMA-MM100OM : Operations and Maintenance: MM ...................................................................................... 249
CDMA-OMCP100NE : OMC-IP Network Element Overview for G16.x Release ................................................. 250
CDMA-OMCR100A : 1X Cellular Database Administration ................................................................................. 251
CDMA-OMCR100NE : OMC-R Network Element Overview for Release 16.x .................................................... 252
CDMA-OMCR100OM : Operations and Maintenance: OMCR ............................................................................ 253
CDMA-OMCR101 : SUN OMC-R (CDMA)....................................................................................................... 254
CDMA-PER130 : NetPlan CDMA ........................................................................................................................ 255
CDMA-PER140 : SwitchMATE and SwitchMATE II Operations..................................................................... 256
CDMA-PER200 : K-Series Fundamentals ........................................................................................................... 257
CDMA-PER210 : IS-41 Operation ....................................................................................................................... 258
CDMA-PER220 : Message Register (MR)........................................................................................................... 259
CDMA-PER230 : DMX Home Location Register (DMX HLR).............................................................................. 260
CDMA-PER250 : System Monitoring Application Processor (SMAP).................................................................. 261
CDMA-PER270 : Compaq HLR41/AC ................................................................................................................. 262
CDMA-PER280 : CALEA Wiretap Network Implementation................................................................................ 263
CDMA-PER290 : CALEA Wiretap Network Operations and Maintenance .......................................................... 264
CDMA-PER300 : NetPlan .................................................................................................................................... 265
CDMA-PER330: High Density IWU ..................................................................................................................... 266
CDMA-PER350 : NetPlan Fundamentals Plus CDMA......................................................................................... 267
CDMA-PER360 : NetPlan CDMA RF System Design ......................................................................................... 268
CDMA-PER380 : High Speed Packet Data (IWU) ............................................................................................... 269
January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

225

CDMA Courses
CDMA-PER400 : LMF for Windows Operations (CDMA)................................................................................. 270
CDMA-PER440 : NetPlan 5.0 System Availability Workshop .............................................................................. 271
CDMA-PER450 : UNO Element Manager............................................................................................................ 272
CDMA-PER460 : UNO Market Manager.............................................................................................................. 273
CDMA-PER550 : WAP Server Overview and Operations.................................................................................... 274
CDMA-PER640 : S-Series Fundamentals ........................................................................................................... 275
CDMA-S2K320 : 3G CDMA 2000 Implementation and Operational Issues......................................................... 276
CDMA-S2K400 : WCDMA for UMTS: Guided Tour of the Physical Layer........................................................... 277
CDMA-SAO100 : Advanced Scenario Workshop ................................................................................................ 278
CDMA-SAO110 : IOS........................................................................................................................................... 279
CDMA-SAO190 : Performance Management ...................................................................................................... 280
CDMA-SAO210 : CBSC Operations for BTS Technicians................................................................................... 281
CDMA-SAWR150B : R15 System Availability Workshop Tools........................................................................ 282
CDMA-SAWR150C : R15 System Availability Workshop BTS/CBSC .............................................................. 283
CDMA-SAWS150 : S15 System Availability Workshop ....................................................................................... 284
CDMA-SWT110 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance (Week 1)........................................................... 285
CDMA-SWT120 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance (Week 2)........................................................... 286
CDMA-SWT130 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance (Week 3)........................................................... 287
CDMA-SWT150 : EMX Advanced..................................................................................................................... 288
CDMA-SWT160 : DMX ........................................................................................................................................ 289
CDMA-SWT180 : Managing Switch Performance and Growth............................................................................ 290
CDMA-SWT240 : EMX Translations (International) .......................................................................................... 291
CDMA-SWT260 : CCS/SS7 Implementation ....................................................................................................... 292
CDMA-SWT270 : CCS/C7 Implementation.......................................................................................................... 293
CDMA-SWT280 : Split Mode Operation and Maintenance .................................................................................. 294
CDMA-SWT281 : SLIC II Operations................................................................................................................... 295
CDMA-SWT340 : EMX 5000 Overview............................................................................................................. 296
CDMA-SWT370 : EMX-V Implementation/Migration......................................................................................... 297
CDMA-SWT440 : EMX-V Translations.............................................................................................................. 298
CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance......................................................................................... 299
CDMA-SYS100OM : 1X Operations and Maintenance: Overview....................................................................... 300
CDMA-SYS200 : CBSC/RFDS Operations.......................................................................................................... 301
CDMA-SYS300 : CDMA System Optimization of the RF Link ............................................................................. 303
CDMA-XC100NE : XC Network Element Overview for Release 16.x.................................................................. 304
CDMA-XC100OM : Operations and Maintenance: XC ........................................................................................ 305

226

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

CDMA-AGN100NE : AGNODE Network Element Overview


for Release 16.x
Duration

Practical/Lab Content

4 Hours

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

Log onto to Motorolas Lifecycle Services On-Line


(https://services.motorola.com), and click on the Technical
Training Direct link.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM
2 CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
3 CDMA-GNL130 : 1X Overview

Audience
Wireless Operators who will be responsible for the
installation and maintenance of the AGNODE for the
16.x release.

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
This module is designed to cover the AGNODE components description and installation in relationship to the 16.x
release.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of the course the student will be able to:
Identify how the AGNODE hardware fits into the network
Describe the purpose of the AGNODE hardware in the R16 network
Describe frame and card/slot components
Identify cabling interface
Describe installation and post-installation of terminal

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

227

CDMA-AGN100OM : Operations and Maintenance:


AGNODE
Duration

Practical/Lab Content

4 Hours

Yes

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM
2 CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
3 GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals
4 CDMA-AGN100NE : AGNODE Network Element Overview for
Release 16.x
5 CDMA-SYS100OM : 1X Operations and Maintenance:
Overview

Audience
Personnel involved in the day-to-day operations and
maintenance of a Motorola digital network, specifically
the Aggregation Node (AGNODE).

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This module is designed to provide operators with product knowledge on the Aggregation Node (AGNODE) and
hands-on experience in their critical on-site tasks relating to the AGNODE.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of the course the student will be able to:
Describe how the AGNODE hardware fits into the G16.x System Architecture
Describe the basic hardware components of the AGNODE.
Explain the AGNODE packet pipe configuration.
Describe how packet switched data flows through the Access Node.
Monitor AGNODE alarms.
Perform Device State Management on the AGNODE.
Identify new 1X alarms that impact the AGNODE

228

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

CDMA-BTS120 : SC 9600 Base Transceiver Station


(CDMA)
Duration

Practical/Lab Content

5 days

Yes

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

Offered by the Latin America and Caribbean Motorola


training facilities only, or other premises by
arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM
2 CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
3 Working knowledge of/or experience with Code
Division Multiple Access (CDMA) or cellular system
technologies.

Audience
People involved with the optimization and
maintenance of the SC 9600 BTS

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This module describes the subsystems, functionality, and operation of the SC 9600 Base Transceiver Station
(BTS) for Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA). Hands-on laboratory activities allow the student to perform
optimization, calibration, and Acceptance Test Procedures (ATPs) on the SC 9600 BTS.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of the course the student will be able to:
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to perform optimization, calibration, ATPs on the SC
9600 CDMA BTS. In this course you will learn to:
identify components, functionality, frame features, and configurations used with the RF Modem Frame
(RFMF), Site Interface Frame (SIF), Expandable Linear Power Amplifier (ELPA) frame and Linear Power
Amplifier (LPA) frame
describe features specific to the Local Maintenance Facility (LMF) including command use and functionality
optimize the BTS including:
download of the BTS
verification of the RF paths within the BTS
calibrate the transmit and receive paths of the BTS, including download and verification of bay level offsets
perform Acceptance Test Procedures (ATP)

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

229

CDMA-BTS330 : SC 2400 Base Transceiver Station with


ELPA (CDMA/SAS)
Duration

Practical/Lab Content

7 days

Yes

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

Offered by the Latin America and Caribbean Motorola


training facilities only, or other premises by
arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM
2 CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
3 Working Knowledge of/or experience with Code
Division Multiple Access (CDMA) or cellular system
technologies

Audience
People involved with optimization and maintenance of
the SC2400 (CDMA/SAS)

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This course describes the subsystems, functionality and operation of the SC2400 Base Transceiver Station
(BTS) for Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) and Analog Cellular System (SAS). Hands-on laboratory
activities allow the student to perform optimization, calibration and Acceptance Tests Procedures (ATPs) on the
SC2400 BTS.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
perform optimization, calibration and ATPs on the SC2400 CDMA/SAS BTS.
In this course, the student will learn to:
Identify components, functionality, frame features, and configurations used within the RF Modem Frame
(RFMF).
Describe features specific to the Windows Local Maintenance Facility (WLMF).
Optimize the BTS including:
Download of the BTS
Verification of the RF paths within the BTS
Calibrate the transmit and receive paths of the BTS, including download and verification of Bay Level Offsets
(BLO)
Perform Acceptance Test Procedures (ATP).

230

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

CDMA-BTS440 : SC 614 Base Transceiver Station


(CDMA)
Duration

Practical/Lab Content

5 days

Yes

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

Offered by the Latin America and Caribbean Motorola


training facilities only, or other premises by
arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM
2 CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
3 Working experience with/knowledge of Code
Division Multiple Access (CDMA) or cellular system
technologies.

Audience
Personnel involved in calibration, optimization,
maintenance, acceptance test, and troubleshooting
procedures for the SC 614 (CDMA) BTS.

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This module provides a functional description of the SC 614 (CDMA) Base Transceiver Station (BTS) and all
necessary ancillary components of the SC 614 (CDMA) BTS platform. Test procedures are introduced to enable
the student to perform optimization and ATP testing of the SC 614 (CDMA) BTS. Procedures for field
replaceable unit (FRU) removal and installation and troubleshooting are covered.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of the course the student will be able to:
calibrate, optimize, perform acceptance test procedures (ATPs), maintain and perform troubleshooting
procedures for the SC 614 (CDMA) BTS.
In this course, you will learn to:
Calibrate and optimize the SC 614 (CDMA) BTS
Perform SC 614 (CDMA) BTS Acceptance Test Procedures.
Perform Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) removal and installation.
Setup and use all ancillary test equipment necessary to perform.
Optimization and ATPs on the SC 614 (CDMA) BTS.
Perform SC 614 (CDMA) BTS fault isolation and repair procedures.
Perform the FRU and cabling connection verification process.
Perform the SC 614 pre-power up test procedures.
Perform the SC 614 initial power up test procedures.
Perform test equipment calibration and connectivity.
Perform CDMA LMF procedures for the SC 614 BTS.
Perform SC 614 BTS prior to leaving the site procedures.
Perform SC 614 fault isolation and repair procedures

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

231

CDMA-BTS610 : SC 4812ET Base Transceiver Station


(CDMA) (Trunked)
Duration

Practical/Lab Content

5 days

Yes

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM
2 CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
3 Working knowledge of/experience with Code
Division Multiple Access (CDMA) or cellular system
technologies.

Audience
People involved with the optimization and
maintenance of the SC 4812ET Base Transceiver
Station (BTS).

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This module describes the subsystems, functionality, and operation of the SC 4812ET Base Transceiver Station
(BTS). Hands on laboratory activities allow the student to perform optimization, calibration and Acceptance Test
Procedures (ATPs) on the SC 4812ET.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
perform optimization, calibration, ATPs and troubleshooting on the SC 4812ET BTS.
In this course you will learn to:
Identify SC 4812ET frames to include major functional areas and module locations.
Describe the function of the Interconnect Panel connectors.
List the modules located in the Combined CDMA Channel Processing (C-CCP) Shelf.
Perform Interconnect Panel connection verification procedures.
Perform BTS C-CCP Shelf backplane dip switch setting verification to configure the SC 4812ET BTS.
Describe the SC 4812ET Power Cabinet modules.
Describe the functions of the SC 4812ET Power Cabinet modules.
Describe the CDMA and/or Solaris Local Maintenance Facility (LMF) in terms of functionality, interconnection,
directories/files, command usage and connectivity.
Describe test equipment associated with the LMF and SC 4812ET in terms of functionality and
interconnection.
Perform test equipment calibration and connectivity.
Perform LMF procedures for the SC 4812ET BTS.
Describe SC 4812ET ancillary test equipment requirements.
Describe the function of the modules in the C-CCP shelf.
Download software into the C-CCP shelf modules.
Describe the functions of the modules in the LPA Shelf.
Describe SC 4812ET BTS optimization procedures.
Perform SC 4812ET BTS optimization procedures.
Describe SC 4812ET Acceptance Test Procedures (ATPs).
Perform Acceptance Test Procedures (ATPs) for the SC 4812ET BTS.
Perform SC 4812ET fault isolation and repair procedures.
Perform SC 4812ET procedures prior to leaving the site procedures.

232

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

CDMA-BTS710 : SC 4812T Base Transceiver Station


(CDMA) (Trunked)
Duration

Practical/Lab Content

5 days

Yes

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM
2 CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
3 Working knowledge of/experience with Code
Division Multiple Access (CDMA) or cellular system
technologies.

Audience
People involved with the optimization and
maintenance of the SC 4812T Base Transceiver
Station (BTS).

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This module describes the subsystems, functionality, and operation of the SC 4812T Base Transceiver Station
(BTS). Hands on laboratory activities allow the student to perform optimization, calibration and Acceptance Test
Procedures (ATPs) on the SC 4812T.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
perform optimization, calibration, ATPs and troubleshooting on the SC 4812T BTS.
In this course you will learn to:
Identify SC 4812T frames to include major functional areas and module locations.
Describe the function of the Interconnect Panel connectors.
List the modules located in the Combined CDMA Channel Processing (C-CCP) Shelf.
Perform Interconnect Panel connection verification procedures.
Perform BTS C-CCP Shelf backplane dip switch setting verification to configure the SC 4812T BTS.
Describe the CDMA Local Maintenance Facility (LMF) in terms of functionality, interconnection, directories/
files, command usage and connectivity.
Describe test equipment associated with the LMF and SC 4812T in terms of functionality and
interconnection.
Perform test equipment calibration and connectivity.
Perform LMF procedures for the SC 4812T BTS.
Describe SC 4812T ancillary test equipment requirements.
Identify the modules of the C-CCP shelf.
Describe the function of the modules in the C-CCP shelf.
Download software into the C-CCP shelf modules.
List the modules that reside in the LPA Shelf.
Describe the functions of the modules in the LPA Shelf.
Describe SC 4812T BTS optimization procedures.
Perform SC 4812T BTS optimization procedures.
Describe SC 4812T Acceptance Test Procedures (ATPs).
Perform Acceptance Test Procedures (ATPs) for the SC 4812T BTS.
Perform SC 4812T fault isolation and repair procedures.
Perform SC 4812T procedures prior to leaving the site procedures.

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

233

CDMA-BTS810 : SC 4812ET LITE Base Transceiver


Station (CDMA) (Trunked)
Duration

Practical/Lab Content

5 days

Yes

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

Offered by the Mundelein Motorola training facility


only, or other premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM
2 CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
3 Working knowledge of/experience with Code
Division Multiple Access (CDMA) or cellular system
technologies.

Audience
People involved with the optimization and
maintenance of the SC 4812ET LiteBase
Transceiver Station (BTS).

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This course describes the subsystems, functionality, and operation of the SC 4812ET Lite Base Transceiver
Station (BTS). Hands on laboratory activities allow the student to perform optimization, calibration and
Acceptance Test Procedures (ATPs) on the SC 4812ET Lite BTS.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
perform optimization, calibration, ATPs and troubleshooting on the SC 4812ET Lite BTS.
In this course you will learn to:
Identify SC 4812ET Liteframe to include major functional areas and module locations.
Describe the function of the Interconnect Panel connectors.
List the modules located in the Combined CDMA Channel Processing (C-CCP) Shelf.
Perform Interconnect Panel connection verification procedures.
Perform BTS C-CCP Shelf backplane dip switch setting verification to configure the SC 4812ET Lite BTS.
Describe the SC 4812ET Lite Power Cabinet modules and their functions
Describe the CDMA Local Maintenance (LMF) in terms of functionality, interconnection, directories/files,
command usage and connectivity.
Perform LMF connectivity and usage.
Describe test equipment associated with the LMF and SC 4812T in terms of functionality and
interconnection.
Perform test equipment calibration and connectivity.
Describe SC 4812ET Lite ancillary test equipment requirements.
Perform ancillary test equipment connectivity and calibration.
Identify the modules of the C-CCP shelf.
Describe the function of the modules in the C-CCP shelf.
Download software into the C-CCP shelf modules.
List the modules that reside in the LPA Shelf.
Describe the functions of the modules in the LPA Shelf.
Describe SC 4812ET Lite BTS optimization procedures and perform their optimization procedures.
Describe SC 4812ET Lite Acceptance Test Procedures (ATPs).
Perform Acceptance Test Procedures (ATPs) for the SC 4812ET Lite BTS.
Perform SC 4812ET Lite fault isolation and repair procedures.
Perform SC 4812ET Lite prior to leaving the site procedures.

234

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

CDMA-BTS840 : SC 614T Base Transceiver Station


(CDMA)
Duration

Practical/Lab Content

5 days

Yes

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM
2 CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
3 Working knowledge of/experience with Code
Division Multiple Access (CDMA) or cellular system
technologies.

Audience
Personnel involved in calibration, optimization,
maintenance, acceptance test, and troubleshooting
procedures for the SC 614T (CDMA) BTS.

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This course provides a functional description of the SC 614T (CDMA) Base Transceiver Station (BTS) and all
necessary ancillary components of the SC 614T (CDMA) BTS platform. Test procedures are introduced to
enable the student to perform optimization and ATP testing of the SC 614T (CDMA) BTS. Procedures for field
replaceable unit (FRU) removal and installation and troubleshooting are covered.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
calibrate, optimize, perform acceptance test procedures (ATPs), maintain and perform troubleshooting
procedures for the SC 614T (CDMA) BTS.
In this course, you will learn to:
Calibrate and optimize the SC614T (CDMA) BTS.
Perform SC614T (CDMA) BTS Acceptance Test Procedures.
Perform Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) removal and installation.
Setup and use all ancillary test equipment necessary to perform optimization and ATPs on the SC614T
(CDMA) BTS.
Perform SC614T (CDMA) BTS fault isolation and repair procedures.
Perform the FRU and cabling connection verification process.
Perform the SC614T pre-power up test procedures.
Perform the SC614T initial power up test procedures.
Perform test equipment calibration and connectivity.
Perform CDMA LMF procedures for the SC614T BTS.
Perform SC614T BTS prior to leaving the site procedures.
Perform SC614T fault isolation and repair procedures.

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

235

CDMA-ENG935 : Understanding CDMA

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

Self-paced, approximately 16 hours

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

Log onto to Motorolas Lifecycle Services On-Line


(https://services.motorola.com), and click on the Technical
Training Direct link.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 A fundamental knowledge of digital cellular and an
understanding of the basics of wireless
communications.

Audience
This course is intended for people who want an
understanding of the breadth of technical concepts
behind CDMA, as well as how CDMA fits into the
wireless industry. It will give the student an intuitive
understanding of the fundamentals of Code Division
Multiple Access (CDMA).

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
This module is designed to provide an intuitive understanding of the fundamentals of Code Division Multiple
Access (CDMA).

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will learn about pseudo-random codes, their role in CDMA systems,
and how they offer enhanced privacy, security, call quality, and coverage in comparison to other cellular
technologies. The student will also learn how CDMA offers increased capacity and improved performance.

236

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

Self-paced

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


None

Audience
The primary audience for this course includes
technicians, cellular field engineers, and operators of
CDMA equipment. Other secondary audiences may
include network administrators, entry-level engineers,
and managers.

Features
CD-ROM

Course Content
Basic CDMA Concepts is a self-paced course designed to provide a foundation of the basic concepts, elements,
and operation of a CDMA wireless communication system. The CDMA concepts presented in the course are
generic, meaning they are not equipment or implementation-specific. The course is comprised of two lessons and
eight supporting modules.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course the student will be able to:
describe the basic CDMA concepts contained in the IS-95 standard, including: major network elements, voice
conversions and flow, channels and codes, basic call processing, power control, and handoffs.
In this course, you will learn to:
Examine the basic CDMA concepts contained in the IS-95 standard, including:
Major network elements.
Voice conversions and flow.
Channels and codes.
Basic call processing.
Power control and handoffs.
Describe how IS-95 CDMA concepts interrelate to make CDMA technology work more efficiently than other
wireless technologies

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

237

CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

2 days.

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM
2 Working experience/knowledge of cellular systems.

Audience
Personnel who require a technical overview and
functional description of the Motorola SC Product
Family Overview (CDMA).

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This course provides an overview of the SC product family describing the features and network elements of the
Motorola SC CDMA digital cellular system (including subsystems and their functions). This includes Motorolas
product migration to Third Generation Mobile Telecommunications (3G). The 3G technology provides high-speed
packet data rates (Mbps) and voice over IP. The SC product family covers: OMC-R, CBSC (MM & XC), BTS,
IWU, OMC-IP and the network components required for accessing the Internet or a company Intranet. Additional
network operations (UNO), planning (NetPlan) and optimization (SMAP) products are presented. The course is
comprised of 8 modules and 4 supporting appendices.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
identify the subsystems of a Motorola SC CDMA network and describe the functionality of this architecture.
In this course, you will learn to:
Identify the major and ancillary subsystems of the Motorola SCTM CDMA digital cellular system as well as the
1X IP-based architecture.
Describe the major components of a cellular network and state the different BTS types.
Illustrate the major components of a CDMA2000 network, including IP-RAN, and 1X packet data, identifying
system interconnections and interfaces.

238

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

3 days in the Mundelein facility; 5 days in the Brazil


facility

None

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

Location
A recognized Motorola training facility, or other
premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM
2 CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)

Audience
People who require a basic level of SS7/C7 protocol.

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling deals with basic understanding of SS7 and C7 signaling and its associated
protocols.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
apply basic understanding of SS7 and C7 signaling.
In this course, you will learn to:
Explain the purpose of SS7/C7 signaling system.
Identify the elements and structure of the SS7/C7 network.
Define the format and purpose the SS7/C7 signaling messages, Message Transfer Points, and addressing/
routing.
Analyze a Signaling Network Management messages, and network/ link manager scenario.
Identify user applications within the SS7/C7 network

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

239

CDMA-GNL130 : 1X Overview

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

2 days

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
2 Knowledge of network administration (including IP
fundamentals)
3 Working experience with/knowledge of Code
Division Multiple Access (CDMA) technology
4 Working knowledge and experience with R15
(Preferred)

Audience
All personnel who will work with Motorolas R16.x
CDMA release and who could benefit from an overview
of R16.x architecture, connections, and call flows
along with an overview of R16.x upgrade activities.

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This course provides a high-level overview of (a) CDMA 1X with an emphasis on the R16.x release and (b)
Motorolas CDMA network migration plan.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
describe Motorolas CDMA 1X Release and 1X network migration plan.
In this course, you will learn to:
Describe Motorolas CDMA Network Evolution Strategy.
Describe the phases of Motorolas Network Evolution.
Describe the R16.x architecture and connections.
Identify the call path for a R16.x voice call, R16.x IS-95-B data call, and R16.x 1X data call.
Describe the R16.1 architecture and connections.
Identify the R16.1 voice and data call paths with both a circuit and packet BTS.
Identify the platform changes between R15 and R16.x that impact deployment.
Describe the system-level upgrade procedure to packet BSS.
Identify 16.x transitional restrictions
Identify changes anticipated in R16.1 that must be considered when upgrading to R16.x.

240

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

CDMA-GNL131 : e1X Overview (Web-based)

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

Self-paced

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

Log onto to Motorolas Lifecycle Services On-Line


(https://services.motorola.com), and click on the Technical
Training Direct link.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
2 Knowledge of network administration (including IP
fundamentals)
3 Working experience with/knowledge of Code
Division Multiple Access (CDMA) technology
4 Working knowledge and experience with R15
(Preferred)

Audience
All personnel who will work with Motorolas R16.x
CDMA release and who could benefit from an
overview of R16.x architecture, connections, and call
flows along with an overview of R16.x upgrade
activities.

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
This course provides a high-level overview of (a) CDMA 1X with an emphasis on the R16.x release and (b)
Motorolas CDMA network migration plan.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Describe Motorolas CDMA 1X Release and 1X network migration plan.
In this course, you will learn to:
Describe Motorolas CDMA Network Evolution Strategy.
Describe the phases of Motorolas Network Evolution.
Describe the R16.x architecture and connections.
Identify the call path for a R16.x voice call, R16.x IS-95-B data call, and R16.x 1X data call.
Describe the R16.1 architecture and connections.
Identify the R16.1 voice and data call paths with both a circuit and packet BTS.
Identify the platform changes between R15 and R16.x that impact deployment.
Describe the system-level upgrade procedure to packet BSS.
Identify 16.x transitional restrictions
Identify changes anticipated in R16.1 that must be considered when upgrading to R16.x.

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

241

CDMA-GNL174 : CDMA Technology

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

Self-paced, approximately 3 hours

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

Log onto to Motorolas Lifecycle Services On-Line


(https://services.motorola.com), and click on the Technical
Training Direct link.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 A technical or telecommunications background
would be desirable, but is not essential.

Audience
The main target audiences for this course are:
Engineers new to CDMA networks
Technology project managers
Network planners
Value added service providers

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
This module is designed to provide a comprehensive overview of Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA), a
multiple access technique used in the US digital cellular telephone system known as IS-95.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
define Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) and outline its history and origins
outline a range of spread spectrum techniques
describe the principal advantages of CDMA
describe the IS-95 standard
outline how voice coding and power control are defined under IS-95
describe the IS-95 forward and reverse channels
outline the access and handoff procedures in a CDMA system

242

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

CDMA-GNL800 : IS-95 CDMA Technology

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

4 days.

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

Offered in the Latin America and Caribbean Motorola


training facilities only, or other premises by
arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM
(Recommended)
2 CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
(Recommended)
3 Working experience with CDMA systems

Audience
System Engineers, Field Engineers, Technicians and
Managers who need an in-depth knowledge of the IS95 standard.

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This course provides an in-depth approach to the IS-95 standard. The course addresses the direct and reverse
links as well as the coding process using PN and Walsh codes. Call processing from a subscribers unit
perspective is presented in details.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
describe the direct and reverse link channels
describe Power control
describe call processing
describe hand-off procedures

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

243

CDMA-GNL810 : CDMA 2000 / 1XRTT

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

2 days.

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

Offered in the Latin America and Caribbean Motorola


training facilities only, or other premises by
arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM
(Recommended)
2 CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
(Recommended)
3 Working experience with CDMA systems
4 CDMA-GNL800 : IS-95 CDMA Technology

Audience
System Engineers, Field Engineers, Technicians and
Managers who need an in-depth knowledge of the
CDMA 2000 / 1XRTT standard. This course is
recommended for students that have already taken the
IS95 training (CDMA-GNL800 : IS-95 CDMA Technology).
students that require IS95 training as well as
CDMA2000 1X/RTT should take CDMA-GNL820 : IS-95 &
CDMA 2000 / 1XRTT.

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This course provides an in-depth approach to the CDMA 2000 / 1XRTT standard. The course addresses the direct
and reverse links, power control and call processing.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
describe CDMA2000 direct and reverse link channels
describe power control
describe call processing
describe hand-off procedures

244

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

CDMA-GNL820 : IS-95 & CDMA 2000 / 1XRTT

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

5 days

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

Offered in the Latin America and Caribbean Motorola


training facilities only, or other premises by
arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM
(Recommended)
2 CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
(Recommended)
3 Working experience with CDMA systems

Audience
System Engineers, Field Engineers, Technicians and
Managers who need an in-depth knowledge of the IS95 and CDMA2000 / 1XRTT standard.

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This course provides an in-depth approach to the IS-95 standard and CDMA2000 1X/RTT. The course addresses
the direct and reverse links, power control, call processing and hand-off procedures. This course offers the
students with IS95 and CDMA2000 / 1XRTT training in a 5-day option. This content is also available in modules
(CDMA-GNL800 : IS-95 CDMA Technology and CDMA-GNL810 : CDMA 2000 / 1XRTT).

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
describe the direct and reverse link channels
describe Power control
describe call processing
describe hand-off procedures

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

245

CDMA-MLS100NE : MLS Network Element Overview for


Release 16.x
Duration

Practical/Lab Content

4 Hours

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

Log onto to Motorolas Lifecycle Services On-Line


(https://services.motorola.com), and click on the Technical
Training Direct link.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 CDMA-GNL130 : 1X Overview
or
CDMA-GNL131 : e1X Overview (Web-based)

Audience
Wireless Operators who will be responsible for the
installation and maintenance of the MLS(s) Network
Element Overview for the 16.x release.

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
This course is designed to cover MLS components description, installation and manual configuration procedures
in relationship to 16.x release.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of the MLS(s) Network Element Overview Module the student will be able to:
Identify how the MLS Hardware fits into the network
Describe the purpose of the MLS Hardware in the R16 network
Describe frame and Card/Slot components
Identify Cabling interface
Describe manual configuration procedures
Describe MLS Protocols and addressing

246

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

CDMA-MLS100OM : Operations and Maintenance: MLS

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

4 Hours

Yes

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM
2 CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
3 GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals
4 CDMA-SYS100OM : 1X Operations and Maintenance:
Overview
5 CDMA-MLS100NE : MLS Network Element Overview for
Release 16.x

Audience
Personnel involved in the day-to-day operations and
maintenance of a Motorola digital network, specifically
the Multi-Layer Switches (MLS).

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This module provides operators with product knowledge on the Multi-Layer Switches (MLS) and hands-on
experience in their critical on-site tasks relating to the MLS.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this module, the student will be able to:
Describe how the MLS hardware fits into the G16.x System Architecture.
Describe the basic hardware functions of the MLS.
Explain the parent/child device relationship and how they impact alarm monitoring.
Explain how to handle alarms.
Explain the purpose of SNMP and how it is used to manage AN performance and network problems.
List MLS Diagnostics Commands.
Perform basic operator MLS functions.

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

247

CDMA-MM100NE : Mobility Manager Network Element


Overview for G16.x Release
Duration

Practical/Lab Content

4 Hours

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

Log onto to Motorolas Lifecycle Services On-Line


(https://services.motorola.com), and click on the Technical
Training Direct link.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM
2 CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
3 CDMA-GNL130 : 1X Overview
or
CDMA-GNL131 : e1X Overview (Web-based)

Audience
Wireless Operators who will be responsible for the
migration and maintenance of the Mobility Manager.

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
This module is designed to cover the migration of the Mobility Manager in relationship to 16.x release.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this module the student will be able to:
Identify how the Mobility Manager fits into the network
Describe the purpose of the Mobility Manager in the R16 network
Identify migration of Mobility Manager to R16

248

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

CDMA-MM100OM : Operations and Maintenance: MM

Duration
4 Hours

Practical/Lab Content

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM
2 CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
3 GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals
4 CDMA-SYS100OM : 1X Operations and Maintenance:
Overview
5 CDMA-MM100NE : Mobility Manager Network Element
Overview for G16.x Release

Yes

Audience
Personnel involved in the day-to-day operations and
maintenance of a Motorola digital network, specifically
the Dual Node Puma Mobility Manager (MM).

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This module provides operators with product knowledge on the Mobility Manager (MM) and hands-on experience
in their critical on-site tasks relating to the Dual-Node Puma (DNP) Mobility Manager (MM). This module also
incorporates recent 1X technology impacting the MM.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this module, the student will be able to:
Describe how the MM hardware fits into the network.
Describe the basic hardware functions of the MM.
Discuss the radio resource management functions the MM provides.
List tasks required and tasks to avoid for the DNP-MM.
Explain how to monitor alarms on the MM.
Explain Device State Management and the MM.
List new MM 1X alarms.
Perform operator tasks for the MM.

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

249

CDMA-OMCP100NE : OMC-IP Network Element Overview


for G16.x Release
Duration

Practical/Lab Content

4 Hours

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

Log onto to Motorolas Lifecycle Services On-Line


(https://services.motorola.com), and click on the Technical
Training Direct link.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM
2 CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
3 CDMA-GNL130 : 1X Overview
or
CDMA-GNL131 : e1X Overview (Web-based)

Audience
Wireless Operators who will be responsible for the
installation and maintenance of the OMC-IP for the
16.x release.

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
This course is designed to cover the OMC-IP in relationship to 16.x release.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Identify how the OMC-IP fits into the network
Describe the purpose of the OMC-IP in the R16 network
Describe the initial setup for the OMC-IP

250

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

CDMA-OMCR100A : 1X Cellular Database Administration

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

3 days

Yes

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 CDMA-GNL130 : 1X Overview
or
CDMA-GNL131 : e1X Overview (Web-based)
2 CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM
3 CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
4 GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals
5 GEN-NET110 : UNIX Part 2: Advanced Topics for Users
6 GEN-NET200 : Sun Solaris Part 1: Basic Administration
7 GEN-NET210 : Sun Solaris Part 2: Network Administration
8 Working knowledge of/or experience with Code
Division Multiple Access (CDMA) or cellular
system technologies.

Audience
Technical support personnel and Database Engineers
responsible for performing basic administration at the
CBSC, OMC-R and OMC-IP. Personnel include
CDMA System Operators, Cellular Network
Administrators and System Administrators.

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This course has been designed to help technical personnel involved in creation of a 1X Cellular Network in the
database.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
perform cellular database administration procedures for 1X devices
In this course the student will learn to:
perform MIB backup procedures using exportMIB
perform MIB backup to DAT tape procedures
perform procedures to drop a MIB
accomplish procedures to import a MIB to the Sun OMC-R
perform Access Network configuration procedures
perform 1X database procedures for CBSC setup
perform PDSN creation
create a 1X Transcoder in the database
create 1X BTS in the database
describe the purpose of the Circuit Identity Code
determine the Circuit Identity Code for a transcoder connection

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

251

CDMA-OMCR100NE : OMC-R Network Element Overview


for Release 16.x
Duration

Practical/Lab Content

4 Hours

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

Log onto to Motorolas Lifecycle Services On-Line


(https://services.motorola.com), and click on the Technical
Training Direct link.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM
2 CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
3 CDMA-GNL130 : 1X Overview
or
CDMA-GNL131 : e1X Overview (Web-based)

Audience
Wireless Operators who will be responsible for the
installation and maintenance of the OMC-R for the
16.x release.

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
This course is designed to cover the migration and maintenance of the OMC-R in relationship to 16.x release.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
identify how the OMCR fits into the network
describe the purpose of the OMCR in the R16 network
identify migration of OMCR to R16

252

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

CDMA-OMCR100OM : Operations and Maintenance: OMCR

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

4 Hours

Yes

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM
2 CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
3 GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals
4 CDMA-SYS100OM : 1X Operations and Maintenance:
Overview
5 CDMA-OMCR100NE : OMC-R Network Element Overview for
Release 16.x

Audience
Personnel involved in the day-to-day operations and
maintenance of a Motorola digital network utilizing the
Sun Operations and Maintenance Center - Radio
(OMC-R).

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This module provides operators with product knowledge on the Operations and Maintenance Center - Radio
(OMC-R) and hands-on experience in their critical on-site tasks relating to the OMC-R. This module also
incorporates recent 1X technology impacting the OMC-R.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Discuss the function and operation of the Sun-based OMC-R.
Explain how to monitor alarms on the OMC-R.
Explain Device State Management and the OMC-R.
Describe basic troubleshooting procedures with the OMC-R.
Describe general guidelines for script management, crontab files, CDL browsing, and checking processor
utilization.
Identify new and modified alarms that impact the OMC-R.

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

253

CDMA-OMCR101 : SUN OMC-R (CDMA)

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

2 days

Yes

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 Working experience with the Helix OMC-R

Audience
This course was created for the following individuals:
Technical and support personnel responsible for
performing basic system administration and
operation duties at the OMC-R.
Cellular Field Engineers, CDMA System
Operators, Cellular Network Administrators, and
System Administrators

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This course has been designed to provide students with a hardware and software overview of the SUN OMC-R
platform.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
describe the SUN OMC-R Frame components
perform SUN OMC-R operations procedures

254

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

CDMA-PER130 : NetPlan CDMA

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

2 days

Yes

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals
2 CDMA-PER300 : NetPlan

Audience
This course is designed for System Engineers who are
involved in CDMA IS-95A/B or CDMA IS-2000 system
design and who are already familiar with the basic
NetPlan RF planning tool operations.

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This course continues from the CDMA-PER300 : NetPlan course and provides an introduction to the CDMA IS-95A/B
and CDMA IS-2000 Static System Simulator functions of the NetPlan software. The NetPlan CDMA simulator
models the components of a CDMA system, approximating the complex interaction of capacity, coverage, and
quality. It allows the incorporation of CDMA characteristics into a system design before the actual system is
installed and permits cost-effective investigation into design scenarios. The emphasis of the course is on basic
simulator operations and is not intended to provide the in-depth background required for system design. Hands-on
laboratory exercises allow the student to practice using the simulator with a system of seven cell sites. To learn indepth background of system design using the CDMA Simulator, attend the CDMA-PER360 : NetPlan CDMA RF System
Design course.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
perform basic operations of the CDMA simulator by entering CDMA parameters and by outputting CDMA data
files and images.
In this course, you will learn to:
Enter basic CDMA simulator inputs and view reports of those inputs.
Create a Traffic Carrier Map Set.
Create and display CDMA IS-95A/B simulator probe images.
Create and display CDMA IS-2000 Achieved Data Rate image.
Create and display CDMA IS-2000 time-sliced data.
Use the Cell/Mobile Analysis mode to display portions of the output data.
Use the PN Offset/Handoff mode to create and view a PN Offset Plan and a Handoff list

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

255

CDMA-PER140 : SwitchMATE and SwitchMATE II


Operations
Duration

Practical/Lab Content

7 days

Yes

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 Working knowledge of microprocessor and digital
logic-based systems, telephony, and
communications electronics.
2 Working knowledge of either Windows 3.1,
Windows 95, or Windows NT.
3 ANA-GNL020 : Analog Cellular Overview Companion CDROM
4 ANA-GNL030 : Analog Cellular Systems Overview
5 CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance
or
CDMA-SWT110 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance
(Week 1) and CDMA-SWT120 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation
& Maintenance (Week 2) and CDMA-SWT130 : EMX 2500/
5000 Operation & Maintenance (Week 3)
6 GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals

Audience
People involved with the day-to-day operation and
system administration of the EMX 2500 and EMX
5000 cellular networks.

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This course provides hands-on training in the system administration operation of the SwitchMATE and
SwitchMATE II for the EMX 2500 and EMX 5000 switches.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Operate SwitchMATE II.
To perform system administration and troubleshooting functions on the SwitchMATE message processor.
In this course, you will learn to:
Configure a Cellular Application Terminal (CAT) to operate correctly with SwitchMATE II.
Perform administration functions on the EMX switch using SwitchMATE II.
Access each of the 12 status display screens to:
Identify the state of each processor.
Change the state of a processor from the status screen GUI interface.
View a detailed alarm list.
Search each of the log files to find alarm, troubleshooting, subscriber, and maintenance data.
Configure and test the alarm database and notification feature.
Generate and analyze various reports and alarms including Preventative Maintenance Analysis (PMA).
Generate and schedule jobs to test the Radio Frequency Diagnostic Sub-system (RFDS) and System-wide
Audio Loopback Test (SALT, Turbo-SALT) for the SC 9600 system.
Perform SwitchMATE administrative functions, using the SMadm menu.
Configure and reset SwitchMATE ports.
Schedule, then generate call record and traffic reports for system performance measurement.
Generate Open Data Access reports, using TM&M, IPR, and the channel parameters database.
Generate, then analyze Preventative Maintenance Analysis (PMA) reports and alarms.
Troubleshoot the SwitchMATE software.

256

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

CDMA-PER200 : K-Series Fundamentals

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

5 days

Yes

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 ANA-GNL020 : Analog Cellular Overview Companion CDROM
2 ANA-GNL030 : Analog Cellular Systems Overview
3 CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance
or
CDMA-SWT110 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance
(Week 1)
and
CDMA-SWT120 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance
(Week 2)
and
CDMA-SWT130 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance
(Week 3)

Audience
People involved with the operation and maintenance of
the Tandem product platform hardware and its system
components.

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
The K-Series Fundamentals course has been designed to teach technical personnel to:
Use the Guardian Operating System (GOS).
Understand the Tandem Hardware Platform.
Use the Craft Workstation (CWS). Course Objectives Upon completion of the course, the student will be able to
operate and maintain the adjunct equipment on the K-Series platform and hardware.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Use the TACL commands.
Define file system architecture.
Manage the hard disk.
Use the printer.
Interpret the hardware configuration file.
Interpret the device listing.
Use the system control panel.
List logic board function.
Make the cable connections.
Become familiar with workstation software and configuration.

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

257

CDMA-PER210 : IS-41 Operation

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

5 days

Yes

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

Offered in the Illinois Motorola training facility only, or


other premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 ANA-GNL020 : Analog Cellular Overview Companion CDROM
2 ANA-GNL030 : Analog Cellular Systems Overview
3 CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance
or
CDMA-SWT110 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance
(Week 1)
and
CDMA-SWT120 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance
(Week 2)
and
CDMA-SWT130 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance
(Week 3)
4 CDMA-PER200 : K-Series Fundamentals

Audience
People involved with the operation and maintenance
of IS-41 converter equipment

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This course provides information about the operation of the IS-41 converter. The student will review the hardware
and will be introduced to the software and operation of the Motorola IS-41 application.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
operate and maintain the IS-41 converter equipment.
In this course, you will learn to:
Monitor High-Level Data Link Control (HDLC) and network link status.
Analyze the IS-41 product message set.
Perform a trace on the links and interpret the output.
Create, maintain, and update the database.
Interpret an Exception Reporting and Alarms Distribution (ERAD) message.
Locate a repair procedure.
Populate the SS7 database.
Run a change project.
Verify that SS7 links are operational.
Decode the three types of signaling units.

258

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

CDMA-PER220 : Message Register (MR)

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

4 days

Yes

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 ANA-GNL020 : Analog Cellular Overview Companion CDROM
2 ANA-GNL030 : Analog Cellular Systems Overview
3 CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance
or
CDMA-SWT110 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance
(Week 1)
and
CDMA-SWT120 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance
(Week 2)
and
CDMA-SWT130 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance
(Week 3)
4 CDMA-PER200 : K-Series Fundamentals

Audience
Personnel involved with the operation and
maintenance of the Motorola Message Register.

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This course has been designed to help technical personnel to operate the Motorola Message Register, perform
database updates, and complete routine maintenance tasks.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
operate the Motorola Message Register, perform database updates, and complete routine maintenance tasks.
In this course, you will learn to:
Use and maintain database screens and command line mode utility.
Identify the MR Process Description records, MR Assign records and Parameter records.
Determine MR-EMX switch link status.
Configure Intelligent Peripheral Devices (IPD)/Voice Mail Boxes.
Use the CWS to display ERADS, then interpret them.
Interpret alarms, then identify repair procedures.
Conduct alarm/ERAD-specific searches.
Identify the MR statistics and related registers and messages.
Use the report-generating utility.
Configure SS7/C7 links.
Verify that SS7 links are operational.
Decode the three types of signaling units.
Describe the Over the Air Activation Feature and use the associated tools and utilities.

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

259

CDMA-PER230 : DMX Home Location Register (DMX HLR)

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

7 days

Yes

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

Offered in the Illinois Motorola training facility only, or


other premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 ANA-GNL020 : Analog Cellular Overview Companion CDROM
2 ANA-GNL030 : Analog Cellular Systems Overview
3 CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance
or
CDMA-SWT110 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance
(Week 1)
and
CDMA-SWT120 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance
(Week 2)
and
CDMA-SWT130 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance
(Week 3)
4 CDMA-PER200 : K-Series Fundamentals

Audience
People involved with the operation and maintenance
of the Home Location Register application.

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This course provides the information necessary to the day-to-day operation and maintenance of the Motorola
Message DMX Home Location Register (DMX HLR) application.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
operate and maintain the Motorola HLR application.
In this course, you will learn to:
Use and maintain database screens, use the remote subscriber management interface, and generate
database reports.
Identify HLR Process Description records, Assign records, and Parameter records.
Determine HLR-EMX switch link status, trace message activity on the link, and add/delete a link.
Use the CWS to display ERADS; then interpret them.
Use and maintain screens and utilities for change-posting, replication, and expanded link procedures.
Identify the HLR statistics and related registers and messages.
Use the report-generating utility.

260

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

CDMA-PER250 : System Monitoring Application Processor


(SMAP)
Duration

Practical/Lab Content

2 days

Yes

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM
2 CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
3 GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals
4 GEN-NET200 : Sun Solaris Part 1: Basic Administration
Recommended Courses:
5 CDMA-GNL130 : 1X Overview
or
CDMA-GNL131 : e1X Overview (Web-based)
6 CDMA-OMCR100OM : Operations and Maintenance: OMCR
7 Familiarity with IS-95 A/B and IS-2000 Messages

Audience
People involved in the analysis and day-to-day
monitoring of CDMA call processing activity.

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This course is designed to familiarize students with SMAP operational features and configuration menus and
displays. SMAP is a real-time data collection, logging, and display tool that gathers call processing and physical
layer information from the CBSC and BTS. This course provides students with hands-on training in the setup and
use of SMAP to monitor call processing for effective diagnosis and troubleshooting of system malfunctions.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
use SMAP as a system monitoring and diagnostic tool.
In this course, you will learn to:
Invoke SMAP.
Identify the main screen displays of SMAP.
Select required supporting files for the operation of SMAP.
Modify and create a configuration file.
Monitor call activity for diagnosis and troubleshooting.
Replay call activity using log files.
Gather data from various components of the SC architecture upon user demand.

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

261

CDMA-PER270 : Compaq HLR41/AC

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

10 days

Yes

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 ANA-GNL020 : Analog Cellular Overview Companion CDROM
2 ANA-GNL030 : Analog Cellular Systems Overview
3 CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance
or
CDMA-SWT110 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance
(Week 1)
and
CDMA-SWT120 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance
(Week 2)
and
CDMA-SWT130 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance
(Week 3)
4 CDMA-PER200 : K-Series Fundamentals
or
CDMA-PER640 : S-Series Fundamentals

Audience
People involved with the operation and maintenance
of the Home Location Register application.

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This course is designed to provide the student with information and skills for the operation of the Compaq/Tandem
HLR/AC system and the skills required to maintain the various database files necessary for the successful
operation of the Compaq/Tandem HLR/AC system.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
maintain the various database files necessary for the successful operation of the Compaq/Tandem HLR/AC
system application software.
In this course, you will learn to:
Generate reports using the Enform AD-HOC Reporting facility.
Display the Authentication Center Event log and how to use various utilities.
Populate, update and maintain the following Compaq HLR/AC application software databases:
Generic Intelligent Network Interface database.
HLR System Parameters File database.
Authentication Center (AC) Configuration database.
HLR Subscriber Management.
Voice and Data Encryption.
Asynchronous Data and G3 FAX Service (ADFS).
Personal Dialing Services (PDS) Configuration Files.
HLR Number Translation database options.
Forward to Number Translation.
Enform AD-HOC Reporting.

262

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

CDMA-PER280 : CALEA Wiretap Network Implementation

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

5 days

Yes

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

Offered in the Illinois Motorola training facility only, or


other premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 GEN-NET200 : Sun Solaris Part 1: Basic Administration
2 CDMA-SWT260 : CCS/SS7 Implementation
3 CDMA-SWT370 : EMX-V Implementation/Migration

Audience
Personnel responsible for the Implementation of the
CALEA Network hardware and software.

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This course will provide students with the knowledge and skills to implement the CALEA Wiretap Network.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Identify various components of the CALEA implementation
Describe the installation of the SRP hardware
Test the SRP hardware installation for connectivity
Install the Operating Systems software
Install the Applications software
Configure users on the system
Describe the process of Case Provisioning

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

263

CDMA-PER290 : CALEA Wiretap Network Operations and


Maintenance
Duration

Practical/Lab Content

4 days

Yes

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

Offered in the Illinois Motorola training facility only, or


other premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling
2 GEN-NET200 : Sun Solaris Part 1: Basic Administration

Audience
Personnel responsible for the troubleshooting, data
collection, backup and recovery procedures, and daily
operation and maintenance of the SRP and related
architecture.

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This course will provide students with the knowledge and skills to operate, maintain, and troubleshoot the CALEA
Wiretap network.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Verify SRP/EMX connectivity and operation
Perform Case Provisioning
Provision Wiretap Routing Numbers (WRNs)
Operate the Log Manager and Log Viewer applications
Review the SRP statistical, Call Detail, and Billing Records
Describe the process of diagnosing and resolving SRP system problems

264

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

CDMA-PER300 : NetPlan

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

5 days

Yes

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals

Audience
People involved with the planning, design, analysis,
and operation of analog and GSM cellular systems.

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
The NetPlan RF planning tool is a cellular modeling application, designed to automate and optimize many cellular
system planning, design, and analysis functions. This course provides hands-on training on the use of basic
functions associated with the NetPlan RF planning tool with an emphasis on Analog and GSM systems. It is not
intended to provide the in-depth background required for system design. Also, the course will prepare those
students planning to attend the NetPlan CDMA Static Simulator training.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
use the NetPlan RF planning tool in cellular system planning, design, and optimization.
In this course, you will learn to:
explain the purpose, features, and benefits of the NetPlan RF tool
perform the tasks necessary to prepare the NetPlan RF tool for use
manipulate graphic objects in the NetPlan RF tool
build and display sites, with assigned antennas, propagation boundaries, parameter sets, and other network
elements in a system
specify report thresholds, image parameters, intervals and colors used to define ranges in your images
display and plot existing drive test data
create a Delta image comparing drive test data with your system's signal strength image
input traffic data
create a traffic map and speed map
create and display traffic and growth reports
automatically create and manually edit the C/I Matrix, Frequency Plan and Handover List
create and display images and reports
use Operational Analysis to display performance data for your system, such as blocking or dropped calls

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

265

CDMA-PER330: High Density IWU

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

2 days

Yes

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM
2 CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
3 GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals

Audience
Technicians and CFEs involved in the operation and
maintenance of the IWU.

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This course is designed to provide students a functional description of the Inter Working Unit (IWU) and to enable
students to operate and maintain the IWU.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
describe IWU card functions and signal flow
perform chassis installation (software)
configure an IWU
load software
In this course, you will learn to:
configure an IWU
maintain an IWU
download software to the IWU

266

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

CDMA-PER350 : NetPlan Fundamentals Plus CDMA

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

5 days

Yes

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals

Audience
This course is created for individuals involved with the
planning, design, analysis, and operation of CDMA
cellular systems.

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This course provides hands-on training on the use of the NetPlan tool with the CDMA Static Simulator function.
NetPlan is a cellular modeling application designed to automate and optimize many cellular system planning,
design, and analysis actions.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
use the NetPlan tool in cellular system planning, design, and optimization.
perform basic operations of the CDMA simulator by entering given input parameters and retrieving output data
files and images.
In this course, you will learn to:
Explain the purpose, features, and benefits of the NetPlan planning tool
Build and display sites in your system with assigned antennas, propagation boundaries, parameter sets and
other network elements in a system
Specify report thresholds, image parameters, intervals and colors used to define ranges in your images
Input traffic data
Create a traffic map, traffic carrier map set, and speed map
Create and display traffic and growth reports
Use Operational Analysis to display performance data for your system such as blocking and dropped calls
Enter basic CDMA simulator inputs and view reports of those inputs
Create and display CDMA IS-95A/B simulator probe images
Create and display CDMA IS-2000 Achieved Data Rate image
Create and display CDMA IS-2000 time-sliced data
Use the CEll/Mobile Analysis mode to display portions of the output data
Use the PN Offset/Handoff mode to create and view a PN Offset Plan and a Handoff list
Create and display a composite image, and a statistical image
Create and view Cell/Mobile statistics files

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

267

CDMA-PER360 : NetPlan CDMA RF System Design

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

5 days

Yes

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals
2 CDMA-PER300 : NetPlan
3 CDMA-PER130 : NetPlan CDMA
or
CDMA-PER350 : NetPlan Fundamentals Plus CDMA

Audience
System and RF engineers who are involved in the RF
design of CDMA cellular systems using the NetPlan
CDMA Static System Simulator.

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This course provides classroom and hands-on training on the engineering inputs and outputs necessary in the
design of a CDMA RF System using the NetPlan CDMA Static System Simulator.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
identify and describe the elements of CDMA system design
describe how to use the NetPlan tool to assist in the design process
analyze outputs from the NetPlan tool to validate design criteria has been met
compare actual system data to results of the NetPlan tool, and identify data that should be used to improve the
NetPlan tools predictions
In this course, you will learn to:
describe the Motorola CDMA RF design procedure
create Link Budgets for the reverse link
discuss how to optimize the accuracy of the Clutter database\
verify RF coverage
create Traffic and Speed maps
identify NetPlan tool CDMA system parameters and use in NetPlan tool
identify CDMA site parameters and use in NetPlan tool
list factors that affect CDMA path loss generation
state how to identify Inter-System Interference on a simulator image
generate statistics files and images
create, analyze and interpret statistics and images
identify and correct pilot pollution problems
list steps to create a NetPlan CDMA composite image
describe NetPlan handoff candidate list and statistics preparation
describe the Design Review process

268

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

CDMA-PER380 : High Speed Packet Data (IWU)

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

3 days.

Yes

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM
2 CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
3 CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling

Audience
Technicians and CFEs involved in the operation and
maintenance of wireless packet data systems.

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This course is designed to provide the knowledge and skills required to operate and maintain a HSPD IWU.
Included are functional descriptions of components, call flows, and basic IP networking.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
describe the functions of HSPD components
describe HSPD call flow
describe IP protocols
install a packet IWU shelf
load and configure card software
load and configure TCM software
monitor the status of individual cards
configure routers and servers in a HSPD network
In this course, you will learn to:
configure a HSPD IWU
maintain a HSPD IWU
download software to a HSPD IWU
configure routers and servers for a HSPD network

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

269

CDMA-PER400 : LMF for Windows Operations (CDMA)

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

2 days

Yes

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM
2 CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
3 CDMA-BTS120 : SC 9600 Base Transceiver Station
(CDMA)
or CDMA-BTS610 : SC 4812ET Base Transceiver Station
(CDMA) (Trunked)
or CDMA-BTS710 : SC 4812T Base Transceiver Station
(CDMA) (Trunked)
or CDMA-BTS810 : SC 4812ET LITE Base Transceiver
Station (CDMA) (Trunked)
or CDMA-BTS840 : SC 614T Base Transceiver Station
(CDMA)
or CDMA-BTS440 : SC 614 Base Transceiver Station
(CDMA)

Audience
Technicians and CFEs involved with the optimization
and maintenance of Base Transceiver Stations (BTSs)
using the LMF for Windows (CDMA LMF).

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This course describes the LMF for Windows (CDMA LMF) and its use with Base Transceiver Stations (BTSs).
Procedures for optimization, calibration, Acceptance Test Procedures (ATPs), troubleshooting and job completion
are covered during the course. Hands on laboratory activities allow the student to perform optimization,
calibration, and Acceptance Test Procedures (ATPs) on selected BTS(s).

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
perform BTS optimization, calibration, Acceptance Test Procedures (ATPs) and job completion procedures
using the CDMA LMF
In this course, you will learn to:
describe the Local Maintenance Facility (LMF) for Windows in terms of functionality, interconnection,
directories/files, command usage and connectivity
perform LMF connectivity and usage
describe test equipment associated with the LMF in terms of functionality and interconnection
perform test equipment calibration and connectivity
describe BTS login and logout procedures
perform LMF for Windows procedures for the BTS
describe ancillary test equipment requirements
perform ancillary test equipment connectivity and calibration
describe BTS optimization procedures
perform BTS optimization procedures
describe BTS Acceptance Test Procedures (ATPs)
perform Acceptance Test Procedures (ATPs) for the BTS
perform BTS prior to leaving the site procedures

270

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

CDMA-PER440 : NetPlan 5.0 System Availability Workshop

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

2 days

Yes

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals
2 CDMA-PER350 : NetPlan Fundamentals Plus CDMA
or
CDMA-PER300 : NetPlan
and
CDMA-PER130 : NetPlan CDMA

Audience
System Engineers involved in system design and who
are already familiar with the Release 4.0 NetPlan RF
planning tool, including the CDMA Simulator

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This course continues from the NetPlan Release 4.0 PER300, PER350, and PER130 courses. The course
provides hands-on training for NetPlan 5.0 features including:
Carrier Table
carrier parameters for CDMA sites
interference matrices for standard C/I, interfered area, interfered area percentage, interfered traffic, interfered
traffic percentage, and interfered traffic with probability
reuse groups for an analog frequency plan
frequency hopping for a GSM frequency plan
GPRS and CDMA simulator operation and parameters
C/I images using a directional subscriber antenna
Traffic Carrier Map Set

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
create a Carrier Table
create carrier parameters for CDMA sites
create interference matrices for standard C/I, interfered area, interfered area percentage, interfered traffic,
interfered traffic percentage, and interfered traffic with probability
setup reuse groups for an analog frequency plan
setup frequency hopping for a GSM frequency plan
run the GPRS and CDMA simulators
create C/I images using a directional subscriber antenna
create a traffic carrier map set
setup CDMA simulator parameters

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

271

CDMA-PER450 : UNO Element Manager

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

3 days

Yes

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM
2 CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
3 GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals
4 GEN-NET200 : Sun Solaris Part 1: Basic Administration

Audience
Personnel involved with the day to day operation of a
Motorola digital network.

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This course provides hands-on training on the use of the UNO Element Manager. An UNO Element Manager
(UNO_EM) is designed to replace one SC-UNO/AP, and can run on the same (or slightly upgraded) hardware.
An UNO Element Manager (EM) provides AP/SC UNO equivalent features. It is sized for connection to a single
OMC-R only. This course provides hands-on training on the use of the UNO Element Manager

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
manage a Motorola digital network, using the UNO Element Manager
In this course, you will learn to:
explain the purpose and features of the UNO Manager
describe the standards and protocols used by UNO
launch the UNO Application Launcher
navigate and use UNO Help screens
manage a Motorola digital network, using the Command Center
setup cell groups, cell names, cell types, and toy cells in the Command Center
create an alarm filter to be used with the Alarm Manager and Alarm Browser
use the Alarm Manager to acknowledge and clear an alarm, view alarm details, and zoom into the Command
Center
schedule and display Performance Management Reports
create a device independent performance measurement threshold

272

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

CDMA-PER460 : UNO Market Manager

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

5 days

Yes

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM
2 CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
3 GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals
4 GEN-NET200 : Sun Solaris Part 1: Basic Administration
5 CDMA-PER450 : UNO Element Manager

Audience
Personnel involved with the day to day operation of a
Motorola digital network.

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This course is designed to communicate with several agents simultaneously. Besides providing the features of an
Element Manager, a Market Manager has additional features and options available to the UNO user. This course
provides hands-on training on the use of the UNO Market Manager.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
manage a Motorola digital network with multiple agents, using the UNO Market Manager
In this course, you will learn to:
explain the purpose and features of the UNO Market Manager
run RFDS tests from the Command Center
explain the UNO RFDS applications and prerequisites
create RFDS Test Requests
launch and navigate User Defined Alarms application
create a Translation Rule, a Relay Definition, and a Deleted Alarm Rule
launch and navigate the Software Download Manager, view available software versions, and create and view
Software Download Reports
launch and navigate the Remedy ARS application
list ways to open a trouble ticket, create a trouble ticket, then close it
create defaults for, and customize the Help Desk schema
create an UNO user
send a test TelAlert message
launch and navigate the CBSC Processor Utilization tool, and then create reports using the CBSC Processor
Utilization tool
launch and navigate the CFC Monitoring tool and then create reports using the CFC Monitoring tool
launch and navigate the PM Statistics Graphs tool and then create reports using the PM Statistics Graphs tool
define measures for long-term storage using the UDM screens
add manager to Large Scale Manager (LSM) System configuration
create, modify, and manage Large Scale filters
connect to multiple UNO hosts
retrieve alarm information via the internet
activate Central Alarm Acknowledgement
synchronize all alarms
launch and navigate ArcView GIS

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

273

CDMA-PER550 : WAP Server Overview and Operations

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

2 days

Yes

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


None

Audience
Personnel requiring a basic understanding of the
Motorola WAP Server operations.

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This course describes the components and capabilities of the Motorola WAP Server and provides hands-on
laboratory activities for students to perform basic Motorola WAP Server operations.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Describe the WAP Servers components, architecture and message flow process.
Describe the process for determining the number of WAP Servers required to meet capacity requirements.
List features of the WAP Server.
Perform basic operations on the WAP Server.
Access and manage bookmarks, and perform server and subscriber management tasks on the WAP Server.
Identify the processes for generating billing records.

274

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

CDMA-PER640 : S-Series Fundamentals

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

5 days.

Yes

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 Cellular System Network operations experience
2 Cellular Switch operations experience
3 Intelligent Network operations experience

Audience
Intelligent Network Operations maintenance and
engineering and Cellular Network Operations
maintenance and engineering personnel.

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This Course is designed to provide the student with a basic understanding of the S-Series Intelligent Network
Server platform and the basic skills required to use the various utilities necessary for the successful operation of
the S-Series Intelligent Network Server platform and an overview of the Central Office system S-Series hardware.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
perform basic skills in the following phases of S-Series Intelligent Network Server platform operations:
startup and shutdown procedures for the INS platform
Tandem Service Management (TSM) workstation
Command Control Monitoring Interface (CCMI) workstation
Exception Reporting and Alarm Display (ERAD) subsystem monitoring
on line transaction processing
basic TACL commands
basic Subsystem Control Facility (SCF) Commands
In this course, you will learn to:
identify fundamental features of the S-Series INS
start and stop ERADS
display context sensitive help for the TSM workstation
configure and navigate the TSM workstation
display context sensitive help for the CCMI workstation
configure and navigate the CCMI workstation
perform basic fault management tasks from the CCMI workstation
describe the hardware and function of the major components of the SWAN/IO Controller and the Common
communication ServerNet Adapter (CCSA) l logon on and logoff of the system using TACL commands
use basic SCF commands to obtain information about system processes and hardware components
describe concepts of OLTP

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

275

CDMA-S2K320 : 3G CDMA 2000 Implementation and


Operational Issues
Duration

Practical/Lab Content

2 days

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


None

Audience
Managers engineers and technicians with a detailed
understanding of the IS-95 standard.

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This course describes the CDMA2000 Radio Transmission Technology (RTT), a wide-band, spread spectrum
radio interface that uses Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) technology to meet the needs for third generation
(3G) wireless communications systems. The course focuses on the description of the OSI layers (e.g., physical
layer and part of link layer) for ITU IMT-2000 requirements. We will also view the Forward Link and the Reverse
Link.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
identify the Migration Path from GSM to GPRS to 3G, use of PN and Walsh Codes in CDMA2000, Protocol
Stack and Link Layer Model, Signaling, Voice and Data Integration, Forward and Reverse Link.
In this course, you will learn to:
identify the Migration Path from GSM to GPRS to 3G
identify the use of PN and Walsh Codes in CDMA2000
identify the Protocol Stack and Link Layer Model
identify Signaling, Voice and Data Integration
identify the Forward and Reverse Link

276

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

CDMA-S2K400 : WCDMA for UMTS: Guided Tour of the


Physical Layer
Duration

Practical/Lab Content

2 days

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


None

Audience
Technical personnel of the Cellular and PCS Industry
who need a clear understanding of the 3G wireless
systems. Ideally suited for Managers, planning
engineers, design engineers, system performance
staff, system operation and field personnel.

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This course describes in a step-by-step, easy-to understand manner, the foundations of the WCDMA standard.
The focus is placed on the implementation and operational considerations of the Physical Layer. The course
begins with a quick review of spread spectrum and CDMA concepts and principles. Then, a background and
global trends on UMTS is presented, followed by a contrast of the leading 3G standards (WCDMA versus
CDMA200).

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Describe CDMA and Spread Spectrum Principles
Describe UMTS and W-CDMA
Describe PN Sequences and Gold Codes
Describe Orthogonal Variable Spreading Factors
Describe Hybrid Phase Shift Keying
Describe Forward link or Downlink
Describe Reverse Link or Uplink
Describe Power Control and Handoff Strategies in WCDMA
Describe the 3G system Capacity Model

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

277

CDMA-SAO100 : Advanced Scenario Workshop

Duration

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

5 days

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 Eight to 12 months experience and knowledge of
CDMA network operations, operations ethics and
network file systems.
1 GEN-NET200 : Sun Solaris Part 1: Basic Administration or
UNIX administration or related experience).
2 CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM
3 CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
4 GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals
5 GEN-NET200 : Sun Solaris Part 1: Basic Administration
6 CDMA-OMCR100NE : OMC-R Network Element Overview for
Release 16.x
7 CDMA-MM100NE : Mobility Manager Network Element
Overview for G16.x Release
8 CDMA-XC100NE : XC Network Element Overview for Release
16.x
9 CDMA-SYS100OM : 1X Operations and Maintenance:
Overview
10 CDMA-OMCR100OM : Operations and Maintenance: OMCR
11 CDMA-MM100OM : Operations and Maintenance: MM
12 CDMA-XC100OM : Operations and Maintenance: XC

Location
A recognized Motorola training facility, or other
premises by arrangement.

Audience
People who require training in CBSC troubleshooting,
data collection, backup and recovery procedures.
Personnel should possess an extensive background or
related experience working as a UNIX administrator
and a thorough knowledge of CDMA network
operations, operations ethics and network file systems.

Features
An instructor-led course.

Practical/Lab Content
Yes

Course Content
This course was designed to reduce system outage and downtime through more expedient troubleshooting and
problem solving techniques. Also, the course strives to reduce Motorola Cellular Support Center (MCSC)
involvement by providing critical information to the MCSC. The course examines improving the data collection
skills necessary for problem resolution while providing CBSC field personnel troubleshooting and problem
resolution experience in a lab environment.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
perform CBSC troubleshooting techniques and procedures.
In this course, you will learn to:
describe CBSC troubleshooting techniques and procedures
describe SS7/C7 A+ troubleshooting procedures
perform SS7/C7 A+ troubleshooting procedures
describe OMC-R and MM management procedures
describe Motorola application software debugging procedures
perform Motorola application software debugging procedures
describe Transcoder troubleshooting and recovery techniques and procedures associated with power loss and
Mobility Manager-XC LAN failure
describe Transcoder troubleshooting, data collection, backup and recovery procedures
describe Transcoder troubleshooting preparation procedures
perform Transcoder recovery and troubleshooting procedures
describe BTS Link troubleshooting procedures
describe system monitoring tools and UNO processes
perform problem solving/troubleshooting procedures for a multiple problem call

278

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

CDMA-SAO110 : IOS

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

2 days

Yes

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 CDMA-OMCR100OM : Operations and Maintenance: OMCR
2 CDMA-MM100OM : Operations and Maintenance: MM
3 CDMA-XC100OM : Operations and Maintenance: XC
4 CDMA-SAO100 : Advanced Scenario Workshop
5 Nortel MTX Training
6 Minimum of 6 months experience in Motorola
CBSC and MTX operations
7 Familiarity with the INET SS7 analyzer

Audience
This course is intended for IOS Compliant System
Operators (Switch and CBSC), personnel responsible
for monitoring the A interface, and personnel involved
with the integration of a non-compliant CBSC to an
IOS compliant system.

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This module is designed to assist the migration of the A Interface between a MTX and Motorola CBSC. This
course reviews the CBSC database parameters and MTX tables values needed to implement the ISO complaint A
Interface. Monitoring the A interface using different tools is introduced.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Describe the hardware elements in the CBSC and MTX that utilize the A Interface.
Verify the CBSC database parameters associated with an IOS Compliant system.
Verify the tables in the MTX associated with a Motorola CBSC.
Utilize various tools to monitor the A Interface.
Describe the Messages on the A Interface for various scenarios.
In this course, the student will learn to:
Describe the advantages of IOS, the equipment within the IOS compliant network, and the CBSC functions
within the IOS
Describe the A interfaces according to CDG 2.2 and 4.0 IOS.
Describe the Hardware devices in the CBSC that interface with IOS A interfaces.
Describe any ancillary equipment needed to support the IOS A interfaces.
Describe the software on the CBSC to support the A interfaces.
Describe the actions to set up the DSU for operation.
List the Hardware on the MTX that interfaces with the A interfaces to the CBSC.
Describe the relevant tables in the MTX to implement the IOS A1 and A2 interface the MTX with a Motorola
CBSC.
List the commands to manage the devices that interfaces with the A1 and A2 interfaces to the CBSC.
List the Hardware on the MTX that interfaces with the A interfaces to the IWF.
List the commands to manage the devices that interfaces with the A interface to the IWF.
Describe the process to configure the SS7 cards on the Helix MM and the PUMA MM
List the parameters on OMCR MIB to integrate to the MTX, and the tables on the MTX to integrate the Motorola
CBSC.
Describe the events during an origination and termination of a CDMA mobile phone call on the A interface
between the MTX and CBSC.
List the system messages and alarms that are associated with the A inter faces between the CBSC and MTX.

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

279

CDMA-SAO190 : Performance Management

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

3 days

Yes

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM
2 CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
3 CDMA-SYS100OM : 1X Operations and Maintenance:
Overview
4 CDMA-OMCR100OM : Operations and Maintenance: OMCR
5 CDMA-MM100OM : Operations and Maintenance: MM
6 CDMA-XC100OM : Operations and Maintenance: XC

Audience
This course is primarily designed for personnel
involved with performance monitoring of the Motorola
CDMA digital cellular system.

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
his course has been designed to provide an introduction to the basic skills necessary for performance monitoring
of the CBSC subsystem. The course examines the importance of determining the capacity of each key network
processor within the data to assess and predict network capacity. Also, the importance of data analysis in
calculating existing capacity of the system and predicting future requirements is explored.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
determine capacity of a CBSC
determine resources limiting the capacity of the network for a given configuration
identify options available to increase capacity
determine resources that may be impacted by system growth and reconfiguration
In this course, you will learn to:
identify by name, acronym and function the key performance indicators for a digital (CDMA) system
identify elements that make up the Motorola CDMA System
explain the requirement for the Standard Transcoder Shelf layout
explain the major differences between the Helix Tandem/Compaq Series cabinets and PUMA DNP S4000 or
S5000
explain terms for various PM measurement reports that can be generated by the system
identify manuals and scripts used for record generation and interpretation
examine process utilization for the MM and explain its output
describe the six steps to capacity engineering for the CDMA cellular system
describe the impacts of Soft Handoff and the effect it has on the generation of PM data
identify the PM data paths that exist on the CDMA subsystem and locate raw PM data on the Mobility Manager
and OMC-R
identify the location of the PM server and describe its role in the display of formatted PM records
verify the location of appropriate scripts on the network
decode a raw PM record using the Performance Analysis Manual
describe factors involved in managing the CDMA cellular network and how system performance impacts quality
of service
identify all elements of a pmC_10_hr Access Channel Usage Record
identify reasons for a measurement to be pegged for any record
locate and produce the last CBSC Integrity Report and produce a file copy for that report

280

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

CDMA-SAO210 : CBSC Operations for BTS Technicians

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

1 day

Yes

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 Any BTS course
2 CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)

Audience
BTS technicians who require training on applications
associated with the OMC-R/SC-UNO processor for
remote BTS fault identification and recovery.

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This course is designed to give Base Transceiver System (BTS) technicians engaged in BTS fault identification/
recovery procedures using the SC-UNO.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
perform remote BTS fault BTS identification/recovery procedures using the OMC-R/SC-UNO.
In this course, you will learn to:
Describe the major components of the OMC-R/SC-UNO.
Use fault identification tools of the SC-UNO including the Alarm Manager, CLI window and browse cdllog.
Open an Alarm Manager window, collect error messages, and acknowledge errors.
Determine the status of cards via the front panel leds.
Status FEPs using CLI commands.
Execute fault recover procedures to replace/reseat cards/devices and bring the SC6XX and/or, SC48XX
(as required) back into service.

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

281

CDMA-SAWR150B : R15 System Availability Workshop


Tools
Duration

Practical/Lab Content

2 days

Yes

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM
2 CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
3 GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals
4 CDMA-OMCR100NE : OMC-R Network Element Overview for
Release 16.x
5 CDMA-MM100NE : Mobility Manager Network Element
Overview for G16.x Release
6 CDMA-XC100NE : XC Network Element Overview for Release
16.x
UNO Personnel only add:
7 Any CDMA (digital) BTS course

Audience
Personnel involved in the operation and maintenance
of systems associated with the Motorola R15 hardware
and software release. Equipment includes but is not
limited to: SMAP and UNO

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
SAWR150B System Availability Workshop Tools provides an overview of the operational impacts of the R15
system release on the Motorola wireless infrastructure. Major areas covered include SMAP and UNO R15
features. The course allows the student to work on preliminary software prior to FOA/GA rollout. These modules
include hands-on lab exercises, but it is not intended to replace standard operations courses.
SAWR150B has been sectioned into modules of SMAP and UNO feature releases. We encourage the student to
take advantage of the full two days of training. However, if there is time constraint they may choose to attend only
the modules that pertain to their operations.
Day one contains SMAP R15 features.
Days two contains UNO R15 features (All Uno feature releases are optional and require additional licenses)
SAWR150B System Availability Workshop Tools is part of the G15 Feature Curriculum designed to meet the
need of the student. The student may take SAWR150B -Tools alone or they may combine it with the CDMASAWR150C : R15 System Availability Workshop BTS/CBSC.
CDMA-SAWR150C : R15 System Availability Workshop BTS/CBSC is being offered on the three previous days prior to allow
students to also attend this modules of BTS and CBSC and IWU feature releases.
Also, as part of the G15 feature curriculum the student has the opportunity to view an introduction to all G15
feature releases called G15 System Operational Impact slide presentation located on our Web site.
Note that a separate hands-on workshop is being offered for Switch/HLR/VLR S15.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
perform all new tasks associated with feature releases on the SMAP equipment.
perform all new tasks associated with feature releases on the UNO equipment.

282

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

CDMA-SAWR150C : R15 System Availability Workshop


BTS/CBSC
Duration

Practical/Lab Content

3 days

Yes

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM
2 CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
3 GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals
4 CDMA-OMCR100NE : OMC-R Network Element Overview for
Release 16.x
5 CDMA-MM100NE : Mobility Manager Network Element
Overview for G16.x Release
6 CDMA-XC100NE : XC Network Element Overview for Release
16.x
BTS Personnel only add:
7 Any CDMA (digital BTS course)
CBSC Personnel add:
8 Any CDMA (digital BTS course)
9 CDMA-SYS100OM : 1X Operations and Maintenance:
Overview
10 CDMA-OMCR100OM : Operations and Maintenance: OMCR
11 CDMA-MM100OM : Operations and Maintenance: MM
12 CDMA-XC100OM : Operations and Maintenance: XC

Audience
Personnel involved in the operation and maintenance
of systems associated with the Motorola R15
hardware and software release. Equipment includes
but is not limited to: BTS, SUN-OMC-R, and IWU.

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
SAWR150C System Availability Workshop BTS/CBSC provides an overview of the operational impacts of the
R15 system release on the Motorola wireless infrastructure. Major areas covered include the CBSC, the OMC-R,
the BTS, and the IWU. The course allows the student to work on preliminary software prior to FOA/GA rollout.
These modules include hands-on lab exercises, but it is not intended to replace standard operations courses.
SAWR150C has been sectioned into modules of BTS and CBSC feature releases. We encourage the student to
take advantage of the full three days of training. However, if there is time constraint they may choose to attend
only the modules that pertain to their operations.
Day one contains BTS R15 features.
Days two and three contain CBSC and IWU R15 features.
CDMA-SAWR150C : R15 System Availability Workshop BTS/CBSC is part of the G15 Feature Curriculum designed to meet
the need of the student. The student may take SAWR150C alone or they may combine it with the CDMA-SAWR150B
: R15 System Availability Workshop Tools. SAWR150B is being offered on the two consecutive days that follow to allow
students to also attend this modules of SMAP and UNO feature releases. All Uno feature releases are optional
and require additional licenses.
Also, as part of the G15 feature curriculum the student has the opportunity to view an introduction to all G15
feature releases called G15 System Operational Impact slide presentation located on our Web site.
Note that a separate hands-on workshop is being offered for Switch/HLR/VLR S15.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
perform all new tasks associated with the BTS equipment.
perform all new tasks associated with feature releases on the CBSC equipment.
perform all new tasks associated with IWU equipment.

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

283

CDMA-SAWS150 : S15 System Availability Workshop

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

2 days

Yes

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance
or
CDMA-SWT110 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance
(Week 1)
and CDMA-SWT120 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation &
Maintenance (Week 2)
and CDMA-SWT130 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation &
Maintenance (Week 3)
2 CDMA-SWT370 : EMX-V Implementation/Migration
3 CDMA-SWT440 : EMX-V Translations
4 CDMA-PER220 : Message Register (MR)
5 CDMA-PER270 : Compaq HLR41/AC
6 Intelligent Network Operations experience
7 Tandem navigation experience

Audience
Personnel involved in the operation and maintenance
of the systems associated with the Motorola hardware
and software S15 release.

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
SAWS150 Systems Availability Workshop provides an overview of the operational impacts of the S15 system
release. The course allows the student to work on preliminary software prior to FOA/GA rollout and includes
hands-on lab exercises, but it is not intended to replace standard operations courses.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to.
Perform activities to install and maintain features associated with the Motorola hardware and software S15
release.
In this course you will learn to:
Enable and provision the Virtual Vacant Circuit feature
Enable and provision the High Speed Packet Data feature
Enable and provision the Roamer Profile Override feature
Enable the MWN SP and CCS/MRS SP at the MSC using existing MMI
Enable and provision the Mobile Terminate Short Message Service (MT-SMS) feature
Enable and provision the Mobile Originate Short Message Service (MOSMS) feature
Transfer billing information from disk to DAT using MMI commands
Verify successful transfer of billing to DAT
Setup and Install the Billing Batch File Enhancements feature
Configure the HLR system for the ENI Enhancement feature.
Configure the HLR system for the ENI Message Filter feature.

284

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

CDMA-SWT110 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation &


Maintenance (Week 1)
Duration

Practical/Lab Content

5 days

Yes

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 ANA-GNL020 : Analog Cellular Overview Companion CDROM
2 ANA-GNL030 : Analog Cellular Systems Overview
3 Working knowledge of microprocessors and digital
logic-based systems, telephony, and
communications electronics is highly
recommended.

Audience
This course is designed for personnel who require a
basic understanding of the major functions,
components, and subsystems of the EMX 2500/
5000. The target audience includes Switch
Technicians and System Managers.

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This course is the first in a 3-part series presenting the EMX 2500/5000 switching system. Architecture,
subsystems, block diagrams, call processing, Man-Machine Interface (MMI) commands, and file transfer are
included in order to provide basic information on the EMX 2500/5000 switch.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
describe the major functions, components, and subsystems of the EMX 2500/5000 switching system.
In this course, you will learn to:
Describe the EMX 2500/5000 switch architecture, including the:
hardware frames, shelves, and Printed Circuit Boards (PCBs)
components of the switch subsystems:
functions l power structure and tolerance values
operation of power converters
Remove and install:
power converters
PCBs
Analyze call processing within the EMX 2500/5000 switch by:
studying call processing, both from a mobile-originated and from a land-originated call
loading/unloading the Tape Transport Unit
Communicate with the switch through setup and operation of a Configuration, Administration, and Maintenance
Position (CAMP) terminal:
by identifying the command protocols and classes
by executing MMI commands
by transferring and manipulating files
generating traffic metering and measurement reports

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

285

CDMA-SWT120 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation &


Maintenance (Week 2)
Duration

Practical/Lab Content

5 days

Yes

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 ANA-GNL020 : Analog Cellular Overview Companion CDROM
2 ANA-GNL030 : Analog Cellular Systems Overview
3 CDMA-SWT110 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance
(Week 1)
4 Working knowledge of RF theory and
communications electronics.

Audience
This course is designed for personnel involved with the
daily operation and maintenance of the EMX 2500/
5000 switch.
The target audience includes:
Switch Technicians
System Managers

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This course is the second in a 3-part series and is a continuation of the material presented in the Week 1 course
(CDMA-SWT120 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance (Week 2)). It begins with a short review of Week 1 material; it
then continues with additional Man-Machine Interface, fault analysis and resolution processes, and information on
data retrieval for operational use.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
describe the major functions, components, and subsystems of the EMX 2500/5000 switching system and will
be able to perform some fault analysis and problem resolution.
In this course, you will learn to:
Troubleshoot and maintain the switch by:
defining the categories of alarms and decoding specified alarms
listing and defining the Information and Problem Reporting (IPR) log types
performing fault analysis using Information and Problem Reporting (IPR)
Analyze call processing within the EMX 2500/5000 switch by:
describing, generating, and storing Call Detail Records (CDRs)
defining the purpose of call treatment and Call Final Classes
executing the Search Batch MMI command
identifying the basic translations process, including:
the purpose of dialed digit translation
the mobile validation process
changing/modifying office codes, mobile IDs, local subscribers, and roamer database tables
explaining the purpose of the Digital ANnouncer (DAN)

286

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

CDMA-SWT130 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation &


Maintenance (Week 3)
Duration

Practical/Lab Content

5 days

Yes

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 ANA-GNL020 : Analog Cellular Overview Companion CDROM
2 ANA-GNL030 : Analog Cellular Systems Overview
3 CDMA-SWT110 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance
(Week 1)
4 CDMA-SWT120 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance
(Week 2)
5 Working knowledge of RF theory and
communications electronics.

Audience
This course is designed for people involved with the
operation and maintenance of the EMX 2500/5000
switch. The target audience is individuals with little or
no experience on the EMX 2500/5000 switch,
including Switch Technicians and System Managers.

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This course is the third in a 3-part series and continues the learning process of the Week 2 training course (CDMASWT120 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance (Week 2)). A short review of Week 2 material is presented; then this
course continues with additional maintenance and operational procedures, modification of the cell site database,
command file use, and off-line Initial Program Load (IPL) processes.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
operate and maintain an EMX 2500/5000 switching system and will be able to modify various databases for
day-to-day operations.
In this course, you will learn to:
Communicate with the switch through:
operation of a Configuration, Administration, and Maintenance Position (CAMP) terminal by:
executing created command files
identifying the types, purpose, and use of log files
adding/deleting a cell site to/from the EMX switch database
creating a new, and expanding an existing trunk group
removing and restoring trunk circuits and trunk groups
Troubleshoot and maintain the switch by:
performing an Admin Initial Program Load (AIPL)/System Initial Program Load (SIPL) from a Debug terminal
performing Radio Channel Tests

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

287

CDMA-SWT150 : EMX Advanced

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

5 days

Yes

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 ANA-GNL020 : Analog Cellular Overview Companion CDROM
2 ANA-GNL030 : Analog Cellular Systems Overview
3 CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance
or
CDMA-SWT110 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance
(Week 1) and CDMA-SWT120 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation
& Maintenance (Week 2) and CDMA-SWT130 : EMX 2500/
5000 Operation & Maintenance (Week 3)
4 6 Months Field Experience (Recommended)

Audience
Customer technicians, support personnel, Motorola
CFEs, and engineers who require advanced fault
analysis and problem-resolution techniques.

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This course provides a more comprehensive look at the EMX switching systems, functionality of the systems,
and the additional problem resolution tools available to the craftsperson. Some of the topics that will be discussed
in this class include functionality of the fault isolation subsystem, use of processor debug, decoding of matrix
pathway IPRs and other advanced procedures.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
operate and maintain the EMX 2500 or 5000 switch system with a higher or greater level of proficiency, as
well as identify and resolve some of the more unusual system anomalies.
In this course, you will learn to:
interpret matrix failure IPRs
connect the Debug cable and terminal to a processor, then execute basic Debug commands
perform an Initial Program Load
perform specified Debug operations
use Debug to examine and modify database elements

288

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

CDMA-SWT160 : DMX

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

4 days

Yes

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

Offered in the Illinois Motorola training facility only, or


other premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 ANA-GNL030 : Analog Cellular Systems Overview
2 CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance
or
CDMA-SWT110 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance
(Week 1) and CDMA-SWT120 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation
& Maintenance (Week 2) and CDMA-SWT130 : EMX 2500/
5000 Operation & Maintenance (Week 3)

Audience

Cellular Field Engineers


Operations Managers
On-site Switch Operators

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This course has been designed to give the student practice in establishing, testing and troubleshooting a DMX
network consisting of at least two EMX switches.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
create, test, and troubleshoot a DMX network between two EMX switches.
In this course, you will learn to:
define the function of each hardware element required to establish a DMX connection between two EMX
2500s
Bit Error Rate Test (BERT) a data link
design a DMX configuration using all hardware elements required to connect two EMXs
determine if a data link is clean
use an established testing procedure in order to determine if the DMX network can successfully complete
EMX to EMX handoffs
given a basic configuration consisting of two EMX2500s, list the commands needed to implement DMX
execute the commands to install DMXing on our training switches
execute the commands from Section 4 on both of the EMXs that are being DMXed together
list commands needed to implement DMX
execute the commands to install DMXing

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

289

CDMA-SWT180 : Managing Switch Performance and


Growth
Duration

Practical/Lab Content

5 days

Yes

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 ANA-GNL020 : Analog Cellular Overview Companion CDROM
2 ANA-GNL030 : Analog Cellular Systems Overview
3 CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance
or
CDMA-SWT110 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance
(Week 1) and CDMA-SWT120 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation
& Maintenance (Week 2) and CDMA-SWT130 : EMX 2500/
5000 Operation & Maintenance (Week 3)

Audience
People involved with performance monitoring of the
EMX 2500/5000 switch.

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This course has been designed to identify and provide the applicable activities and skills necessary for switch
performance monitoring and growth planning. In order to express the performance of the system and assess the
switch's capacity, its call model must be defined through the collecting of available pegged statistics. Besides
presentation of fundamental traffic engineering terms and management techniques, the course provided detailed
mathematical steps on Linear Regression Analysis (LRA) and associated statistical concepts to achieve highly
reliable prediction of processor and link capacities, as well as circuit group provisioning. An underlying course
objective is to provide the engineer the necessary details to design, develop and compose a performance and
capacity analysis computer program, or spreadsheets. To that end, a simple computer program called Load Line
Analysis (LLA) is presented that can be used to calculate the processor's utilization and a few other switch
subsystems. Call model and LRA spreadsheets are used and provided with this course. In addition to LRA,
Multivariable Linear Regression Analysis (MLRA) is also explored. Made available with this course is a computer
program that enables determination of switch circuit group sizing, using the standard traffic models of Erlang B,
Erlang C, Poisson, Engset and the Equivalent Random Theory.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
develop a comprehensive plan for continually monitoring and planning the growth of the EMX 2500/5000
switch for any RF technology mix of analog and CDMA.
In this course, you will learn:
the four steps of system performance management:
* Monitoring the System
* Determining Current Status
* Growth and Capacity Planning
* Performance Engineering Techniques
the EMX, Analog and some CDMA statistics to monitor
to define the call model for the EMX, Analog and CDMA RF technology, and CDMA CBSC from the switch's
vantage point
about multi processor load balancing, traffic engineering practices and the EMX System Resource Guide
(ESRG) for system performance optimization

290

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

CDMA-SWT240 : EMX Translations (International)

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

3 days

Yes

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

Offered in the Illinois Motorola training facility only, or


other premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 ANA-GNL020 : Analog Cellular Overview Companion CDROM
2 ANA-GNL030 : Analog Cellular Systems Overview
3 ANA-SWT040 : EMX 2500 Overview
or
CDMA-SWT110 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance
(Week 1)

Audience
This course is designed for people who are, or will be,
responsible for updating and modifying the translator
of an EMX switch.The target audience includes
switch technicians and systems engineers.

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This course provides an explanation of the function and operation of the translator in the EMX cellular switch.
Personal dialing plans and extended tables are NOT included. Translator tables are used for originating and
terminating mobile validation, both local and remote, translation of dialed digits in mobile- and land-originated
calls and modification of an existing translator.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
explain the mobile validation process and the results of both inward and outward translations.
read the translations tables and determine the output of each, translate calls that use roamer access dialing,
exception routing, voice mail, external devices, and sector-of-origin routing and modify the appropriate tables
to add a new area code or office code.
In this course, you will learn to:
identify the:
components that make up a world number
process involved in local and remote validation of an originating/terminating mobile
inward and outward translation processes
process for translating roamer access dialing, exception routing, voice mail, sector-of-origin routing, and
routing to external devices
determine which tables need to be accessed when routing a set of dialed digits to determine the trunk group
and outpulsed digits
make the proper changes in the tables to route the new area code without call failure

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

291

CDMA-SWT260 : CCS/SS7 Implementation

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

3 days.

Yes

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 Four to six months experience on the switch.
2 CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling
3 CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance
or
CDMA-SWT110 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance
(Week 1) and CDMA-SWT120 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation
& Maintenance (Week 2) and CDMA-SWT130 : EMX 2500/
5000 Operation & Maintenance (Week 3)

Audience
Personnel responsible for operations, data fills,
systems operations, troubleshooting on the EMX
switch.

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This Course deals with implementing Common Channel Signaling/Signaling System Seven (CCS/SS7) software
version 7.8 and higher on the EMX switch and with database administration for connections to the Centralized
Base Site Controller (CBSC) and Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN). This course covers the installation,
testing, and monitoring of the EMX switch hardware and database for SS7 (PSTN), SS7 A+, CBSC links with
software load 7.8 version and higher.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Plan SS7 into the EMX switch
Optimize the SS7 subsystem and database management
Maintain the EMX hardware and database for SS7
Perform diagnostics tests on the databases for the SS7 network

292

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

CDMA-SWT270 : CCS/C7 Implementation

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

5 days

Yes

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

Offered by the Latin America and Caribbean Motorola


training facilities only, or other premises by
arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 Four to six months experience on the switch.
2 CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling
3 CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance
or
CDMA-SWT110 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance
(Week 1) and CDMA-SWT120 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation
& Maintenance (Week 2) and CDMA-SWT130 : EMX 2500/
5000 Operation & Maintenance (Week 3)

Audience
Personnel responsible for operations, data fills,
systems operations, troubleshooting on the EMX
switch.

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This Course deals with implementing Common Channel Signaling/Signaling System Seven (CCS/C7) software
version 2.9 connections to the Centralized Base Site Controller (CBSC) and Public Switched Telephone Network
(PSTN). This course covers the installation, testing, and monitoring of the EMX switch hardware and database
for C7 (PSTN), SS7 A+, with software load 2.9 version and higher.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Plan C7 into the EMX switch
Optimize the C7 subsystem and database management
Maintain the EMX hardware and database for C7
Perform diagnostics tests on the databases for the C7 network
Perform the creation of many types of links that use Signaling System Seven

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

293

CDMA-SWT280 : Split Mode Operation and Maintenance

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

2 days

Yes

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


Digital System
1 CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM
2 CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
3 CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance
or
CDMA-SWT110 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance
(Week 1) and CDMA-SWT120 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation
& Maintenance (Week 2) and CDMA-SWT130 : EMX 2500/
5000 Operation & Maintenance (Week 3)
Analog System
1 ANA-GNL020 : Analog Cellular Overview Companion CDROM
2 ANA-GNL030 : Analog Cellular Systems Overview
3 CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance
or
CDMA-SWT110 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance
(Week 1) and CDMA-SWT120 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation
& Maintenance (Week 2) and CDMA-SWT130 : EMX 2500/
5000 Operation & Maintenance (Week 3)

Audience
Personnel involved in the preparation, installation and
maintenance of the EMX2500 and/or EMX5000
switch(es) using Split Mode operation.

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This course provides information about the preparation, installation, and maintenance of the EMX 2500 and/or
EMX 5000 switch using Split Mode procedures.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course the student will be able to:
Perform Split Mode Operation procedures including preparation, installation, and maintenance of the EMX
2500 and/or EMX 5000 switch.
In this course, you will learn to:
perform Split Mode preventive maintenance and database verification
accomplish Split Mode system preparation and configuration
perform Split system and Split SIPL
perform disk restoral
perform Split Mode Operation backout

294

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

CDMA-SWT281 : SLIC II Operations

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

2 days

Yes

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM
(Recommended)
2 CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
(Recommended)
3 CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling
(Recommended)
4 CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance
or
CDMA-SWT110 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance
(Week 1) and CDMA-SWT120 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation
& Maintenance (Week 2) and CDMA-SWT130 : EMX 2500/
5000 Operation & Maintenance (Week 3)
5 CDMA-SWT280 : Split Mode Operation and Maintenance
6 Basic understanding of CDMA principles

Audience
People who require training in the application of SLIC II
for software loading and maintenance on the
EMX2500 and/or EMX5000 switch.

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This course has been designed to help technical personnel proficient in operation of the EMX2500 and/or
EMX5000 perform software installation and maintenance of the switch using SLIC II.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to perform SLIC II Procedures including:
Accomplish SLIC II computer initialization using SLICBak.
Perform software installation on an EMX2500 and/or EMX5000 using the SLIC II computer and scripts.
SLIC II fault recovery.
In this course you will learn to:
Describe the purpose of SLIC II.
Describe SLIC II components.
Describe SLIC II tools.
Describe the SLIC II Help function.
Describe the procedure to run SLICBak.
Describe the procedures to start SLIC II.
Describe the SLIC II automatic restart function.
Describe SLIC II tools.
Describe the process to power down SLIC II.
Perform SLICBak on the SLIC II laptop computer.
Perform Split Mode hardware verification.
Perform Split Mode database verification.
Resolve errors associated with:
Standby Hardware Integrity and Disk Verification
Split Mode Database Verification Errors
Perform SLIC II pre-installation procedures.
Accomplish SLIC II installation.

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

295

CDMA-SWT340 : EMX 5000 Overview

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

3 days

Yes

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

Offered in the Illinois Motorola training facility only, or


other premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


None

Audience
People who require an overall description of the EMX
5000, as well as the subsystem component functions,
capabilities and capacities.

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This course has been designed to provide an overview of the components and capabilities of the EMX 5000.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
describe the basic components and capabilities of the EMX 5000.
In this course, you will learn to:
describe the primary functions of any EMX 5000 subsystem and the physical attributes of each frame
identify the capacities of a minimum and expansion configuration and the major blocks of the alarm subsystem
interpret visual alarm displays and decode and interpret Information and Problem Reports (IPRs)
describe billing and statistical information generated by the EMX 5000, including:
the devices necessary for Call Detail Record (CDR) generation and storage
the relationship between Automatic Message Accounting (AMA) batch files and the billing file
Traffic Metering and Measurement (TMM) data storage, the major TMM reporting systems, the Man-Machine
Interface (MMI) commands to display or distribute AMA/TMM data
trace the call processing sequence for a mobile-to-land call

296

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

CDMA-SWT370 : EMX-V Implementation/Migration

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

4 days

Yes

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


Digital System
1 CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM
2 CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
3 CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling
4 CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance
or
CDMA-SWT110 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance
(Week 1) and CDMA-SWT120 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation
& Maintenance (Week 2) and CDMA-SWT130 : EMX 2500/
5000 Operation & Maintenance (Week 3)
Analog System
1 ANA-GNL020 : Analog Cellular Overview Companion CDROM
2 ANA-GNL030 : Analog Cellular Systems Overview
3 CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance
or
CDMA-SWT110 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance
(Week 1) and CDMA-SWT120 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation
& Maintenance (Week 2) and CDMA-SWT130 : EMX 2500/
5000 Operation & Maintenance (Week 3)

Audience
Personnel responsible for the Installation, Operation
and Maintenance of the Electronic Mobile Exchange
(EMX) switch with a Visitor Location Register
(EMX-V).

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This course provides information about the operation of the EMX-V switch. The student will review the hardware
and will be introduced to the software, the database, and operation of the EMX-V switch.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
install and expand the EMX-V switch hardware and software, perform VLR processor board database
operations, interpret and troubleshoot diagnostic reports on the EMX-V switch, manage Traffic Metering and
Measurements (TMM) data, analyze ANSI-41 standard messages.
In this course, you will learn to:
install and expand the EMX-V switch hardware and software.
perform VLR processor board database operation
interpret and troubleshoot diagnostic reports on the EMX-V switch
manage Traffic Metering and Measurements (TMM) data
analyze ANSI-41 standard messages

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

297

CDMA-SWT440 : EMX-V Translations

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

5 days

Yes

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


Digital System
1 CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM
2 CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
3 CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling
4 CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance
or
CDMA-SWT110 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance
(Week 1) and CDMA-SWT120 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation
& Maintenance (Week 2) and CDMA-SWT130 : EMX 2500/
5000 Operation & Maintenance (Week 3)
Analog System
1 ANA-GNL020 : Analog Cellular Overview Companion CDROM
2 ANA-GNL030 : Analog Cellular Systems Overview
3 CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance
or
CDMA-SWT110 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation & Maintenance
(Week 1) and CDMA-SWT120 : EMX 2500/5000 Operation
& Maintenance (Week 2) and CDMA-SWT130 : EMX 2500/
5000 Operation & Maintenance (Week 3)

Audience
Personnel responsible for updating and modifying the
translator of an EMX 2500/5000 cellular switch
equipped with the VLR processor.

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This Course has been designed to assist switch technicians and system engineers in understanding the function
and operation of an EMX-V switch. The course covers:
identification of the sequence of database tables found on the VLR processor
translation of the dialed digits in a mobile originated call using translator tables to determine the trunk group
routing list and character string to outpulse to the Public Switched Telephone Network
translation of the dialed digits in a land originated call is explained using translator tables to determine the
character string to use in the page message

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
perform translation of dialed digits and modify an existing translator.
In this course, you will learn to:
perform translation of dialed digits, from an ANSI-41 and non-ANSI-4
subscriber, in a mobile-to-land call to determine the trunk group routing list and character string to outpulse to
the Public Switched Telephone Network
perform translation of the dialed digits in a land-to-mobile call to determine the actual characters to use in the
page message
modify an existing translator

298

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

CDMA-SWT450 : EMX Operation and Maintenance

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

15 days

Yes

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


Digital System
1 CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM
2 CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
3 CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling
Analog System
1 ANA-GNL020 : Analog Cellular Overview Companion CDROM
2 ANA-GNL030 : Analog Cellular Systems Overview
3 CDMA-GNL100 : SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling

Audience
People requiring a basic understanding of the major
components and subsystems of the EMX 2500/5000
switch, as well as the interaction of the subsystems.
Included are those involved in the daily operation and
maintenance of the EMX 2500/5000 switch.

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This course has been designed to provide information concerning the EMX system architecture and
subsystems. Block diagrams of system interconnection and bus architecture as well as call processing, ManMachine Interface (MMI), basic system operation, Information and Problem Reporting, troubleshooting and
corrective maintenance procedures, file loading to and from the equipment, routine backup procedures, and
command file operation are covered.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Operate and maintain the hardware components of the EMX 2500/5000 Switch.
In this course, you will learn to:
Describe the various elements of the EMX 2500/5000 hardware and software
Operate and maintain the hardware of the EMX 2500/5000 system
Describe the process of loading software onto the EMX 2500/5000 system
Assign a new user on the switch
Troubleshoot the EMX 2500/5000 system
Maintain the EMX database for adding various communication links for the CBSC and cell sites (analog and
digital)
Describe the Translation process on the EMX 2500/5000 system

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

299

CDMA-SYS100OM : 1X Operations and Maintenance:


Overview
Duration

Practical/Lab Content

4 hours

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM
2 CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)

Audience
Personnel involved in the day-to-day operations and
maintenance of a Motorola digital network, specifically
new CDMA System Operators.

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This module provides an overview of day-to-day operator procedures, alarm monitoring and handling, and device
state management.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Identify an operators basic job responsibilities.
Describe the new G16.x System Architecture.
Provide a brief description of the Network Elements that comprise the System Architecture and the call paths.
Explain the Four-Step Operations and Maintenance Work Process Flow.
Describe operator shift activities.
Explain and monitor alarms using performance and fault management.
Identify activities to avoid under normal operating conditions.

300

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

CDMA-SYS200 : CBSC/RFDS Operations

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

2 days

Yes

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM
2 CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)r
3 GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals
4 Any BTS course.

Audience
This course is designed for technical and support
personnel responsible for performing basic system
operation duties at the CBSC/OMC-R, BTS field sites
and associated OMC-R/SC-UNO and/or UNO
processor applications for remote BTS fault
identification and recovery. Personnel include: Cellular
Field Engineers, CDMA System Operators, Cellular
Network Administrators and System Administrators.

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This course has been designed to provide a description of the RF Diagnostic Subsystem for PCS/Cellular
base stations

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

301

CDMA-SYS200 : CBSC/RFDS Operations

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:

perform RFDS testing, analyze test results and perform troubleshooting procedures
perform remote BTS fault BTS identification/recovery procedures using the OMC-R/SC-UNO and/or UNO
enable operators/technicians to utilize command syntax to execute RFDS test commands from the OMC-R and
LMF
utilize RFDS tests and analyze the results
furnish BTS technicians engaged in BTS fault identification/recovery procedures using the SC-UNO and/or
UNO

In this course, you will learn to:

describe the purpose of the RF Diagnostic Subsystem in troubleshooting the CDMA base station
describe the modules and the functionality of the modules in the RFDS, the function of the LMF forward and
reverse tests, and the signal path to/from the RFDS when testing
perform RFDS-LMF testing procedures
describe the supporting software needed to implement RFDS in a CDMA network and identify files which must
be created
describe parameters associated with RFDS reason codes
perform OMC-R testing procedures related to the RFDS
describe RFDS fault analysis and troubleshooting procedures
perform RFDS software configuration and troubleshooting procedures
describe numerical error messages associated with the RFDS
perform command file scheduling procedures
describe the major components of the OMC-R/SC-UNO and/or UNO
use fault identification tools of the SC-UNO and/or UNO including the Alarm Display Monitor, CLI window and
browse cdllog
determine the status of cards via the front panel LEDs and status FEPs using CLI commands
execute fault recover procedures to replace/reseat cards/devices and bring the SCXXXX (as required) back
into service

302

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

CDMA-SYS300 : CDMA System Optimization of the RF Link

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

5 days

Yes

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM
2 CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
3 Knowledge of call processing
4 Knowledge of the CBSC and associated Super Cell
CLI commands

Audience
Primary audience System engineers responsible for
testing, troubleshooting, and benchmarking the RF link
of a CDMA system.
Secondary audience Cellular Field Engineers,
product managers, market managers, and sales
personnel who meet the prerequisites

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This course presents the basic concepts, measurements and messages that are needed to analyze common
problems found through testing the RF Link of an existing CDMA system during call processing. Testing is done by
making calls.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to identify and make recommendations for resolving
common problems found on CDMA systems, by analyzing data collected over the RF link, with assistance from
some other tools.
In this course you will learn to:
Identify the importance of good system design as part of CDMA system optimization.
Describe the basic concepts and the key CDMA system parameters useful to optimization, and practice the
associated Super Cell CLI display commands.
Describe the basic tests, measurements and types of test equipment that are basic to analyzing problems:
(some of these tests will be simulated in the lab)
Describe the basic plots and messaging that are basic to analyzing post-processed data. (Presently students
will not post-process data)
Analyze messages and plots that have already been post-processed from the field, in order to identify common
traffic channel problems: related to neighbor lists, pilot pollution, coverage holes, window sizes, and pilot
surprise.
Explain how equipment, signal path, call flow, CFCs, and access window sizes relate to access problems.
Explain how caution should be taken in making database changes, or changes to the system design, since
solving one problem may create several others
Troubleshoot unknown problems in the lab using the active displays and replay mode of the mobile diagnostic
monitor and System Monitoring Application Processor. (may also include problems that test basic knowledge of
equipment, signal paths, call flow, call detail logs, call final class, and key CMDA parameters)
Perform edit commands in the lab.

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

303

CDMA-XC100NE : XC Network Element Overview for


Release 16.x
Duration

Practical/Lab Content

4 hours

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

Log onto to Motorolas Lifecycle Services On-Line


(https://services.motorola.com), and click on the Technical
Training Direct link.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM
2 CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
3 CDMA-GNL130 : 1X Overview
or
CDMA-GNL131 : e1X Overview (Web-based)

Audience
Wireless operators responsible for the installation and
maintenance of the Transcoder (XC).

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
This module is designed to cover the upgrade of the XC hardware and software as it applies the CDMA R16
architecture.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Identify how the XC fits into the R16 network
Describe the purpose of the XC in the R16 network
Describe frame and card/slot components
Describe installation and post-installation of the Transcoder

304

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

CDMA-XC100OM : Operations and Maintenance: XC

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

4 hours

Yes

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 CDMA-GNL060 : Basic CDMA Concepts CD-ROM
2 CDMA-GNL070 : SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
3 GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals
4 CDMA-SYS100OM : 1X Operations and Maintenance:
Overview
5 CDMA-XC100NE : XC Network Element Overview for Release
16.x

Audience
Personnel involved in the day-to-day operations and
maintenance of a Motorola digital network, specifically
the Transcoder (XC).

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This module provides operators information on the Transcoder (XC) and hands-on
experience in their critical on-site tasks relating to the Transcoder. This module
incorporates recent 1X technology that impacts the XC.
Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Describe the Transcoder functions in a cellular network.
Describe the basic functions of the Transcoder hardware.
Monitor Transcoder alarms.
Perform Device State Management on the Transcoder.

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

305

306

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

GSM Courses
GSM Technology courses equip the student with the knowledge required to commission, maintain, monitor and
optimize GSM networks. It is imperative that course descriptions are read to confirm suitability for each student
and to ensure that all prerequisite training is completed.

GSM-BSS05 : BTS Theory and Equipment Operation ........................................................................................ 308


GSM-BSS07 : Advanced BSS Field Support....................................................................................................... 309
GSM-BSS11 : BSS Operational Theory .............................................................................................................. 310
GSM-BSS11A : BSS Overview (Non-Technical) ................................................................................................. 311
GSM-BSS12 : BSS Operations and Maintenance ............................................................................................... 312
GSM-BSS14 : BSS Technical Overview.............................................................................................................. 313
GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular .......................................................................................................... 314
GSM-CP02A : GSM Cellular Overview (Non-Technical) ..................................................................................... 315
GSM-ENG941 : Understanding GSM .................................................................................................................. 316
GSM-GNL171 : GSM Air Interface....................................................................................................................... 317
GSM-GNL172 : GSM Signaling and Protocols Architecture ................................................................................ 318
GSM-GNL173 : GSM Signaling and Protocols Procedures................................................................................. 319
GSM-NET01 : OMC-R Network Operations ........................................................................................................ 320
GSM-NET02 : OMC-R Advanced Network Operations ....................................................................................... 321
GSM-NET03 : Network Performance................................................................................................................... 322
GSM-NET05 : Network Health Analyst ................................................................................................................ 323
GSM-NET06 : Datagen Operations ..................................................................................................................... 324
GSM-OMC01 : OMC-R Overview........................................................................................................................ 325
GSM-OMC01A : OMC-R Overview (Non-Technical) ........................................................................................... 326
GSM-OMC03 : OMC-R System Administration (E3x00 Platform) ....................................................................... 327
GSM-SYS01 : GSM Interfaces and Protocols ..................................................................................................... 328
GSM-SYS02 : Introduction to BSS Database...................................................................................................... 329
GSM-SYS03 : Advanced BSS Database............................................................................................................. 330
GSM-SYS04 : Introduction to BSS Planning and Dimensioning.......................................................................... 331
GSM-SYS12 : Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multi-layered Systems ...................................................... 332

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

307

GSM-BSS05 : BTS Theory and Equipment Operation

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

5 days

Yes

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular

Audience
Technical staff requiring a technical introduction to
current and legacy BTS products

Features
An instructor-led course providing both a theoretical
overview and practical appreciation of In-Cell, M-Cell
and Horizon BTS equipment. The emphasis of this
course is hands-on and provides a valuable training
vehicle for BTS maintenance engineers.

Course Content
BSS05 provides an overall appreciation of BTS equipment. The course covers In-Cell, M-Cell and Horizon
equipment. The course has an emphasis on practical sessions including MMI commands and transceiver
optimization.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of the course the student will be able to:
State the function and purpose of the Base Station Controller (BSC) components, identifying the
communication paths within the BSC and state the difference between extension and expansion.
State the function of the Base Transceiver Site (BTS) and describe the common configurations of the In-Cell
BTS.
State the different configurations used for M-Cell cabinets and describe the power requirements and routing
within the cabinets.
Describe the digital and RF components used in M-Cell and state the common RF configurations.
State the cabinet, digital and RF component configurations used in Horizon equipment.
Describe the common configurations of digital and RF components used in M-Cellcity and M-Cellcity+.

308

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

GSM-BSS07 : Advanced BSS Field Support

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

5 days

Yes

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular
2 GSM-BSS11 : BSS Operational Theory
3 GSM-BSS12 : BSS Operations and Maintenance
4 GSM-SYS01 : GSM Interfaces and Protocols
5 GSM-SYS02 : Introduction to BSS Database

Audience
Experienced Field Support Engineers. Training is only
recommended for specialized personnel who need
knowledge of BSS Level 3 tools to further enhance
field support procedures.

Features
An in-depth insight into both the InCell and M-Cell/
Horizon software functionality and onboard debugging
tools. The course provides an understanding of Level
3 tools available to investigate field problems using MCell/ Horizon specific Level 3 commands.The course
also provides a useful manual for field use, containing
many commonly used filters and IIR masks

Course Content
This course describes BSS software processes and the level 3 EMON command set. Topics include internal
message routing, system memory, filters and the generation of internal information reports. Software fault
management, performance analysis and the use of EMON commands to interrogate MCAP and M-Cell/Horizon
specific devices are also covered.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Describe the function of all software processes including how messages are constructed, interpreted and
transferred internally.
Describe and safely use commands available from the RAM EMON prompt, including use of filters and the full
suite of masks available for the iir-mod command.
Describe and safely use messages to interrogate various internal components.
Interpret SWFMs
Use tools available on the system for performance analysis.

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

309

GSM-BSS11 : BSS Operational Theory

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

5 days

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular

Audience
BSS Installation, Commissioning & Maintenance
Engineers, OMC Engineers, BSS Database and
Planning Engineers, BSS System Optimization
Engineers.

Features
An instructor-led course describing the operation and
function of the current Motorola Transcoder, Base
Station Controller and Base Transceiver Station
products.

Course Content
This course covers the operational theory of the BSC, Transcoder, Horizonmacro, Horizonmicro2,
Horizoncompact2 and Horizonoffice and also provides an overview of BSS software and the customer MMI.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Describe the generic function and configuration of the major components of the RXCDR, BSC and current BTS
products.
Identify and state the function of signaling and interconnections within the BSS.
State the function and describe the simplified principles of operation of field replaceable units within all current
BSS subsystem products.
State the function of the major component parts of all current BSS subsystem products.
Name the major sections of the BSS software system and describe the function of selected processes.

Note: This course is designed to replace BSS08, MC09 and the theoretical objectives of
MC01. BSS12 has replaced the practical objectives of MC01. Delegates who have
previously attended BSS08/MC09 or BSS08/MC01 should not attend BSS11.

310

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

GSM-BSS11A : BSS Overview (Non-Technical)

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

1 day

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


None

Audience
This course is intended for non-technical staff requiring
an appreciation of the components and functionality of
a BSS.

Features
An instructor-led course providing non-technical
overview information of a Motorola Base Station.

Course Content
This course covers the principles of the BSS and describes the features and network components of the BSS.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Name the major components of a BSS and describe their functionality.
Explain how a BSS connects to a GSM network.
Identify different BSS types and state when and why each would be used.

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

311

GSM-BSS12 : BSS Operations and Maintenance

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

3 days

Yes

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular
2 GSM-BSS11 : BSS Operational Theory

Audience
BSS Installation, Commissioning and Maintenance
Engineers.

Features
An instructor-led course describing the procedures
required for BSS site integration, optimization and
maintenance. This course also includes a number of
practical exercises.

Course Content
This course covers the practical aspects of BSS site configuration, integration and maintenance.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Monitor and describe the BSS initialization processes and perform an MMI command exercise.
Display and describe the content of the site code object lists and the procedure for loading BSS code objects
using Lanload.
Describe and demonstrate the procedure for loading or changing a site configuration management database
using MMI sysgen mode.
Install and connect sub-assemblies to produce specified site hardware configurations, and perform BSS site
calibration/optimization procedures.

312

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

GSM-BSS14 : BSS Technical Overview

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

2 days

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular

Audience
Technical staff requiring an appreciation of the
Motorola BSS system.

Features
An instructor-led course providing an overview of
Motorola BSS equipment.

Course Content
This course is designed as a technical introduction to the BSC cabinet, Horizonmacro, Horizonmicro2,
Horizoncompact2 and Horizonoffice. An overview of the MMI interface is also covered.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
State the function of each of the major components in the BSS.
State the major functions and describe the basic operation of field replaceable units within the current BSS
products.
State the recommended implementation of each of the BTS cabinets within the current product range.
State the reasoning for each of the levels of MMI security.

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

313

GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

2 days

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


None

Audience
The course is intended for technical staff requiring a
detailed appreciation of the components and
functionality of GSM cellular systems.

Features
An instructor-led course providing a detailed
introduction to GSM cellular.
This course is also available as a Computer Based
Training product.

Course Content
This course covers the principles of cellular telecommunications and describes the features and network
components of GSM. It describes the terrestrial and air interfaces associated with GSM, including channels and
channel coding, radio interface optimization, GSM call set-up with handover sequences and an introduction to
microcellular are also included.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Describe the main components of a cellular network and state the different cell types.
Illustrate the major components of a GSM network, identifying interconnections and protocols used.
Describe the air interface structure and the mechanisms used to protect the air interface from errors.
Outline the basic GSM call set-up, handover procedures and the necessary message exchanges used.

314

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

GSM-CP02A : GSM Cellular Overview (Non-Technical)

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

1 day

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


None

Audience
This course is intended for non-technical staff requiring
an appreciation of the components and functionality of
GSM cellular system.

Features
An instructor-led course providing non-technical
overview information of GSM cellular networks.

Course Content
This course covers the principles of cellular telecommunications and describes the features and network
components of GSM.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Name the main components of a cellular network and describe their functionality.
Explain the advantages of using GSM digital cellular systems.
Identify different cell types and state when and why each would be used.
Name the major components of GSM networks and explain system interconnection.

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

315

GSM-ENG941 : Understanding GSM

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

Self-paced, approximately 16 hours

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

Log onto to Motorolas Lifecycle Services On-Line


(https://services.motorola.com), and click on the Technical
Training Direct link.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


None

Audience
This course is intended for people who want an
understanding of the breadth of technical concepts
behind GSM, as well as how GSM fits into the wireless
industry.

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
This module is designed to provide students with an understanding of the many technologies used in GSM based
systems. students will also learn the digital processes used for signal reliability, control of the air interface, GSM's
main network characteristics, and the differences among competing technologies.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will:
Be familiar with GSM's network characteristics, Quality of Service mechanisms, and system capacity.
Understand how GSM fits into the global wireless picture and provides the information students need to make
informed, knowledgeable decisions about how to use GSM's capabilities and features in today's wireless
marketplace.

316

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

GSM-GNL171 : GSM Air Interface

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

Self-paced, approximately 3 hours

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

Log onto to Motorolas Lifecycle Services On-Line


(https://services.motorola.com), and click on the Technical
Training Direct link.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 An understanding of the basics of GSM.

Audience
The main target audiences for this course are:
Engineers new to GSM voice networks
Radio planners
Network planners
Value added service providers
Sales/marketing staff with expertise in the mobile
market

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
This module is designed to provide a comprehensive overview of the use of physical and transport channels on
the Air Interface.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
outline the different stages in the development of GSM
identify the challenges presented by GSM's transmission environment
identify the solutions devised for GSM's transmission challenges
outline the main stages of GSM's transmission processes
describe the physical and transport channels on the GSM Air Interface
identify GSM's security management systems

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

317

GSM-GNL172 : GSM Signaling and Protocols Architecture

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

Self-paced, approximately 3 hours

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

Log onto to Motorolas Lifecycle Services On-Line


(https://services.motorola.com), and click on the Technical
Training Direct link.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 An understanding of the basics of GSM.
2 GNL171 GSM Air Interface

Audience
The main target audiences for this course are:
Engineers new to GSM networks
Technology project managers
Network planners
Value added service providers

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
This module is designed to provide a comprehensive overview of the role of signaling in GSM, and consider in
detail the GSM sub-system entities and signaling protocol architecture.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
define the role of signaling in GSM
identify the protocols used in GSM signaling
describe the GSM interfaces
describe the GSM sub-system entities
describe the GSM's protocol architecture

318

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

GSM-GNL173 : GSM Signaling and Protocols Procedures

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

Self-paced, approximately 3 hours

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

Log onto to Motorolas Lifecycle Services On-Line


(https://services.motorola.com), and click on the Technical
Training Direct link.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 An understanding of the basics of GSM.
2 GNL171 GSM Air Interface
3 GNL172 GSM Signaling & Protocols Architecture

Audience
The main target audiences for this course are:
Engineers new to GSM networks
Technology project managers
Network planners
Value added service providers

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
This module is designed to provide an overview of the practical application of the signaling systems and protocols
described in GSM Signaling and Protocols Architectures (GNL172). In particular, this course describes GSM's use
of signaling in its synchronization, location update, handover, and security procedures, and in various call
scenarios.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
describe synchronization in GSM
describe GSM's location update procedure, from initiation to conclusion
identify the purpose of GSM's security procedures
describe the role of signaling in GSM's security procedures
describe the placing of an MS-to PSTN call from a GSM PLMN
describe the placing of a PSTN-to-MS call
describe the placing of an MS-to-MS within a GSM PLMN
describe GSM's intra-MSC handover and Inter-MSC handover processes

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

319

GSM-NET01 : OMC-R Network Operations

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

5 days

Yes

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular
2 GSM-BSS11 : BSS Operational Theory

Audience
Network Operators, Administrators and System
Engineers.

Features
An instructor-led practical course designed to train
personnel in the daily tasks of network operations.

Course Content
The course is designed to introduce personnel to the hardware and software associated with an OMC-R system. It
covers the interaction of the OMC-R with other network entities and details how the OMC-R can be used to load
software objects and databases to control a network configuration. It also provides instruction on the use of the
Graphical User Interface (GUI) to display alarms and events, how to interact with the displayed alarms and how to
access statistics gathered from all network entities for analysis purposes.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Learn to use the OMC-R to operate a network of BSSs and remote transcoders.
Learn to use the OMC-R GUI to manage the processing of network element events/alarms and to instigate
suitable remedial actions.
Learn to use the OMC-R GUI to monitor the network data and generate reports.
Learn to use OMC-R to change the states of devices in the network
Learn to use Remote Login feature to interrogate the status and configuration of Network elements.
Use the OMC-R to perform Fault Management /Load Management tasks and troubleshoot the network.

320

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

GSM-NET02 : OMC-R Advanced Network Operations

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

5 days

Yes

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular
2 GSM-BSS11 : BSS Operational Theory
3 GSM-NET01 : OMC-R Network Operations
4 GSM-SYS02 : Introduction to BSS Database

Audience
OMC-R Operators, System Engineers, Optimizers and
Network Administrators.

Features
An instructor-led practical course designed to train
Network Operators in system configuration techniques
from the OMC-R.

Course Content
The course is designed to enable personnel to understand the theory associated with communications links,
Packet Switches, Multiplexers and Routers used in a network. It explains the fundamentals of the Navigation Tree,
Audits and how to add BSCs, Network Elements, Sites, Commslinks, Cells (Ordinary, Proxy & Neighbour) DRIs
and RTFs. The basics of cmutil and reassigning of devices is also covered along with the methods used to daisy
chain sites.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Appreciate the complexities of the OMC Navigation tree and use it to its full potential to make most network
configuration changes.
Appreciate the operation of X.25 links, Packet Switches, Multiplexers and Routers.
Appreciate the basics of the cmutil feature and use it to perform designated tasks.
Carry out assigned tasks without supervision such as site audits, adding NEs to the MIB, configuring
CommsLinks on the map, populating the MIB with all the NE database objects.
Carry out the basic programming of the Motorola 6560MP Router.
Add new BTS sites in to the BSS using the OMC GUI and add/reassign devices to the network.

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

321

GSM-NET03 : Network Performance

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

3 days

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular
2 GSM-BSS11 : BSS Operational Theory
3 GSM-SYS02 : Introduction to BSS Database

Audience
System Engineers, BSS Optimization Engineers,
Network Planners and Administrators or any GSM
engineer related to Network Performance.

Features
An instructor-led course providing students with a
detailed description of BSS statistics.

Course Content
This course describes BSS statistics used in Motorola BSS systems. Included are, statistical data types, all
individual statistics.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Identify the signaling links within the BSS Sub-system infrastructure.
Describe the variants of HDLC which are used in GSM.
Describe how each of the Statistical Data Types collect and report data.
Describe the five key statistics groups.
Explain the meaning of each statistic pegged in the BSS.

322

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

GSM-NET05 : Network Health Analyst

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

3 days

Yes

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular
2 GSM-BSS11 : BSS Operational Theory
3 GSM-NET01 : OMC-R Network Operations
4 GSM-SYS02 : Introduction to BSS Database
5 GSM-NET02 : OMC-R Advanced Network Operations

Audience
OMC-R Network Operators, Administrators and
System Engineers.

Features
An instructor-led practical course designed to train
personnel in the operation of NHA.

Course Content
The course explains the theory behind NHA and covers in detail the operation of all the NHA modules. It also
explains the setting up of the NHA and its usage in relation to the OMC-R during the practical sessions.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
State the role of the Network Health Analyst (NHA) in relation to the OMC-R and describe the NHA hardware
and software.
State the different detection mechanisms used by the NHA and identify the detection process for specific NHA
problems.
Learn how to apply Permissions and Security settings, use the Cell grouping scripts and Create & modify cell
groups.
Learn how to view INSM reports, statistics history for a cell and Blacklist a device on the network display.
Explain the NHA directory structures and how to perform NHA performance checks.
Use the practical knowledge gained to perform NHA functions in relation to a GSM network.

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

323

GSM-NET06 : Datagen Operations

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

3 days

Yes

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular
2 GSM-BSS11 : BSS Operational Theory
3 GSM-NET01 : OMC-R Network Operations
4 GSM-SYS02 : Introduction to BSS Database
5 GSM-NET02 : OMC-R Advanced Network Operations

Audience
Network Operators, Administrators, System Engineers
and Network Planners.

Features
An instructor-led practical course designed to train
personnel in the operation of Datagen and OLM.

Course Content
The course explains the theory behind DataGen and the Off Line MIB (OLM) and covers in detail the operation of
all the DataGen and OLM modules. The students are able to gain experience in the importing of GSM databases
to the DataGen platform the upgrading, modifying and exporting of the resultant Databases back to the GSM
network.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
State the role of DataGen and the OLM in relation to OMC-R in controlling a network.
State the different modules contained in the DataGen platform and use them to manipulate GSM Databases.
Learn how to use DataGen to produce Database script files from the compiled Database objects imported from
the GSM Network.
Demonstrate how DataGen can support every customer for 'n-2' software loads.
Explain the DataGen and OLM directory structures and how DataGen interfaces to the OMC-R platform.
Use the practical knowledge gained to perform Database import, upgrade, modification, and export back to the
GSM OMC-R platform.

324

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

GSM-OMC01 : OMC-R Overview

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

1 day

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular
2 GSM-BSS14 : BSS Technical Overview

Audience
The course is designed for management and technical
supervisors who require a technical appreciation of the
purpose and functionality of the OMC-R. It may also
serve as a useful insight for any engineer who needs a
basic introduction to the OMC-R. Note that the OMC01
course is not a prerequisite for the NET01, indeed they
are mutually exclusive.

Features
An overview course that provides an introduction to
the basic concepts of the OMC-R.

Course Content
The course is designed to introduce personnel to the basic concepts of the OMC-R, as used in a GSM Network. It
covers the basic configuration of an OMC-R, the communication links between the OMC-R and other network
elements, the information flow within the network and the software used in the network and at the OMC-R. It also
deals with the functions performed using the OMC-R Graphical User Interface (GUI) such as configuration
management, event management, performance management, load management, fault management, device state
management and administration.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Describe the concepts and philosophy of the Operations and Maintenance Centre Radio (OMC-R).
Describe the management functions of the OMC-R and network management model.
Describe the OMC-R hardware and software architectures including interfaces.
State the terminology and the use of the OMC-R window environment.
State the concepts of software load management.

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

325

GSM-OMC01A : OMC-R Overview (Non-Technical)

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

1 day

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


None

Audience
This course is intended for non-technical staff requiring
an appreciation of the components and functionality of
the OMC-R.

Features
An instructor-led course providing non-technical
overview information of the Operations and
Maintenance Centre for GSM.

Course Content
This course covers the principles of the OMC-R and describes the features and network components of the OMCR.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Name the main hardware components of an OMC-R and describe their functionality.
Name the major software functions of an OMC-R and describe their functionality.
Explain how the OMC-R is connected to a GSM network.
Explain the advantages of using an OMC-R.

326

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

GSM-OMC03 : OMC-R System Administration (E3x00


Platform)
Duration

Practical/Lab Content

5 days

Yes

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
1 GEN-CP04 : UNIX for OMC Users
and/or its equivalent SUN Microsystems system
administration for Solaris users course.

Audience
OMC-R System Administrators, Advanced OMC-R
operators, Network Administrators who use OMC-R
extensively. All other engineers with good UNIX
knowledge.

Features
An instructor-led course designed to train personnel in
the system administration of the OMC-R platform.

Course Content
The course includes all tasks and procedures needed to keep the OMC-R running at peak performance. Also
included are setting up accounts, networking, peripheral management, file system backups and troubleshooting.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Describe and identify the OMC-R hardware, software and relevant documentation.
Perform backups of file systems and relational databases.
Describe different types of restore procedures.
Identify and implement OMC-R system troubleshooting procedures.
Maintain the OMC-R file systems and Relational Database Management Systems.
Identify the operational states of the OMC-R.
Manage the OMC-R X.25 link connectivity.

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

327

GSM-SYS01 : GSM Interfaces and Protocols

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

5 days

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular
2 GSM-BSS11 : BSS Operational Theory

Audience
Engineers requiring greater appreciation of interface
structures and formats. Engineers carrying out protocol
analysis.

Features
An instructor-led course providing detailed information/
written exercises associated with the BSS Terrestrial/
Air Interfaces.

Course Content
This course describes the interfaces used in GSM. The course covers an in-depth look at the air interface and its
structure including LAPDm. The Abis and A interfaces are covered along with LAPD and SS7 protocols. The
student will find this course useful for field protocol analysis as the student will see how messages are created at
bit level. By the end of the course the student will be able to navigate the ETSI layer 1, 2 and 3 specifications.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
State the format of the different burst types and logical channel frame structures on the air interface.
State the format and structure of the Layer 1 connectivity of the Abis, A and OMC-R interfaces.
State the format and structure of Layer 2 and 3 for the air, Abis and A interfaces.
Explain the difference between the Motorola Abis and GSM defined Abis.
State the operation of the GSM protocol stack
Identify ITU-TS Signalling System No. 7, MTP, SCCP, BSSAP.

328

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

GSM-SYS02 : Introduction to BSS Database

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

5 days

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular
2 GSM-BSS11 : BSS Operational Theory

Audience
System Engineers, BSS Maintenance, Optimization,
Database Engineers, Network Planners. Network
Operator and Administrator Engineers.

Features
An instructor-led course introducing the commands of
the BSS database using theory and written exercises.

Course Content
This course describes the elements and construction of the BSS database. Included are parameters required to
configure and add a cell to a Motorola Base site, device and function equipage. students will conduct theoretical
exercises to build an elementary BSS database.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Explain the Air interface including BCCH/CCCH/DCCH
Populate the database fields to create and configure a cell
State the operation of the commands and parameters for Power Control
State the operation of the commands and parameters for basic handovers
State the operation of cell re-selection and associated parameters for C1 and C2 criteria
State the device and function interdependency and equipage within the database structure.

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

329

GSM-SYS03 : Advanced BSS Database

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

5 days

Yes

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular
2 GSM-BSS11 : BSS Operational Theory
3 GSM-SYS02 : Introduction to BSS Database
Students should review the SYS02 course manual
prior to attending this course.

Audience
BSS Optimization, Database and System Engineers.
Network Operator and Administrator Engineers.

Features
An instructor-led course familiarizing students in
practical database building.

Course Content
This course includes theoretical and practical script building for RXCDR, BSC, BTS, PATH and frequency hopping.
Detailed description of Handover and Power Control algorithms are also included.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
State and effectively utilize parameters used within the RXCDR, BSC, BTS, PATH and frequency hopping
database scripts.
Build a RXCDR, BSC, BTS, PATH and frequency hopping database script.
Describe the Power Control, Power Budget and Handover assessment procedures.
Describe criteria 1 & 2 and the use of Quality Flags.
State the operation of the parameters associated with Dynamic TCH Allocation.

330

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

GSM-SYS04 : Introduction to BSS Planning and


Dimensioning
Duration

Practical/Lab Content

5 days

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular
2 GSM-BSS11 : BSS Operational Theory

Audience
System Engineers, BSS Maintenance, Optimization,
Database Engineers, Network Planners.

Features
An instructor-led course providing detailed information
and written exercises associated with cell and
equipment planning calculations.

Course Content
This course describes all aspects dealing with BSS subsystem planning. Material includes propagation prediction,
interference sources, equalization and air interface planning. Calculating hardware requirements for all BSS
elements is also included in this course.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Identify the main effects of propagation and interference on GSM frequencies.
Carry out power budget calculations to balance a cellular system.
Describe viable frequency re-use schemes and the impact of Microcellular equipment.
Explain network topology, RXCDR/BSC hardware and CCCH/TCH requirements for a given GSM network.
State the rules for BSS dimensioning.
Carry out the calculations required for BSS dimensioning

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

331

GSM-SYS12 : Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayered Systems


Duration

Practical/Lab Content

5 days

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular
2 GSM-BSS11 : BSS Operational Theory
3 GSM-SYS02 : Introduction to BSS Database
4 GSM-SYS03 : Advanced BSS Database

Audience
BSS Database, Optimization and Systems Engineers.

Features
An instructor-led course providing detailed information
on Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multi-layered
Systems.

Course Content
This module is designed to provide detailed information on the techniques currently available for increasing the
capacity of a network including microcellular and multi-layer methods.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
An overview of all the capacity enhancing and microcellular features available
Describe frequency hopping benefits and principles including the strategies to implement both baseband and
synthesizer frequency hopping
Explain the deployment of microcells including implementation of an in-building solution
Describe the planning required to implement a microcellular/in-building solution including frequency planning,
link budgets and hardware currently available
Explain the microcellular database with the aid of worked exercises. This section includes the seven power
budget algorithms and adaptive handovers
Explain the other capacity enhancing database parameters including congestion relief, concentric cells,
multiband, single BCCH for dual band cells, co-incident multiband and extended range cells.

332

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

GPRS Courses
GPRS Technology courses equip the student with the knowledge required to commission, maintain, monitor and
optimize GPRS networks. It is imperative that course descriptions are read to confirm suitability for each student
and to ensure that all prerequisite training is completed.

GPRS-BSS101 : PCU Operational Theory.......................................................................................................... 334


GPRS-CP07 : Introduction to GPRS.................................................................................................................... 335
GPRS-CP07A : GPRS Overview (Non -Technical) ............................................................................................. 336
GPRS-GPRS100NE : GPRS eLearning Workshop ............................................................................................. 337
GPRS-GSN101 : GPRS CommHub .................................................................................................................... 338
GPRS-GSN102 : GSN Complex Installation........................................................................................................ 339
GPRS-GSN103 : Gateway GPRS Support Node ................................................................................................ 340
GPRS-GSN104 : Sun Enterprise Cluster............................................................................................................. 341
GPRS-GSN105 : ISS Applications....................................................................................................................... 342
GPRS-NET101 : OMC-G Network Operations .................................................................................................... 343
GPRS-NET103 : BSS (GPRS) Network Performance......................................................................................... 344
GPRS-NET106 : IP Security................................................................................................................................ 345
GPRS-OMC-G105 : OMC-G System Administration ........................................................................................... 346
GPRS-SYS101 : GPRS Interfaces and Protocols ............................................................................................... 347
GPRS-SYS102 : BSS (GPRS) Database ............................................................................................................ 348
GPRS-SYS104 : BSS (GPRS) Planning.............................................................................................................. 349
GPRS-SYS115 : GSN Planning........................................................................................................................... 350
GPRS-SYS116 : SF Database ............................................................................................................................ 351
GPRS-TEL1213 : GPRS Fundamentals.............................................................................................................. 352
GPRS-TEL1214 : GPRS Engineering.................................................................................................................. 353

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

333

GPRS-BSS101 : PCU Operational Theory

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

2 days

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular
2 GSM-BSS11 : BSS Operational Theory
3 GPRS-CP07 : Introduction to GPRS

Audience
BSS (GPRS) Installation, Commissioning and
Maintenance Engineers. Any GPRS engineer
interested to know the PCU functionality.

Features
An instructor-led course describing the installation and
operation of the Packet Control Unit.

Course Content
A technical introduction indicating where the PCU and SGSN fit into the Motorola GPRS solution. This course
describes the Peripheral Component Connect (PCI) bus principles and operation leading into the operation and
functionality of the Compact PCI (CPCI) chassis in the Motorola GPRS solution. This course also covers the
operation and functionality of the digital cards found in the CPCI chassis, including installation, maintenance and
description of the PCU. The operation and function of the digital cards found in the PCU Chassis and description
of the software processes of the PCU are also explained on this course.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
State the function of the PCU within GPRS.
Describe the operation of the CPCI chassis.
State the function of each digital module within the PCU.
State the functionality of software processes in a PCU.

334

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

GPRS-CP07 : Introduction to GPRS

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

2 days

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular
2 GEN-CP05 : LAN/WAN Principles
3 GEN-CP08 : Frame Relay
4 GEN-CP09 : TCP/IP.

Audience
All Engineers engaged in GPRS.

Features
An instructor-led course designed to enable students
to understand the key concepts, techniques and
protocols that make up the General Packet Radio
Service.

Course Content
The course provides a detailed technical introduction to the General Packet Radio Service (GPRS). The course
describes how GPRS fits into GSM and the advantages of GPRS future enhancements such as EDGE and how
GPRS is a bearer service for WAP. The GPRS network architecture, terrestrial interfaces and air interface are
explained in detail within the course.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
State the operation of GPRS in relation to a GSM network
State the advantages of GPRS and why increased data rates are required
State the GPRS network architecture, services and quality of service
State the operation of GPRS terrestrial and air interfaces including signalling channels
State GPRS internetworking.

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

335

GPRS-CP07A : GPRS Overview (Non -Technical)

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

1 day

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 GSM-CP02A : GSM Cellular Overview (Non-Technical)

Audience
The course is intended for non-technical staff requiring
an appreciation of GPRS.

Features
An instructor-led course providing non-technical
overview information on GPRS.

Course Content
This course covers the principles of a GPRS network and describes the features and network components of a
GPRS network. A short review of GSM is included but GSM-CP02A : GSM Cellular Overview (Non-Technical) should be
taken as a pre-requisite to GSM-CP07A. A general description of the GPRS air interface is included.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
State the difference between GSM data calls and GPRS data calls
Identify the elements that create a GPRS network.
State the purpose of the GPRS network elements
State the basic function of the GPRS air interface

336

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

GPRS-GPRS100NE : GPRS eLearning Workshop

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

Self-paced, approximately 4 hours

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

Log onto to Motorolas Lifecycle Services On-Line


(https://services.motorola.com), and click on the Technical
Training Direct link.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


None

Audience
Operators who will be responsible for the operation of
a GPRS network.

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
This module is designed to provide a detailed technical introduction to the General Packet Radio Service (GPRS).

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Describe the GPRS network
Define the network sub-system (NSS) and base station sub-system (BSS) of the GPRS network core
Define the functionality and protocols in a GPRS system
In this course you will learn to:
Define the network sub-system (NSS) and base station sub-system (BSS) of the GPRS network core of the
GPRS system
Define the functionality and protocols in GPRS
Review GPRS terrestrial and air interfaces including signaling channels
Identify components of the GSM CommHub
Describe what is needed for the configuration of the VLAN
Describe the function of the GGSN
Describe the function of the ISS
Describe the function of the SGSN
Explain the function of the PCU/BSS

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

337

GPRS-GSN101 : GPRS CommHub

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

5 days

Yes

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular
2 GPRS-CP07 : Introduction to GPRS

Audience
All GPRS GSN engineers.

Features
A course that introduces the student to the Cisco IOS
and installation, configuration and maintenance of
Cisco switches and routers.

Course Content
This course introduces Cisco Networks, switching concepts, and virtual LANs. Additionally, interconnection,
addressing, and configuration of Cisco routers are also taught.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Configure Cisco routers for operation in multiprotocol internetworks.
Describe the architecture and functions of the major components of the Catalyst 5000 series switches.
Use the command-line interface to configure the Catalyst 5000 series switches and their switching modules
and perform basic troubleshooting.

338

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

GPRS-GSN102 : GSN Complex Installation

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

4 days

Yes

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular
2 GPRS-CP07 : Introduction to GPRS
3 GPRS-GSN101 : GPRS CommHub

Audience
GPRS Installation Commissioning and Maintenance
Engineers. GSN Network Operators. GSN Network
Administrators. GSN Network Planners and GSN
Optimization Engineers

Features
This course provides an overview of the GSN complex
hardware and software functional areas. The course is
primarily aimed at the installation and commissioning
procedures together with the operation of the SGSN.

Course Content
This course provides an overview of the GSN Complex, showing where the PCU and SGSN fit into the Motorola
GPRS solution. This course also explains:
PCI bus principles and the operation of PCI leading into the operation and function of CPCI chassis in the
Motorola GPRS solution.
The operation and function of the digital cards found in the CPCI chassis installation, maintenance and
description of the GSN complex.
The operation and function of the digital cards found in the SGSN chassis.
Description of the Software functional areas of the GSN.
A description of the GSN complex in Motorola GPRS, including hardware used in the GSN complex and a
description of digital cards unique in the SGSN.
PCI bus principles and operation within the CPCI chassis.
The course includes an installation of a GSN Complex. The installation aims to bring the equipment up to an
operational state whereby the OMC-G operator could then carry out configuration of the Complex components.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
State the function of the GSN within the GPRS system.
Describe the operation of the CPCI chassis.
Be able to install and commission an SGSN.
Carry out SGSN maintenance.

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

339

GPRS-GSN103 : Gateway GPRS Support Node

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

3 days

Yes

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular
2 GPRS-CP07 : Introduction to GPRS
3 GPRS-GSN101 : GPRS CommHub

Audience
Optimization engineers, System Engineers, Network
Administrators and Network Planners, GPRS
Optimization Engineers, GPRS System Engineers,
GPRS Network Administrators, and GPRS Network
Planners.

Features
An instructor-led course providing a GPRS engineer
with the knowledge to be able to configure and
maintain the GGSN.

Course Content
This course describes the installation, maintenance and troubleshooting of Cisco 7200 Series Routers. The course
includes using Cisco operating system messages and commands. How the LAN and WAN interface processors
function including connection to an Internet Service Provider (ISP) will also be described.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Install, maintain and troubleshoot Cisco GGSN routers.
Describe the GGSN in relation to the GPRS network.
Explain Access Point Names to configure access to networks.

340

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

GPRS-GSN104 : Sun Enterprise Cluster

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

7 days

Yes

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 Sun Solaris System Administration parts 1 and 2.
These courses are available from Sun Educational
Services, or alternatively may be booked through
Motorola Training as a buyout option.
2 GPRS-GSN101 : GPRS CommHub

Audience
This training is aimed at UNIX system administrators
who will be responsible for maintaining the Integrated
Support Server.

Features
A training course providing the in-depth knowledge
allowing students to administer the Sun Enterprise
Cluster. students will gain the understanding of the
hardware and software that comprise the Sun Cluster,
the use of Sun Cluster administration tools, commands
and disk space management.

Course Content
The course includes Sun Enterprise Cluster hardware and software installation, configuration and operation.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Install the hardware and software for the Sun Enterprise Cluster platform.
Interpret the Cluster status
Configure the Terminal Concentrator
Explain the disk management technique used by Solstice Disksuite
Describe the Cluster databases and their operation
Configure Logical Hosts
Explain the need for Public Network Management
List the events that can trigger a cluster reconfiguration

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

341

GPRS-GSN105 : ISS Applications

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

2 days

Yes

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular
2 GPRS-CP07 : Introduction to GPRS
3 GPRS-GSN101 : GPRS CommHub
4 Sun Solaris System Administration parts 1 and 2.
These courses are available from Sun Educational
Services, or alternatively may be booked through
Motorola Training as a buyout option.
5 GPRS-GSN104 : Sun Enterprise Cluster

Audience
This training is aimed at GPRS Engineers responsible
for maintaining the ISS and Charging Feature.

Features
An instructor lead course enabling Sun Enterprise
Cluster trained engineers to administer the GPRS
applications that comprise the Integrated Support
Server (ISS)

Course Content
At the end of the course the student will be able to correctly configure and administer the GPRS applications
resident on the Sun Enterprise Cluster platform with an emphasis on billing theory and practice.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Describe specific ISS software, including the function of each process, how to stop and start the processes and
explain the role of the charging feature.
Describe the content of all directories used in the ISS application and how they are physically stored on the
ISS.
Operate the Cluster including practical exercises utilizing Motorola and Sun Cluster commands to control and
configure ISS and Billing features.
Describe how billing may be carried out by GPRS operators
Describe the operation and configuration of Cisco Network Registrar for DNS.
Describe troubleshooting the Charging Feature.

342

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

GPRS-NET101 : OMC-G Network Operations

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

3 days

Yes

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular
2 GPRS-CP07 : Introduction to GPRS
3 GPRS-GSN101 : GPRS CommHub
4 GPRS-GSN102 : GSN Complex Installation
5 GPRS-GSN103 : Gateway GPRS Support Node

Audience
The course is intended for GSN Network Operators
and GSN Network Administrators.

Features
An instructor-led practical course designed to train
personnel in the daily tasks of network operation.
students will learn to use the OMC-G to carry out tasks
such as alarm, configuration, load, and performance
management.

Course Content
This course introduces GPRS engineers to the Motorola OMC-G as a tool for maintaining network Quality of
Service, covering all the functional areas of the OMC-G including Fault Management, Configuration Management,
Load Management and Performance Management.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Describe the principal hardware, software and protocols used in the OMC-G.
Explain Fault Management techniques, alarm handling and tools available.
View and change GSN parameters, including the use of parameter propagation, and creation of Network
Elements.
Perform software and database updates using the OMC-G.
Generate on-line statistics via the OMC-G and examine background statistics using Business Objects.
Use the Gb Link Tool to generate updated SGSN configuration files.

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

343

GPRS-NET103 : BSS (GPRS) Network Performance

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

1 day

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular
2 GPRS-CP07 : Introduction to GPRS
3 GSM-BSS11 : BSS Operational Theory
4 GPRS-BSS101 : PCU Operational Theory
5 GSM-NET01 : OMC-R Network Operations
6 GSM-SYS02 : Introduction to BSS Database
7 GPRS-SYS102 : BSS (GPRS) Database
8 GSM-NET03 : Network Performance

Audience
Optimization engineers, System Engineers, Network
Administrators and Network Planners.

Features
An instructor-led course designed to enable the
student to understand the origin of statistics generated
by the Motorola BSS for GPRS.

Course Content
Equipment overview, including function, hardware and links between network elements. Description of the
software entities and their interaction with the other BSS software entities. Description of the interaction of the
PCU statistic collection process with the BSC for statistic reporting detailing: PSSP, CSP, Local DPROC statistics
collection, GGL, accessibility, and throughput statistics.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Describe the interaction of the PCU in relation to the BSC for statistics.
Revise the six statistical data types how each type collects and reports data.
Describe the GBL statistics how the statistics measure data throughput.
State the Accessibility Statistics and where they are incremented given related ladder diagrams.
Set bin ranges for distribution statistics.

344

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

GPRS-NET106 : IP Security

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

5 days

Yes

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular
2 GPRS-CP07 : Introduction to GPRS
3 GPRS-GSN101 : GPRS CommHub
4 GPRS-GSN103 : Gateway GPRS Support Node

Audience
This training is aimed at GPRS Network engineers
involved with the CommHub and GGSN and may be
involved with Inter-PLMN roaming.

Features
An in-depth practical course on the implementation of
IP security within a network. students will learn how to
identify the security threats and how to implement
security within their networks.

Course Content
The course will identify the interfaces of a GPRS system and outline the potential security threats from each and
explain what procedures can be carried out to minimize these threats.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Identify the vulnerable interfaces and understand the reasoning behind potential intruders in a GPRS network.
Describe network access port types and access control methods.
Configure a network access server to enable AAA processes. Explanations of applicable debugging and
testing commands.
Describe procedures required to implement PIX Firewall security features and operations including
configuration of inbound and outbound access control using network address translation and port address
translation.
Define Internet access security risks and the features of Cisco IOS which may be enabled to reduce these
risks.
Create crypto access lists for IPSec and crypto maps. Applying, testing and verifying these to interfaces.

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

345

GPRS-OMC-G105 : OMC-G System Administration

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

3 days

Yes

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 GEN-CP04 : UNIX for OMC Users
2 GSM-OMC03 : OMC-R System Administration (E3x00
Platform)
3 Windows NT core technologies

Audience
This training is aimed at OMC-R system
administrators so that they may gain the additional
skills and competence to maintain the OMC-G
platform for both Windows NT and Unix.

Features
An instructor-led course with practical exercises
designed to train staff in the system administration of
the OMC-G.

Course Content
This course addresses the maintenance procedures for the OMC-G. Also included are descriptions of hardware
and software components including the integration of UNIX and Windows NT.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Explain the function of each OMC-G software process.
Describe how UNIX and Windows NT are integrated within the OMC-G.
Describe the functions and states of the Bull Openmaster product.
Add and modify OMC users.
Locate log files to troubleshoot the system.

346

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

GPRS-SYS101 : GPRS Interfaces and Protocols

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

5 days

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 GPRS-CP07 : Introduction to GPRS
2 GSM-SYS01 : GSM Interfaces and Protocols

Audience
The course is intended for technical staff requiring a
detailed appreciation of the GPRS interfaces and
protocols.

Features
An instructor-led course providing a detailed
introduction to GPRS interfaces and protocols.

Course Content
This course covers the protocols, interaction between applications and the different layers of GPRS in particular
GPRS mobility management, air interface, Gb Interface and RLC/MAC.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Describe the GPRS interfaces and protocols.
Illustrate the major functionality of the GPRS Protocols.
Describe the interactions between the RLC/MAC and LLC Protocols.
Describe the SNDCP inter-working with the LLC
Describe GTP and GTP and the operation between GSNs.

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

347

GPRS-SYS102 : BSS (GPRS) Database

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

3 days

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular
2 GPRS-CP07 : Introduction to GPRS
3 GSM-BSS11 : BSS Operational Theory
4 GPRS-BSS101 : PCU Operational Theory
5 GSM-NET01 : OMC-R Network Operations
6 GSM-SYS02 : Introduction to BSS Database

Audience
BSS Maintenance, Optimization and Database
Engineers. Network Planners.

Features
The course will identify and describe the commands
and parameters for configuration of GPRS in the BSS
system. Detailed within the course will be equipage of
the PCU and the commands and parameters
necessary to configure the GPRS air interface.

Course Content
BSS (GPRS) network overview. Review of GPRS packet data transfer, protocols and air interface. Review of PCU
hardware/software. Equipping and explaining database commands associated with the PCU, to enable GPRS in a
BSS, including power control.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Explain the air interface structure and the protocol layers for GPRS.
Describe the hardware, software, and communication protocols used in the BSS (GPRS) network and the
device and function interdependency for GPRS in the BSS.
Describe typical BSS (GPRS) configuration, terrestrial traffic and signaling links.
Equip and explain the database fields associated with PCU site configuration.
Equip and describe the parameters associated with equipping GPRS in a BSS.
Equip and explain the parameters associated with GPRS power control

348

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

GPRS-SYS104 : BSS (GPRS) Planning

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

3 days

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular
2 GPRS-CP07 : Introduction to GPRS
3 GSM-BSS11 : BSS Operational Theory
4 GPRS-BSS101 : PCU Operational Theory
5 GSM-SYS04 : Introduction to BSS Planning and Dimensioning

Audience
BSS (GPRS) Network Planning Engineers.

Features
An instructor-led course providing a description of the
Motorola recommended planning guidelines for the
BSS elements of a GPRS network.

Course Content
This module is designed to provide an overview of the BSS planning parameters, including traffic model and
capacity calculations, category of service and site planning. Description of the BSS features that Support GPRS.
A description of all the steps required for a GPRS network plan. Explanation of cell plans versus mean BLER and
percentage of time that CS1 and CS2 are utilized. Explanation of the calculations to determine the number of
PDTCHs and the file transfer size between mobile and SGSN.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
State the parameters required for BSS planning.
Describe the GPRS Features and planning processes supported by a Motorola BSS and GSN complex.
Describe the Motorola products and interfaces supported by the GPRS BSS.
State the recommended steps used to plan a GPRS network, estimate network traffic and choose a cell plan to
determine the expected BLock Error Rate (BLER).
Determine how long it takes to transfer a file of an arbitrary size over the Um to Gi interface.
State the PCU provisioning rules used to determine the type and number of DPROC boards to populate the
PCU
State the rules and calculate the signaling link requirements for the BSC and PCU in support of GPRS.

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

349

GPRS-SYS115 : GSN Planning

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

2 days

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular
2 GPRS-CP07 : Introduction to GPRS
3 GPRS-GSN101 : GPRS CommHub
4 GPRS-GSN102 : GSN Complex Installation
5 GPRS-GSN103 : Gateway GPRS Support Node

Audience
This training is aimed at GSN Complex planning
engineers and is designed to address the tasks of
correctly dimensioning the GSN complex, and
calculating equipment requirements for a predicted
traffic load using Motorola recommended planning
guidelines.

Features
An instructor-led course providing a description of the
Motorola recommended planning guidelines for
planning the GSN complex elements of a GPRS
network.

Course Content
This module is designed to provide an overview of GSN complex features, architecture, interfaces and products
supported by Motorola. Also described in the course are the parameters and rules required to correctly dimension
a GSN complex.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Describe all the input parameters required to plan a GSN complex.
State the maximum and minimum values of input parameters required to dimension a GSN complex.
Describe the calculations used to determine the number of SGSN chassis required.
Determine interface connectivity.
State the recommended planning guidelines used to provision a GSN Complex.

350

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

GPRS-SYS116 : SF Database

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

3 days

Yes

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 GSM-CP02 : Introduction to GSM Cellular
2 GPRS-CP07 : Introduction to GPRS
3 GPRS-GSN102 : GSN Complex Installation
4 GPRS-NET101 : OMC-G Network Operations
5 GEN-CP03 : Introduction to SS7 Signaling

Audience
The course is intended for technical staff requiring an
in-depth understanding of the GPRS SF database
configuration.

Features
An instructor-led course providing a detailed
description of the signaling function database for
GPRS.

Course Content
This course is designed to provide a detailed description of the individual functions and protocol layers in the
signaling function database of the GPRS network. It includes the parameters associated with signaling links.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Explain the function of SS7 in the GPRS network
Understand the use of the OMC-G for configuration
Explain the function and role of the MIB and SNMP and the use of OIDs within the database to provide a
structured database
Understand the role and functionality of the SS7 protocol layers to transport information around the network.

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

351

GPRS-TEL1213 : GPRS Fundamentals

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

Self-paced, approximately 3 hours

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

Log onto to Motorolas Lifecycle Services On-Line


(https://services.motorola.com), and click on the Technical
Training Direct link.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


None

Audience
This course is intended for Engineers working on
GPRS networks, Radio planners, Network planners,
Telcos offering value-added services, and Sales/
marketing staff with expertise in the mobile market.

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
This module is designed to provide a comprehensive overview of GPRS, and to consider the motivation behind
GPRS, the modifications of standard GSM systems required by GPRS, and the future implications of GPRS.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
list the processes used for circuit-switched data within GSM
list the advantages of moving to a packet-switched standard
identify the key components of a GPRS network
explain the process of attaching a user to a GPRS network
explain the process of sending a data packet across the GPRS network

352

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

GPRS-TEL1214 : GPRS Engineering

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

Self-paced, approximately 3 hours

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

Log onto to Motorolas Lifecycle Services On-Line


(https://services.motorola.com), and click on the Technical
Training Direct link.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 GPRS-TEL1213 : GPRS Fundamentals

Audience
This course is intended for Engineers working in
GPRS system design, system test and system
engineering; Engineers working in GPRS voice
networks; Radio planners; and Network planners.

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
This module is designed to provide a comprehensive overview of both call handling and the use of the air
interface by a GPRS network. Both GPRS architecture and GPRS interfaces are considered. In addition, GPRS
channel types (including their mapping onto GSM channels), the multi-frame structure, and the channel coding
process are dealt with. The steps involved in sending data from a mobile station (MS) to a GPRS server are also
described.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
identify the advantages GPRS has over existing cellular networks
identify the key elements of the GPRS network
map the GPRS network onto the GSM network
distinguish between the various GPRS channel types
map GPRS channels onto GSM channels
define the GPRS multiframe structure
identify the process of sending data from a mobile client to a GPRS server

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

353

354

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

UMTS Courses
The UMTS Technology courses are currently under development, fundamental courses are available now as
advertised on the following pages, with all product specific courses being advertised when available.

UMTS-CP13 : Introduction to UMTS.................................................................................................................... 356


UMTS-CP13A : UMTS Overview (Non-Technical) .............................................................................................. 357
UMTS-TEL1215 : UMTS Air Interface ................................................................................................................. 358
UMTS-TEL1216 : UMTS Fundamentals.............................................................................................................. 359
UMTS-TEL1226 : Understanding UMTS ............................................................................................................. 360
UMTS-SYS204 : UMTS Radio Planning.............................................................................................................. 361

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

355

UMTS-CP13 : Introduction to UMTS

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

3 days

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


None, although a basic knowledge of mobile telecoms
is essential.

Audience
This course is intended for technical staff requiring a
detailed appreciation of UMTS technology and its
applications

Features
An instructor-led course providing an introduction to
UMTS technology including network architecture,
UMTS protocols, the principles of W-CDMA, the
UMTS air interface and Radio Management functions

Course Content
This course gives a generic overview of UMTS principles. It gives an outline of the evolution paths from GSM to
3G, describes the basic UMTS network architecture and services and gives descriptions of the functions of the
Network Elements. Details of the protocol structures, terrestrial interfaces, radio physical layer and radio
management functions are also covered.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Describe the evolution of UMTS from GSM systems and the services it plans to deliver
Describe the architecture of a UMTS network and state the purpose of the major network components
Describe the general protocol model for UMTS and state the interface specific protocol structures
Describe the transport mechanisms to be used for the UMTS Transport Network
Describe the W-CDMA Spreading and Scrambling Procedures
Describe the procedures performed by the air interface physical layer and state the UMTS channel structure
Describe the Radio Resource and Mobility Management functions

356

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

UMTS-CP13A : UMTS Overview (Non-Technical)

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

1 day

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


None, although a basic knowledge of mobile telecoms
is essential.

Audience
This course is intended for management, sales and
marketing staff requiring a basic appreciation of UMTS
principles.

Features
An instructor-led course providing a non-technical
basic introduction to UMTS technology including
Network Architecture.

Course Content
This course gives an overview of basic UMTS principles, including an overview of the UMTS network architecture
and the services/applications it hopes to deliver.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Describe the evolution of UMTS from GSM systems
Describe the services UMTS plans to deliver
Describe the architecture of a UMTS network
State the purpose of the major network components

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

357

UMTS-TEL1215 : UMTS Air Interface

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

Self-paced, approximately 3 hours

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

Log onto to Motorolas Lifecycle Services On-Line


(https://services.motorola.com), and click on the Technical
Training Direct link.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 UMTS-TEL1216 : UMTS Fundamentals

Audience
This course is intended for Engineers working in UMTS
system design, system test and system engineering;
UMTS network engineers; Radio planners; and
Network planners

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
This module is designed to provide comprehensive technical detail of the air interface used in UMTS, known as
WCDMA. In fulfilling this goal, a detailed overview of the physical and transport channels available on the WCDMA
air interface is given.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
describe WCDMA frequency allocation
identify the protocol layers of the radio interface
identify the different transport channels used in WCDMA
list WCDMAs uplink and downlink physical channels
outline the modulation and spreading used in WCDMA
identify WCDMAs transport channel coding and multiplexing schemes
describe how handover is performed in WCDMA
identify the performance enhancement features used for the WCDMA

358

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

UMTS-TEL1216 : UMTS Fundamentals

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

Self-paced, approximately 3 hours

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

Log onto to Motorolas Lifecycle Services On-Line


(https://services.motorola.com), and click on the Technical
Training Direct link.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 A technical or telecommunications background.

Audience
This course is intended for engineers working on
UMTS networks, radio planners, network planners,
telcos offering value-added services, and sales and
Marketing staff with expertise in the mobile market.

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
This module is designed to provide a comprehensive introduction to the next generation of mobile
communications systems, known as Third Generation (3G). This course aims to give an understanding of the
international development and standardization activities currently attempting to produce a worldwide consensus
on a global 3G standard.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
identify services and applications offered by 3G UMTS systems
outline the standardization process for 3G UMTS
list the 3G UMTS frequency spectrum allocation
describe the key features of the air interface relevant to UMTS
outline the system architecture for 3G UMTS networks
describe the evolutionary scenarios for deploying 3G UMTS systems

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

359

UMTS-TEL1226 : Understanding UMTS

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

Self-paced, approximately 12 hours

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

Log onto to Motorolas Lifecycle Services On-Line


(https://services.motorola.com), and click on the Technical
Training Direct link.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 A basic understanding of Second Generation digital
wireless technologies and systems, including
CDMA and GSM, as well as a basic understanding
of fundamental Internet technologies, including
TCP/IP, is recommended.
2 CDMA-ENG935 : Understanding CDMA
3 GSM-ENG941 : Understanding GSM
4 ENG946

Audience
This course is intended for account representatives,
programmers, communications or operations
managers, and system engineers.

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
This module is designed to provide a profile of services to the world of untethered and mobile communications.
UMTS will support a wide range of applications and seamless services in multiple mobility environments. It takes
an evolutionary phased approach, moving toward an all IP network with strong roots developed from second
generation GSM and GPRS network designs and CDMA access technologies.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Explain what UMTS is all about and how it meets the requirements of Third Generation wireless systems and
networks.
Identify the capabilities, market potential and release timeline of UMTS.
Describe the UMTS's Core Network and Terrestrial Radio Access Network architectures including their
components, interfaces, and protocols.
Explain UMTS's open services architecture including its structure, service capabilities and its Application
Programming Interface.
Identify and explain the major characteristics of the UMTS air interface, including its various modes of
operation and channel types and the detailed characteristics of its Wideband CDMA technology in both uplink
and downlink directions.
Describe how mobility in UMTS is managed, and explain how calls and data sessions are handled in the circuitswitched and packet-switched domains.

360

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

TDMA Courses
TDMA Technology courses equip the student with the knowledge required to commission, maintain, monitor and
optimize TDMA networks. It is imperative that course descriptions are read to confirm suitability for each student
and to ensure that all prerequisite training is completed.

TDMA-ENG932 : Understanding TDMA .............................................................................................................. 362

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

361

TDMA-ENG932 : Understanding TDMA

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

Self-paced, approximately 16 hours

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

Log onto to Motorolas Lifecycle Services On-Line


(https://services.motorola.com), and click on the Technical
Training Direct link.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 An understanding of the basics of wireless
communications.

Audience
This course is intended for people who want an
understanding of the breadth of technical concepts
behind TDMA, as well as how TDMA fits into the
wireless industry.

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
This module is designed to present an overview TDMA, including:
Introduction to TDMA
Principles of Cellular and Digital Radio
TDMA Network Aspects
Digital Traffic Channel: Step-by-Step
TDMA Logical and Physical Channels
TDMA Services and TDMA Evolution

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Compare the various network and radio technologies used for all TDMA call types, such as voice calls and
packet data sessions.

362

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

Analog Courses
Analog Technology courses equip the student with the knowledge required to commission, maintain, monitor and
optimize Analog networks. It is imperative that course descriptions are read to confirm suitability for each student
and to ensure that all prerequisite training is completed.

ANA-BTS110 : SC 9600 Base Transceiver Station for Stand-Alone Analog Systems..................................... 364
ANA-GNL020 : Analog Cellular Overview Companion CD-ROM ........................................................................ 366
ANA-GNL030 : Analog Cellular Systems Overview............................................................................................. 365
ANA-SWT040 : EMX 2500 Overview................................................................................................................ 367

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

363

ANA-BTS110 : SC 9600 Base Transceiver Station for


Stand-Alone Analog Systems
Duration

Practical/Lab Content

5 days

Yes

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

Offered by the Latin America and Caribbean Motorola


training facilities only, or other premises by
arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 ANA-GNL020 : Analog Cellular Overview Companion CDROM
2 ANA-GNL030 : Analog Cellular Systems Overview
3 GEN-NET100 : UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals
4 Working knowledge of/or experience with Code
Division Multiple Access (CDMA) or cellular system
technologies

Audience
People involved with the optimization and
maintenance of the SC 9600 SAS BTS

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This module is describes the subsystems, functionality, and operation of the SC 9600 Base Transceiver Station
(BTS) in a Stand-alone Analog System (SAS). Hands-on laboratory activities allow the student to perform
optimization, calibration, and Acceptance Test Procedures (ATP) on the SC 9600 BTS.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of the course the student will be able to:
Perform optimization, calibration and ATP tests on the SC 9600 SAS BTS.
identify components, functionality, frame features, and configurations used with the RF Modem Frame (RFMF),
Site Interface Frame (SIF), Expandable Linear Power Amplifier (ELPA) frame and Linear Power Amplifier (LPA)
frame
Describe features specific to the Windows Local Maintenance Facility (WLMF) including command use and
functionality
Optimize the BTS including:
Download of the BTS
Verification of the RF paths within the BTS
Calibrate the transmit and receive paths of the BTS, including download and verification of bay level offsets
Perform Acceptance Test Procedures (ATP)

364

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

ANA-GNL030 : Analog Cellular Systems Overview

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

5 days

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 ANA-GNL020 : Analog Cellular Overview Companion CDROM

Audience
The course is designed for people who require a
technical overview and functional description of a
Motorola-based analog cellular telephone system

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This course provides an overview of cellular communications and the components, equipment, and operation of a
typical analog cellular system

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
identify the subsystems of an analog cellular system, describe the interface between the subsystems, and
describe the cellular call process flow.
In this course, you will learn to:
Describe the similarities and differences in analog cellular systems worldwide.
Identify the features and components of Motorola cellular subscriber units.
Compare advantages and disadvantages of different cell site configurations and frequency re-use patterns.
Describe the cellular message types required to establish, maintain, and control cellular phone calls.
Identify the different types of each of the Motorola analog cell sites.
Discuss the major subsystems of an EMX-based Mobile Telephone Switch Office (MTSO).
Trace a call through the switch block diagram.
List common system features available through EMX software.
Describe the different types of EMX records.
Analyze, then trace a call through a call detail record.

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

365

ANA-GNL020 : Analog Cellular Overview Companion CDROM


Duration

Practical/Lab Content

Self-paced

None

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

A recognized Motorola training facility, or other


premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


None

Audience
Technical and nontechnical personnel (including
recently hired employees of Motorola or other cellular
service companies) who require a high-level
description of the components and operation of a
Motorola analog cellular system.

Features
CD-ROM disk with supplemental text

Course Content
This is a self-paced computer-based course delivered on CD-ROM which provides a description of the major
components and operation of a Motorola cellular system. Using an interactive course map, students can navigate
through the units of study contained in the Analog Cellular Overview course. Included on the CD-ROM, and used
in conjunction with accompanying text manual, are:
An orientation video.
Full motion video segments.
Text resources
Criterion tests for each course module.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
describe the major components of the analog cellular system and their relationship.
In this course, you will learn to:
Describe the name, function and operation of each FM radio component.
Describe the architecture, major components, and terminology associated with the telephone network.
Identify characteristics unique to each of the nine frequency spectra used worldwide.
Describe events that occur during each type of cellular call.
Identify the functions and components of the subscriber unit, cell site and EMX switch.
Define the concepts and terms related to the development of digital cellular technology.
Describe the role of Motorola in the cellular marketplace. \

366

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

ANA-SWT040 : EMX 2500 Overview

Duration

Practical/Lab Content

3 days

Yes

Location

Prerequisite Motorola Courses

Offered by the Mundelein Motorola training facility


only, or other premises by arrangement.

Refer to the course prerequisite policy.


1 ANA-GNL020 : Analog Cellular Overview Companion CDROM

Audience
People who require an overall description of the
EMX 2500 switch, as well as the subsystem
component functions, capabilities, and capacities of
the EMX 2500 switch.

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This course provides a description of the components and capabilities of the EMX 2500 switch.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be familiar with the basic components, architecture, and
capabilities of the EMX 2500 switch.
In this course, you will learn to:
describe the primary functions of any EMX 2500 switch subsystem and the physical attributes of each frame
identify the capacities of a minimum and expansion configuration and the major blocks of the alarm subsystem
list the alarm classes, alarm log types, IPR log types, and the three IPR states
describe billing and statistical information generated by the EMX 2500 including:
the devices necessary for Call Detail Record (CDR) generation and storage
the relationship between Automatic Message Accounting (AMA) batch files and the billing file
the different types of call records
Traffic Metering and Measuring (TMM) data storage, the major TMM reporting systems
commands to display or distribute Automatic Message Accounting AMA/TMM data
identify modifications required, subsystem hierarchy control, and additional PCBs required for R2 support

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

367

368

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

Registration Forms
These forms are provided to assist you in registering for courses. For faster registration, and for the most up-todate schedules and availability, register online at the Lifecycle Services website at https://services.motorola.com.

January 2002

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

369

370

Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com

January 2002

MOTOROLA and the Stylized M Logo are registered in the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office. All other product or service
names are the property of their respective owners.
Motorola, Inc. 2002
.

68P09300A86-O
January 2002